GIFT   OF 


Letters  from  the  Teacher 


Letters   from   the  Teacher 

By  the  Teacher  of 
©rfcer  of       15 


Transcribed  by 
HARRIETTE  AUGUSTA  CURTISS.  F.  O.  15 

and 

F.  HOMER  CURTISS.  B.  S..  M.  D..  F.  O.  15 
Secretary  of  tht  Order. 


SECOND  EDITION 


PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  ORDER 
BY 

THE  CURTISS  BOOK  COMPANY 

LOS  ANGELES,  CAL. 


THE  ORDER   OF  THE   15 


Copyright  1913 

by 

F.  HOMER  CURTISS.  M.  D. 
Los  Angeles.  Cal. 


The  Hick«-Judd  Company 
Printers  and  Bookbinders 
51-65  First  St.,  San  Francisco 


H/5 


Dedication 

To  that  Great  Teacher  who  brought  the 
Wisdom-Religion  to  the  Western 

World,  known  on  earth  as 
HELENA  PETROVNA  BLAVATSKY 

this  volume  is  affectionately  dedicated 

by  her  loving  pupils  and  disciples, 

Pyrahmos  and  Rahmea. 


258635 


Preface  to  First  Edition 

The  Letters  from  the  Teacher  of  The  Order  of 
the  15,  in  answer  to  questions  from  pupils,  are  of 
such  universal  interest  to  seekers  after  Wisdom 
that  we  consider  them  far  too  valuable  to  be  confined 
merely  to  the  ones  to  whom  they  were  addressed. 
Therefore  we  make  available  extracts  from  the  more 
important  ones. 

With  a  few  exceptions  the  selection  has  been 
confined  to  those  received  during  the  first  six  months 
of  the  work  (January  to  June,  1908).  But  even 
these  few  cover  a  wide  field  and  deal  with  a  diversity 
of  subjects  not  dealt  with  elsewhere  in  the  same 
frank  and  common-sense  way.  Hence  they  fill  a 
distinct  want  in  occult  literature. 

The  letters  are  genuine  extracts  from  originals 
still  in  possession  of  the  Secretary,  but  in  many 
cases  the  Editor  has  taken  the  liberty  of  condensing 
the  spirit  of  a  letter  into  a  simple  question. 

Fraternally  yours, 
F.  HOMER  CURTISS,  M.  D. 

Secretary  of  the  Order. 


Preface  to  the  Second  Edition 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  first  edition  of  Letters 
From  the  Teacher  was  sold  out  in  less  than  a  year, 
even  second-hand  copies  being  unobtainable,  the 
growth  of  the  Order  and  the  removal  of  the  Center 
to  Los  Angeles  has  delayed  the  publishing  of  a  second 
edition  until  now. 

We  are  happy  to  present  this  edition  in  a  greatly 
improved  typographical  form;  in  fact  uniform  with 
The  Voice  of  Isisf  to  which  it  forms  a  companion 
volume. 

We  are  continually  receiving  requests  from  various 
parts  of  the  world  for  Volume  II  of  these  Letters. 
Such  a  volume  we  were  planning  to  have  follow  this 
as  soon  as  we  could  find  the  time  to  select  the  material 
from  the  thousands  of  letters  in  our  files,  but  the  de- 
mand for  books  dealing  directly  with  Christian  Mys- 
ticism is  so  great  that  we  will  have  to  postpone  compil- 
ing a  second  volume  of  Letters  until  our  text-books 
on  the  philosophy  (The  Symbology  of  Genesis,  The 
Mysticism  of  Revelation,  The  Mystic  Life  of  Jesus, 
etc.),  have  been  issued. 

Fraternally  yours, 

F.  HOMER  CURTISS,  M.  D., 

Secretary  of  the  Order. 
1723  McCadden  Place, 
Los  Angeles,  Cal. 


Table  of  Contents 
PART  I. 

PAGE  15 
SPIRITUAL  GROWTH  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 

An  experience  in  opening  the  Third  Eye — Law  of 
Activity  and  Passivity — when  the  exaltation  cometh — 
grow  as  the  flower  grows — symbol  of  the  oak  and  the 
violet — doing  the  duty  that  lies  nearest — do,  not  talk — 
words  are  sacred — effect  of  wasted  words — train  the 
mind  to  be  used  as  a  tool — role  of  book-learning — use 
of  metaphors — the  reason  for  burdens — meaning  of 
living  close  to  Nature  —  the  Dweller  and  the 
Guardian  —  what  is  the  I,  the  Ego,  the  Soul, 
the  Spirit? — unseen  helpers  always  near — reason 
for  studying  together — symbol  of  three  days  in  the 
tomb — faith-cures  for  poverty — has  man  free-will? — 
life  of  community  partakes  of  all  elements  composing 
it — illustration  of  dot  in  circle — how  to  form  a  vital 
nucleus  of  spiritual  power — each  must  be  an  example — 
the  attainment  of  poise — why  the  need  of  redemption  ? 
— subjective  mediumship  versus  quenching  of  the 
Spirit — when  the  mind  gives  out,  what  then  ? — is  mind 
man's  greatest  gift? — how  to  enter  the  Silence — why 
not  become  a  medium? — the  constructive  and  destruc- 
tive methods — how  to  distinguish  the  Real  Self — how 
to  strengthen  Spiritual  Will. 

PART  II. 

PAGE  63 
THE    MASTERS    OF    WISDOM    AND   THEIR    WORK. 

Jesus  a  Master  of  Masters — source  of  spiritual  help 
— the  Great  Sifter — cause  of  upheavals  in  occult  so- 
cieties— how  to  understand  the  Law — the  Shining 
Ones  described — the  Fire-body,  how  attained — money 
for  spiritual  food — results  of  forced  development — 
Agents  of  this  Order  not  mediums — the  sheep  and  the 
goats — origin  of  the  apes — danger  of  occult  exercises 


8  Contents — Cont'd 

— meaning  of  the  term  Master — mission  of  the  Bab — 
how  to  gain  personal  contact  with  the  Masters. 

PART  III. 

PAGE  89 
CONCERNING  THE  ORDER  OF  THE   15. 

The  personalities  of  the  agents  unimportant — the 
teachings  their  own  authority— why  this  Order  is  not 
connected  with  others — how  to  judge  a  Movement — 
individual  development  recognized — allegiance  to  other 
schools — choosing  your  spiritual  food— each  Move- 
ment helpful  to  some — the  motive  in  contributing— 
how  the  work  is  carried  on. 

PART  IV. 

PAGE  103 
PRAYER. 

Definition  of  prayer — the  law  of — necessity  for— 
how  answered — right  to  use  prayer  for  healing — ex- 
tremes of  prayer — simile  of  the  circle  and  dot — lesson 
of  living  in  an  almshouse — The  Shining  Ones. 

PART  V. 

PAGE  113 
THE  ASTRAL-PLANE. 

Definition  of — consciousness  the  only  reality — how 
entities  function  in  the  astral — is  the  Hall  of  Learn- 
ing— all  states  real — wrong  to  force  growth — divisions 
of  the  astral — choosing  incarnation — communicating 
with  the  dead — subjective  mediumship  versus  spiritual 
communion  —  effect  of  subjective  mediumship  — 
mediumistic  control  a  destructive  process— astral 
entities  not  spiritual— how  to  judge  mediumistic 
advice — how  to  judge  the  method  used — results  of 
Atlantean  Karma — helping  those  who  have  passed  on 
— results  of  the  change  called  death — psychic  tremors 
— how  to  challenge  psychic  experiences — inheriting 
devils — an  experience  with  an  astral  beast — "The 


Contents — Cont'd  9 

Dweller  on  the  Threshold" — why  many  astral  entities 
know  nothing  about  reincarnation. 

PART  VI. 

PAGE  141 
PHENOMENA. 

An  amusing  prank  of  elementals — luminous  ether — 
forming  the  Ring-pass-not — fear  of  the  elementals  of 
the  wind — color-knowing — Nature's  alphabet,  form, 
color,  tone,  number — significance  of  yellow  in  visions — 
purple  light  seen  while  walking — meaning  of  electrical 
sensations  among  psychics. 

PART  VII. 

PAGE  151 
DREAMS    AND    VISIONS. 

Why  your  description  is  necessary  in  interpreting 
dreams  and  visions — how  the  Higher  Self  sends  you  a 
vision — dream  of  an  ice-bound  plain — dream  of  being 
judged  by  Jesus  before  an  initiation — vision  of  a  full 
moon  and  three  sunrises — vision  of  sunflowers — mean- 
ing of  violets. 

PART  VIII. 

PAGE  159 
HEALTH  AND  DISEASE. 

Jesus  as  head  of  the  Healing  Hierarchy — how  to  use 
The  Healing  Prayer — fasting  to  attain  Christ-powers 
— physical  health  needed — take  good  care  of  the  body 
but  make  it  a  servant — those  who  dwell  on  what  they 
shall  not  eat — reason  for  illness  as  a  result  of  spiritual 
readjustment — effect  of  The  Healing  Prayer — bodily 
weakness  not  failure — extreme  sensitiveness — morbid 
sensitiveness  —  thoughts  are  things  —  bearing  the 
world's  sorrow — Christian  Science  a  modern  cult — how 
to  better  earth-conditions — denial  does  not  readjust — 
what  a  mental  healer  must  know — surgery  advised  in 
certain  cases — relief  versus  cure — taking  anesthetics — 
mediumistic  advice  on  healing — Divine  Healing. 


10  Contents— Con  fd 

PART  IX. 

PAGE  179 
THE  SEX   PROBLEM. 

Has  each  Soul  a  mate  or  is  celibacy  the  ideal? — sex 
an  expression  of  the  Divine  in  matter — the  symbol  of 
the  serpent — the  Tree  of  Life — creation  according  to 
thoughts  held — peopling  the  astral — sex-force  a 
sacred  power — creates  according  to  desires — reason  for 
lack  of  children  in  well-to-do  families — each  Soul  a  line 
in  the  Grand  Plan — tangled  lines  must  be  straightened 
out — redemption  of  the  Race — true  marriage  unites 
Souls — should  go  hand  in  hand — birth  of  an  Avatar 
— conditions  necessary — the  blood  of  the  Lamb — the 
sex-question  not  a  topic  for  promiscuous  discussion — 
sex  relations  permissible  only  between  the  legally  mar- 
ried— Karma  of  legal  barriers  must  be  worked  out — so- 
called  "physical  relief"  never  necessary — how  to  divert 
the  force  into  other  channels — physical  purity  essential 
to  spiritual  advance — suppression  is  abnormal — trans- 
mutation the  remedy — sex-relations  are  inherently 
pure,  sacred  and  divinely  ordained — legal  marriage— 
seven-fold  manifestation  of  the  Law — Polarity — the 
Law  must  be  fulfilled  in  Love — the  law  of  man — three 
parties  to  the  marriage  vow — was  Jesus  married  ? — re- 
sults of  teaching  celibacy — conventionalities  necessary 
— Jesus'  teachings  on  divorce — becoming  eunuchs  for 
the  kingdom  of  heaven's  sake — marriage  in  the  resur- 
rection— how  to  overcome  impure  thoughts,  dreams 
and  habits — a  normal  and  successful  method. 

PART  X. 

PAGE  209 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

Did  man  descend  from  the  ape? — criticizing  other 
teachers — what  is  imagination  and  fancy  ? — the  geome- 
try of  Nature — how  to  reincarnate  immediately — effect 
of  vivisection  on  animals — how  the  Soul  chooses  incar- 
nation— do  animals  have  Souls? — reincarnation  of 
animals — evil  the  result  of  man's  disobedience — 
loyalty  to  teachings,  not  teachers. 


Appendix 

PAGB 

The  Morning  Prayer  -    -     -    - 231 

The  Prayer  of  Devotion    -     - 231 

The  Healing  Prayer 232 

How  to  Form  a  Study  Class -  232 

Announcement     -----------  234 

Special  Information  concerning  the  Order  -     -  235 

How  to  Join  -  244 

Index    --------- 247 


Letters  from  the  Teacher 


PART  I. 
SPIRITUAL  GROWTH  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 

"Now  we  have  received,  not  the  spirit  of  the  world, 
but  the  spirit  which  is  of  God;  that  we  might  know 
the  things  that  are  freely  given  to  us  of  God.  Which 
things  we  also  speak,  not  in  the  words  which  man's 
wisdom  teacheth,  but  which  the  Holy  Ghost  teacheth ; 
comparing  spiritual  things  with  spiritual.  But  the 
natural  man  receiveth  not  the  things  of  the  Spirit  of 
God :  for  they  are  foolishness  unto  him :  neither  can  he 
know  them,  because  they  are  spiritually  discerned." 
/  Corinthians  II,  12-14. 

"Men  who  are  devoid  of  the  power  of  spiritual  per- 
ception are  unable  to  recognize  the  existence  of  any- 
thing that  cannot  be  seen  externally."  Paracelsus. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  15 

PART  L 
SPIRITUAL  GROWTH  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 

July  6th,  1908. 

"For  a  period  of  several  weeks  I  was  able  to 
know  how  to  help  my  fellows  in  many  ways,  not 
of  my  own  power  but  by  a  wonderful  love  of  the 
Creator.  Much  of  this  capacity  has  now  left  me, 
owing  I  believe  to  my  spiritual  pride,  but  this 
world  is  now  a  different  place.  This  exaltation 
of  spirit  was  looked  upon  by  those  nearest  and 
dearest  as  a  sign  of  brain  trouble,  but  if  it  is  I 

am  happier  with   it  than  without Now 

I  want  help  to  develop  the  powers  I  possess,  as 
I  hope  it  may  be  given  to  me  to  help  others.  If 
your  teachings  are  such  as  will  show  me  how  to 
grow  without  appearing  abnormal  in  my  actions 

I    will    thankfully   and   patiently   learn 

But  duties  to  those  nearest  and  dearest 

hold  me  back." 

The  experience  of  which  you  speak  was  a  momen- 
tary opening  of  the  Third  Eye — the  pineal  gland. 
This  sometimes  happens  before  the  disciple  has  learned 
to  function  consciously  on  the  soul-plane  and  is  a  fore- 
taste of  what  you  can  look  forward  to  in  the  future. 
As  you  say,  spiritual  pride  would  quickly  cause  you  to 
fall  backward  on  the  Path.  If  you  are  conscious  of  the 
temptation  and  are  making  earnest  efforts  to  conquer 
and  are  sincerely  working  from  the  standpoint  of  love 
for  your  fellow  men,  the  mere  fact  of  the  discontinu- 
ance of  the  soul-faculty  of  reaching  up  into  the  higher 
realms  and  drawing  direct  from  the  Fount  of  all  Wis- 
dom should  not  discourage  you.  The  Third  Eye 
sometimes  opens  in  moments  of  great  spiritual  exalta- 
tion or  in  deep  meditation,  and  then  closes  again,  but 


16  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

if  you  retained  the  faculty  of  knowing  for  some  weeks, 
it  is  surely  the  result  of  conscious  effort  and  is  an  in- 
dex of  soul  development,  either  in  this  or  past  lives. 

Since  all  phenomena,  either  familiar  or  the  so-called 
supernatural,  are  subject  to  the  law  of  "the  pairs  of 
opposites"  they  follow  the  rhythmic  Law  of  Activity 
and  Passivity,  out-breathing  and  in-breathing,  day  and 
night.  After  a  period  of  manifestation  there  would 
naturally  follow  a  period  of  indrawing,  a  night  period. 
Instead  of  this  being  a  loss  it  is  just  as  necessary  as 
is  the  night.  It  is  a  period  in  which  to  rest  and  re- 
cuperate your  faculties.  It  is  only  in  these  periods  of 
indrawing  and  rest  that,  if  we  understand  the  Law 
and  make  a  mental  effort  through  study  and  medita- 
tion, we  can  digest  what  has  been  given  to  us,  so  that 
when  the  day-period  again  dawns  we  will  be  ready  to 
use  the  power  wisely,  understandingly  and  under  full 
control  of  the  Will.  Do  not  waste  time  lamenting  the 
fact  that  the  night  has  come,  but  use  the  time  to  re- 
new your  strength  so  that  when  the  morning  dawns 
you  will  be  able  to  go  forth  in  the  power  and  might 
of  The  Living  Christ  to  uplift  the  fallen,  comfort  the 
feeble  and  the  weak  and  work  for  the  good  of  all. 

A  word  of  caution,  brother,  when  the  exaltation 
cometh.  Try  to  hold  it  subject  to  the  Will.  Be  not 
unduly  elated,  for  "He  that  ruleth  himself  is  greater 
than  he  who  taketh  a  city."  It  takes  a  stronger  man 
to  rule  himself  when  under  the  powerful  exaltation 
of  Divine  Wisdom  than  it  does  to  rule  the  lower  ap- 
petites. Just  as  far  as  the  pendulum  swings  to  one 
side  must  it  swing  back  again.  If  we  exhaust  our- 
selves in  one  day,  the  night  must  be  long  and  spent 
in  sleep,  but  if  we  conquer  Self  and  remain  calm  and 
dispassionate  the  days  and  nights  will  be  equal  or  even 
with  only  a  short  period  of  rest  between,  so  that  one 


Spiritual  Groivth  and  Development  17 

may  work  steadily  on  without  being  depressed  during 
each  night-period. 

To  develop  your  powers  study  Nature.  Grow  as 
the  flower  grows.  You  love  the  sun  (The  Christ) 
because  through  it  you  must  unfold  whatever  is  good 
within  you  and  give  it  out  for  the  good  of  mankind. 
Pay  no  more  attention  to  the  manner  of  your  unfold- 
ing than  does  the  rose.  Open  your  heart  to  The  Christ 
and  grow.  Jesus  said,  "If  ye  have  faith  as  a  grain  of 
mustard  seed,  ye  shall  say  unto  this  mountain,  Remove 
hence  to  yonder  place;  and  it  shall  remove;  and  noth- 
ing shall  be  impossible  unto  you."  That  is  the  kind 
of  faith  you  must  have — faith  that  within  you  is  the 
germ  of  The  Christ-power,  and  that  through  it  you 
can  fulfill  all  the  law  of  your  being.  The  tiny  grain 
of  mustard  seed  never  doubts  that  it  has  the  power  to 
grow  into  a  tree  in  which  the  birds  of  the  air  shall 
lodge,  apparently  impossible  though  this  may  seem 
while  a  seed.  It  obeys  the  law  of  its  being  and  just 

frows  on  in  perfect  faith  that  it  has  the  power  to  ful- 
11  its  destiny.  If  you  bask  in  the  Sun  of  Righteous- 
ness, to  keep  from  growing  normally  would  be  impos- 
sible. Learn  to  love,  and  forget.  Become  so  inter- 
ested in  works  of  mercy  and  helpfulness  that  you  will 
know  that  you  are  growing  only  by  the  perfume  of 
good  that  surrounds  you  and  by  your  increased  ability 
to  help  others. 

Leave  no  duty,  no  matter  how  humble,  undone.  The 
"nearest  and  dearest"  would  not  be  the  nearest  and 
dearest  if  your  first  duty  were  not  to  them.  The  mus- 
tard tree  and  the  rose  take  to  themselves  and  assimi- 
late only  the  pollen  of  their  kind,  and  must  do  so  ere 
they  can  bring  forth  and  grow  to  perfection.  But  this 
does  not  deter  them  from  spreading  their  branches  to 
the  sun  and  making  a  nesting  place  for  the  birds  and 


18  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

giving  out  nectar  (which  when  transmuted  into  honey 
by  the  bees,  becomes  food  for  man),  shelter  for  cattle 
and  grateful  shade  and  comfort  for  all  created  things. 
All  this  by  just  growing  naturally  in  their  place.  Take 
the  little  duties  as  they  come,  for  not  one  step  can  be 
missed.  The  man  who  is  always  looking  at  the  top 
of  the  mountain  stumbles  over  the  jagged  rocks  at  its 
base,  but  the  man  who  is  so  busy  helping  others  to 
climb  that  he  has  no  time  to  stand  gazing  at  the  heights 
is  the  one  who  gets  to  the  top  almost  before  he  knows 

it 

There  will  be  no  abnormality  in  your  growth  if  you 
follow  this  advice.  Any  concentration  upon  the  vital 
centers,  or  even  upon  the  development  of  certain 
powers,  is  injurious  and  is  apt  to  lead  to  spiritual  pride 
and  black  magic.  If  you  seek  to  grow  in  Nature's 
way — for  there  is  but  one  Law  of  Growth — whatever 
is  within  you  will  develop  normally.  Whatever  you 
have  earned  as  your  own  and  have  assimilated  is  yours 
by  karmic  right,  hence  growth  means  bringing  this 
out,  i.  e.,  what  you  have  really  assimilated.  The  mus- 
tard seed  grows  into  a  mustard  tree,  with  all  its  heal- 
ing and  medicinal  qualities ;  the  rose  develops  into  the 
queen  of  all  flowers,  giving  out  its  refreshing  perfume 
— the  symbol  of  love — to  all.  The  spiritual  lesson  is 
that  both  grow  and  unfold  by  merely  doing  the  duty 
that  lies  nearest,  that  which  is  next  at  hand.  They 
assimilate  the  earth-forces,  the  water,  the  air  and  the 
sun.  Go  thou  and  do  likewise. 

Concentrate  each  day  upon  The  Christ  within.  Hold 
fast  to  this  main  idea,  that  through  the  power  of  The 
Christ  you  can  meet  and  conquer  all  that  comes  to 
you.  Above  all,  learn  to  keep  silent.  "Dare,  Do, 
Keep  Silent"  is  the  motto  of  this  Order.  The  Master 
Jesus  never  talked  of  what  He  could  do,  but  when  the 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  19 

time  came  He  simply  did.  Much  force  is  wasted  in 
words.  The  disciple  needs  to  learn  to  concentrate  his 
power  in  acts.  If  he  talks  he  dissipates  the  power  so 
that  the  act  is  feeble.  Never  say  that  you  can  do  so 
and  so,  just  go  ahead  and  do  it. 

March  13th,  1908. 

"I  see  myself  in  hell  struggling  for  escape.  It 
seems  hopeless  sometimes." 

Your  condition  and  the  struggle  you  are  making,  is 
under  our  watchful  care.  But,  dear  brother,  try  to 
realize  that  when  bound  on  the  Wheel  of  Karma,  to 
struggle  but  makes  the  cords  cut  deeper  into  your 
quivering  flesh.  Stop  struggling.  Lo!  I  say  unto 
you :  Peace,  be  still.  All  is  well.  Learn  the  lesson 
of  saying,  "Thy  will  be  done,"  knowing  that  the  Will 
of  the  Father  is  victory  and  that  it  will  and  must 
come.  To  think  so  much  about  your  shortcomings 
and  limitations  is  but  to  give  them  life  and  force,  for 
thoughts  are  things  and  create  after  their  kind.  De- 
termine to  think  strength,  love  and  confidence  until 
you  draw  them  to  you  and  build  them  into  your  life. 
If  the  evil  does  not  at  once  fly  away  then  persistently 
refuse  to  give  it  life.  Do  not  recognize  it.  Repeat 
the  little  Morning  Prayer  each  day  and  make  it  a  liv- 
ing factor  in  your  life.  Rest  in  the  positive  belief 
that  the  love  and  help  that  you  reach  out  for  is  yours 
for  the  taking.  "Ask  and  ye  shall  receive." 

July  6th,   1908. 

"I  have  said  much  more  than  I  intended  to 
write,  but  if  you  know  my  motive  and  my  desire 
you  will  understand  why  the  words  kept  coming." 

As  to  saying  more  than  is  wise  in  your  letters  to  us, 
fear  not  to  talk  plainly  to  your  Teacher,  for  only  thus 


20  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

can  you  come  into  close  touch.  Words  are  sacred 
things  though  few  there  be  who  realize  it.  Words 
should  be  to  thought  what  steam  is  to  the  engine;  if 
directed  to  the  cylinder  and  flywheel  the  engine  does 
perfect  work,  but  if  the  steam  escapes  through  many 
tiny  holes  and  cracks  the  power  available  for  real  work 
is  diminished;  and  wasted  steam,  like  idle  words,  is  an 
indication  of  dissipated  power.  Man  alone  has  the 
power  to  formulate  thought  into  words.  A  parrot  can 
imitate  the  sounds  of  words,  but  only  man  has  reached 
the  point  of  development  where  he  is  capable  of 
rightly  using  this  gift.  It  is  a  great  responsibility. 
Every  word  we  utter  has  not  only  its  vibrations,  but, 
together  with  the  form,  color  and  number  of  the  let- 
ters composing  it,  possesses  a  potency  that  will  never 
die,  but  go  on  and  on  through  the  ages  until  we,  their 
creator,  by  the  power  of  The  Christ  within,  shall  have 
redeemed  them.  Be  their  power  for  good  or  ill  it 
forms  one  of  the  very  considerable  forces  that  go  to 
make  up  the  Law  of  Karma.  It  is  one  of  those  crops 
the  sowing  of  which  we  are  told  we  shall  surely  reap. 
Learn  to  value  words  as  an  index  of  thought.  Make 
them  your  obedient  servants.  Do  not  waste  them. 
Make  every  one  count  for  something,  for  "For  every 
idle  word  must  thou  give  an  account."  Do  not  con- 
sider them  idle,  however,  even  if  apparently  trifling 
and  foolish,  provided  they  bring  cheer  and  com- 
fort into  the  life  of  some  other.  They  are  only  idle 
when  wasted  in  mere  talking  instead  of  doing. 

Try  to  be  as  natural  as  possible  in  your  dealing  with 
your  fellows.  Never  seem  to  claim  for  yourself  any 
distinction  above  others,  but  hold  fast  within  to  the 
thought  that  the  power  of  The  Christ  that  worketh 
through  you  will  never  disappoint  you  or  fail  you. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  21 

May  23rd,  1908. 

"I  have  not  the  constant  capacity  to  see  the 
Father  in  each  experience  in  daily  life.  I  am 
growing,  however,  and  am  determined  to  per- 
severe, to  make  a  living  sacrifice  of  the  self  and 

learn  how  to  transmute  its  forces I  say 

sometimes  I  think  like  this,  then  am  drawn  back 
again  into  sense  life  and  sink  like  a  sodden 
leaf." 

You  have  caught  the  idea  and  have  clothed  it  and 
have  created  out  of  it  an  ideal.  This  is  half  the  battle. 
You  know  that  when  a  man  tries  to  invent  a  thing  or 
put  into  shape  something  which  for  a  long  time  has 
lain  dormant  in  his  mind,  an  important  step  has  been 
taken  when  he  finds  that  he  is  able  to  think  it  all  out 
in  a  practical  way,  and  perhaps  even  make  a  sketch. 
After  that  the  making  of  the  model  is  not  half  so  diffi- 
cult. Therefore,  make  your  ideal  coherent  and  hold 
it  fast.  Build  upon  it,  step  by  step,  the  Immortal  Be- 
ing which  you  know  exists  within  yourself. 

As  to  what  you  say  about  your  lack  of  mental  ability 
being  an  obstacle,  we  reply  that,  naturally,  while  the 
lower  mind  can  never  evolve  into  the  spiritual  mind, 
yet  the  lower  mind  has  an  important  work  to  do  in 
moulding  and  shaping  the  brain  particles  for  the  use 
of  the  Higher  Self.  In  gaining  the  ability  to  grasp 
the  highest  vibrations  the  lower  mind  becomes  a  well 
trained  servant  to  the  Higher  Self.  It  is  therefore 
necessary  to  learn  how  to  control  and  train  the  mind 
and  cultivate  the  intellect;  but  it  is  well  to  bear  in 
mind  that  the  intellect  is  but  the  servant  or  tool  for 
the  mind  to  use.  Moreover,  intellectuality  is  not  tested, 
as  is  generally  supposed,  by  the  amount  of  education 
one  has  had,  for,  while  education  does  its  work  in 
training  the  lower  mind,  yet  the  mind  once  trained 
and  the  brain  built  up  into  a  fitting  instrument  for  the 


22  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

use  of  the  Higher  Mind,  it  must  then  pass  through  an 
incarnation  in  which  education — so-called  book-learn- 
ing— will  be  denied  it,  and  conditions  in  life  will  make 
it  impossible.  The  man  or  woman  will  be  born  into 
conditions  where  they  will  be  forced  by  circumstances 
to  forego  what  seems  to  be  their  rightful  heritage. 
You  often  see  this  and  remark,  "So-and-so  is  so  capa- 
ble, yet  he  has  never  had  more  than  a  common-school 
education."  Such  an  one  would  naturally  look  upon 
this  as  a  great  loss.  But  the  fact  is  that,  having  had 
all  opportunities  for  education  in  past  lives,  he  has 
reached  a  point  where  the  physical  brain  is  to  be 
moulded  into  an  instrument  to  use  along  other  lines 
and  therefore  the  old  lines  of  thought  are  withheld. 
They  are  no  longer  needed  by  the  Soul  and  it  would 
be  senseless  to  go  on  training  the  lower  mind  along 
them.  If  it  is  persisted  in  the  man  will  become  an 
intellectual  machine,  lacking  in  heart.  Therefore,  if 
the  brain  development  has  not  gone  hand  in  hand  with 
the  desire  for  spiritual  advance,  the  incarnating  Ego 
will  select  a  vehicle  and  an  environment  in  which 
everything,  perhaps  poverty,  squalid  surroundings, 
even  sin,  will  tend  to  force  the  overcoming  of  obstacles, 
and  in  which  the  heart  must  be  cultivated  and  the 
brain  comparatively  neglected.  Such  an  incarnation 
successfully  passed  and  conquered,  the  brain  will  be 
capable  of  being  used  by  the  Higher  Self  to  a  greater 
degree  in  accord  with  the  capacity  it  has  developed. 

It  is  a  fact  that  the  Higher  Self  must  have  a  perfect 
instrument  if  it  is  perfectly  to  record  the  Spiritual  or 
Divine  Mind  upon  the  physical-plane,  for  the  Higher 
Self  can  only  express  itself  through  the  instrument 
it  possesses.  Through  an  imperfect  instrument  the 
Higher  Self  can  only  register  imperfectly,  but  this  does 
not  mean  that  a  brain  capable  of  less  than  perfect  use 


Spiritual  Groivth  and  Development  23 

is  any  great  drawback,  for  many  cultivate  the  love- 
centers  first.  This,  on  the  whole,  is  best,  but  before 
final  liberation  both  must  be  coordinated. 

Do  not  use  the  simile  "like  a  sodden  leaf,"  for  no 
living  Soul  can  ever  become  sodden,  i.  e.,  saturated 
with  water  (illusion).  Such  a  condition  could  only 
come  about  in  the  most  depraved,  and  only  after  the 
Higher  Self  had  been  forced  to  leave  the  personality 
to  death  and  disintegration — after  it  no  longer  con- 
tained a  living  Soul.  Only  after  eons  of  purification 

could  its  particles  again  be  given  expression 

The  use  of  metaphors  should  be  carefully  chosen,  for 
their  meaning  may  be  more  far  reaching  than  appears 
on  the  surface.  You  are  never  dead  or  sodden  while 
containing  one  thought  of  love  (life). 

You  are  but  conscious  of  the  ebb  and  flow  of  the 
spiritual  force,  and  your  feeling  of  depression  is  a 
perfectly  natural  result.  It  is  but  a  consciousness  of 
the  out-breathing  and  the  in-breathing  of  the  Great 
Breath.  At  the  out-breathing  all  is  activity,  while  the 
in-drawing  is  a  period  of  rest  comparable  to  the  night- 
time. Instead  of  allowing  yourself  to  sink  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  stream,  if  you  will  hold  the  thought  that  it 
is  but  the  night-time,  and  that  you  are  calmly  sleeping 
to  recruit  your  strength  and  assimilate  the  spiritual 
force  so  that  when  the  new  day  dawns  you  will  be 
ready  for  new  tasks,  you  will  be  strong  and  happy. 
In  your  study  of  the  conditions  of  life  and  the  trials 
that  beset  you,  remember  that  the  Soul  must  pass 
through,  or  be  made  to  face,  the  depths  of  human 
degradation  and  emerge  from  them  pure  and  unspot- 
ted. That  is,  after  having  gained  a  certain  point  in 
development  the  Soul  must  contact  such  conditions 
and  prove  itself  capable  of  living  in  them  without  be- 
ing of  them,  thus  gaining  mastery  over  them. 


24  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

May  25th,  1908. 

"I  have  an  85-year-old  father,  and  bad  men 
have  got  their  hands  on  his  property  and  mine, 
and  I  struggle  to  get  into  such  condition  that 
he  will  have  a  home  and  plenty.  I  pray,  hope  and 
battle  and  toil  almost  night  and  day;  for  father 
is  one  of  earth's  angels  who  has  labored  all 
his  life  in  doing  good.  My  work  to  keep  the 
home  nice,  to  care  for  him  and  to  attend  to  busi- 
ness leaves  me  not  a  moment  I  can  call  my  own." 

No  matter  what  the  burden  laid  upon  you,  it  is 
not  laid  there  merely  that  you  may  suffer,  nor  does 
any  God  wish  you  to  bear  it.  It  is  yours  because 
somehow,  somewhere,  sometime  you  missed  a  lesson 
in  life  that  only  this  heavy  burden  could  teach  you. 
Therefore,  conditions  worked  together  and  you  were 
brought  face  to  face  with  your  lesson.  Try  to  realize 
this.  Then,  if  you  can  admit  that  what  you  are  forced 
to  bear  is  meant  merely  as  a  lesson  to  point  out  some 
shortcoming  or  absolute  fault,  know  well  that  the  mo- 
ment you  learn  the  lesson  or  correct  the  fault  the  ex- 
perience will  no  longer  be  needed  and  it  will  pass 
away.  Perhaps  you  lack  faith,  or  patience  or  love, 
or  you  are  given  to  the  love  of  money,  for  we  do  not 
have  to  be  rich  to  love  money.  There  are  many  more 
poor  than  rich  who  love  it.  No  one  but  yourself  can 
put  a  finger  on  the  sore  spot,  but  when  once  you  have 
found  it  go  to  work  diligently,  with  all  your  heart,  to 
correct  the  fault. 

Rest  sure  in  the  love  of  your  Father-in-heaven  who 
has  said  that  "Not  one  of  these  little  ones  shall  per- 
ish." No  matter  how  little  you  are  in  your  own  mind, 
after  you  have  scraped  off  the  barnacles  that  are  sink- 
ing you  beneath  the  waters,  no  matter  how  heavy  your 
burden,  your  Heavenly  Father  (who  is  your  own 
Higher  Self)  will  not  let  you  perish.  He  will  take 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  25 

away  the  lesson  as  soon  as  it  is  learned  and  will  give 
you  another  which  may  require  better  physical  condi- 
tions. 

May  17th,  1908. 

"I  am  sure  that  I  am  growing,  yet  have  ex- 
perienced much  darkness.  I  try  to  believe,  I  do 
believe,  that  the  darkness  is  just  as  natural  as 

the    light    to    the    growing    plant This 

self,  the  Watcher  of  the  Threshold,  I  find  a  ter- 
rible monster,  and  seemingly,  all  but  impos- 
sible to  overcome.  Yet  while  the  fight  goes  on 
am  slowly  learning  to  say  and  live  the  words, 
'Thy  will  be  done.' " 

You  should  not  think  of  the  darkness  even  as  a 
night,  or  as  a  trial,  but  as  a  necessary  condition  for 
growth.  The  seed  will  never  take  root  unless  it  is 
buried  in  the  darkness  of  the  earth.  If  you  could 
penetrate  the  consciousness  of  a  growing  plant  you 
would  find  that,  while  it  spends  a  time  blindly  search- 
ing for  light,  sending  out  strong,  firm  roots  hunting 
here  and  there  in  the  dark  earth,  there  will  come  a 
time  later  on  when  it  will  have  gathered  the  conscious- 
ness necessary  to  send  up  its  sprout  into  the  light.  It 
will  then  recognize  that  the  period  of  darkness  was 
the  most  important  step,  for  without  good,  firm  roots 
it  would  be  withered  by  the  sunshine,  yet  the  sunshine 
was  what  it  was  seeking  all  the  time.  While  the  seed 
was  still  down  in  the  darkness  of  the  earth  it  was  the 
same  sun  that  was  giving  it  life  and  power  and  draw- 
ing its  sprout  upward  to  the  light  while  it  was  still 
mercifully  shielded  by  the  earth  from  the  too  strong 
beams  of  the  light  itself. 

You  are  often  told  to  live  close  to  Nature,  yet  very 
few  understand  the  significance  of  that  injunction.  It 
does  not  necessarily  mean  living  in  a  tent  or  sleeping 
on  the  ground,  but  it  does  mean  correlating  your  con- 


26  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

sciousness  with  Nature,  trying  through  meditation  to 
enter  into  the  phases  of  natural  growth  and  develop- 
ment, recognizing  the  similarity  and  the  oneness  of  all 
growth.  In  Nature  you  will  find  an  explanation  of 
every  experience  through  which  you  pass.  The  man 
who  has  learned  the  great  lesson  of  resting  on  the 
bosom  of  the  Great  Mother,  Nature,  and  breathing  in 
unison  with  her,  pulsating  with  her  heart-beats,  is  the 
one  who  lives  close  to  Nature,  no  matter  whether  he 
is  in  the  midst  of  the  whirling  business  life  of  a  great 
city  or  dwells,  as  Cowper  puts  it,  in  "A  lodge  in  some 
vast  wilderness,  far  from  the  evil  haunts  of  men." 

Learn  the  lesson  of  living  close  to  Nature  and  you 
will  find  that  the  Dweller,  whom  you  have  confused 
with  the  Watcher  or  Guardian — the  Guardian  being 
something  entirely  different — will  be  no  more  to  you 
than  are  the  cold  winter  blasts  and  other  material 
enemies  of  growth  that  are  conquered  not  by  fighting 
them,  but  by  a  persistent  drawing  to  yourself  of  the 
Life  Eternal  out  of  the  very  elements  of  discord. 
Nothing  in  the  nature  of  man  is  inherently  evil ;  it  is 
only  evil  through  its  misuse  and  the  evils  that  are  at- 
tached to  it.  Determine  to  deliver  it  from  evil  and 
to  find  The  Christ-force  within  every  temptation  and 
everything  that  assails  you,  knowing  full  well  that 
these  things  are  the  portion  of  goods  that  have  been 
given  you  by  your  Father  at  your  request — your  just 
belongings  that  you  have  deserved  and  out  of  which 
you  must  create  your  immortal  habitation.  Not  one 
thing  must  be  lost  or  wasted  or  destroyed,  but  each 
must  be  transmuted  and  its  golden  potency  indrawn 
and  built  into  the  immortal  Temple  of  the  Living 
Christ.  This  is  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  in  the 
Lord's  Prayer,  "deliver  us  from  evil." 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  27 

May  30th,  1908. 

"Am  surprised  to  find  myself  in  the  4th  Degree. 
Was  it  due  to  my  number  of  evolution,  and  if  so 
how  was  it  determined?     So  many  writers  assert 
'I  am  God.     I  am  That  I  am.'     I  cannot  grasp 
their  meaning." 

You  are  in  the  4th  Degree1  because  you  have 
reached  that  point  in  evolution.  That  is,  you  have 
reached  the  point  where  you  have  the  conscious  desire 
to  seek  for  Wisdom  and  are  feeling  around  for  some 
guiding  hand  to  point  out  the  Path.  In  this  you  have 
fulfilled  the  first  requirement  of  the  Law,  "Seek  and 
ye  shall  find ;  knock  and  it  shall  be  opened  unto  you." 
Therefore  do  not  be  surprised  that  the  cry  of  your 
heart  has  found  listening  ears,  or  that  the  hand  you 
sought  is  touching  yours. 

The  "I"  is  the  Higher  Self,  the  overshadowing 
Father-in-heaven.2  It  is  the  True  Self  in  that  it  is 
the  Ego — a  Spark  of  the  Infinite — incarnating  again 
and  again  in  an  animal  body  for  the  purpose  of  gain- 
ing experience  in  matter  and,  through  its  informing 
physical  atoms  in  an  earthly  body,  to  help  redeem 
(spiritualize)  matter.  The  whole  body  and  its  organs 
is  but  an  ephemeral,  transitory  conglomeration  of 
atoms,  created  and  gathered  together  by  the  Real  Self 
to  use  as  a  vehicle  very  much  as  a  man  might  make  or 
create  a  garment  to  wear  for  a  certain  purpose  and  for 
a  certain  time.  The  body  wears  out  and  is  cast  aside 
just  as  the  garment  is,  and  a  new  one  put  on;  but  the 
Self  never  changes.  It  gains  more  experience  and 
needs  a  better  garment  from  time  to  time  until,  finally, 
it  masters  the  matter  which  makes  up  its  physical 
garments  and  immortalizes  it  so  that  the  personality 
is  swallowed  up  in  the  Individuality;  the  mortal  puts 

1  See  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss,  page  56. 
-Ibid,  p.   127. 


28  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

on  immortality  and  becomes  one  with  its  Father-in- 
heaven. 

The  animal  body,  however,  has  a  consciousness  of 
its  own  which  is  always  striving  to  rule  the  organism 
instead  of  the  Higher  Self.  Until  the  Higher  Self  has 
gained  full  control  it  is  often  trampled  under  foot  and 
The  Christ  force  crucified.  When  passion  and  desire, 
with  the  bit  in  their  teeth,  dash  the  personality  reck- 
lessly down  the  hill  of  sensual  pleasures,  disease  and 
death  naturally  result,  but  the  moment  the  Real  Self 
asserts  its  prerogatives  and  grasps  the  reins,  the 
personality  will  become  the  useful  servant  and  pas- 
sion and  desire,  not  killed  out  but  controlled,  will  trot 
quietly  along  in  the  harness  of  service,  obedient  to  the 
Master's  will. 

The  Ego  may  be  looked  upon  as  the  Soul,  while  the 
Spirit  is  the  overshadowing  Divinity.  As  we  have 
said  before,  the  Soul  is  a  Spark  from  the  Infinite, 
while  the  Spirit  is  the  Flame.  The  Spirit  is  the 
Breath  of  the  Absolute;  it  has  no  individuality.  Just 
as  you  might  light  a  thousand  candles  with  the  same 
flame  without  detracting  from  it,  yet  each  new  flame 
would  be  individualized,  so  with  Souls.  Souls  are  all 
Sparks  of  the  One  Flame. 

May  12th,  1908. 

"I  am  a  member  of  the Society  and 

it  is  no  doubt  very  presumptuous  in  me  to  feel 
dissatisfied  so  soon.  I  have  been  a  member  only 
about  a  year  and  a  half  but  I  feel  restless,  yet 
I  am  devoted  to  the  teachings." 

All  teachings  that  bring  to  humanity  a  knowledge 
of  the  higher  truths  and  that  awaken  an  interest  in 
spiritual  development  are  useful,  but  individual  Souls 
need  special  lines  of  instruction.  Some  find  help  un- 
der one  teacher,  some  under  another,  and  if  your 
Higher  Self  knows  that  the  one  from  whom  you  are 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  29 

striving  to  learn  is  not  the  most  helpful  one  for  you, 
you  will  be  impressed  with  a  feeling  of  dissatisfaction. 
Yet  this  does  not  mean  that  the  teachings  you  have 
been  receiving  are  not  excellent  for  a  certain  stage 
of  growth  and  just  what  you  needed  at  one  time.  The 
great  lesson  to  learn  is  to  follow  the  leadings  of 
your  Higher  Self  and  take  for  yourself  what  appeals 
to  you  and  helps  you.  But  be  just  as  ready  to  con- 
cede to  others  the  right  to  choose  for  themselves. 
Try  to  realize  that  they  too  have  the  guidance  of  their 
Higher  Self,  and  if  they  are  receiving  help  from  any 
source  that  is  the  step  needed  by  them  at  that  time. 

If  at  any  time  you  feel  dissatisfied  with  the  teach- 
ings received  from  this  source  you  must  apply  the 
same  rule.  That  which  you  need  will  appeal  to  you. 
One  thing  may  appeal  to  you  today  and  in  a  month 
or  a  year  you  may  grow  away  from  it.  If  you  are 
sincere  and  earnest,  this  merely  indicates  that  you 
have  learned  one  lesson  and  must  look  elsewhere  for 
the  next.  For  this  reason  no  lasting  vows  should 
ever  be  given  or  required.  The  only  vow  that  a 
neophyte  can  give  is  one  to  his  Higher  Self  to  fol- 
low unfalteringly  wherever  the  Star  of  Initiation  leads. 
No  earthly  teacher  can  ever  take  him  more  than  a 
step  along  the  Path;  but  his  own  Higher  Self  will 
guide  him  all  the  way  if  he  only  listens  to  the  Still 
Small  Voice. 

May  7th,  1908. 

"You     spoke     of     certain     stages     where     the 
neophyte  could   not  be  helped  by  teachers,   etc. 

Will  you  please   explain? The   thought 

of  a  student  class  is  undoubtedly  most  laudable 
but  I  must  meet  its  leaders  and  know  more  of 
their  personnel  and  that  of  the  members  before 
feeling  assured  that  affiliation  is  the  right  step 


30  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

for  me.  I  want  to  study  with  those  who  pos- 
sess a  clear  insight  and  through  wham  my  growth 
may  be  accelerated,  not  impeded." 

A  student  is  never  left  to  stumble  along  alone,  for 
the  unseen  Helpers  are  always  near  to  guide  and  direct. 
But  there  are  times  when  certain  characters  need  to 
be  left  alone,  not  to  themselves,  but  to  their  unseen 
Teachers.  They  need  to  seek  and  find  in  the  Silence 
the  Truth.  Only  when  they  have  done  this  are  they 
ready  to  accept  it  when  presented  outwardly.  If 
they  are  over-fed  with  outer  help,  so-called,  told  to  do 
this  or  that,  it  only  upsets  them  and  retards  their  prog- 
ress. Generally  the  rough  and  thorny  way  of  strug- 
gle and  sorrow  is  due  to  a  lack  of  realization  that  with- 
in each  earnest  heart  there  is  The  Christ-center  and 
that  "I  (The  Christ  within)  am  the  Way,  the  Truth 
and  the  Life;  no  man  cometh  unto  the  Father  but  by 
me,"  i.  e.,  through  the  revealed  Christ-power  within. 

Having  found  within  your  own  heart  a  well-spring 
of  love  and  faith  and  life,  it  is  not  of  much  moment 
who  'or  what  your  co-laborers  in  the  class  are,  for  you 
come  to  bring  the  Light  that  you  have  found  within 
to  share  with  them.  Once  found  nothing  can  dim 
that  Light,  and  it  does  not  matter  if  the  personalities 
of  the  members  do  not  meet  your  expectations — per- 
haps you  do  not  meet  theirs — for  you  know  that  you 
are  not  dealing  with  the  outer  personalities,  but  that 
you  can  see  beyond  into  the  heart  of  each.  If  you 
go  with  this  attitude  the  divine  Light  of  The  Christos 
will  spread  from  heart  to  heart  and  all  will  be  bene- 
fited by  your  presence.  Remember  that  you  do  not 
go  merely  to  acquire  knowledge  for  yourself  alone  and 

give  nothing  in  return If  you  cannot  put 

your  thoughts  into  words  and  enter  into  the  discussion 
of  the  lesson,  you  can  nevertheless  fill  the  room  with 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  31 

loving  and  helpful  thoughts  and  give  encouragement 
and  help  to  the  faithful  ones  who  are  trying  to  help 
you,  even  though,  like  yourself,  they  feel  that  they 
have  much  to  learn. 

"During  the  past  two  years  have  been  passing 
through  a  condition  of  darkness,  sorrow  and  pain, 
as  though  much  of  the  past  were  being  forced  up- 
on me.  Why  is  this?" 

Your  condition  of  spiritual  darkness  is  the  result  of 
a  natural  law  pertaining  to  spiritual  development. 
When  the  novice  starts  out  in  earnest  to  become  a 
neophyte  the  first  thing  that  happens  is  that,  by  the 
very  effort  to  separate  from  the  world,  he  becomes 
more  sensitive  and  the  world's  conditions  press  more 
heavily  upon  him.  Also,  the  Karma  that  might  under 
the  old  conditions,  be  spread  out  over  many  years,  or 
even  lives,  is  willingly  taken  up  by  the  Soul,  for  it  has 
determined  to  overcome.  Whether  the  personality  is 
aware  of  it  or  not,  the  Soul  or  Higher  Self  has  con- 
sciously taken  upon  itself  the  redeeming  of  all  the  old 
mistakes  noiv,  at  once.  Nearly  always  the  first  effect 
of  any  decided  step  along  the  Path  is  depressing.  A 
recognition  of  the  world's  misery  weighs  upon  the 
sensitive  consciousness  and  a  great  loneliness  and  help- 
lessness surrounds  the  disciple,  because  he  has  sep- 
arated from  the  old  and  has  not  yet  made  conscious 
correlation  with  the  new.  He  has  answered  the  call 
"Come  ye  out,  and  be  ye  separate,"  yet  he  has  not 
realized  the  inner  peace  or  felt  the  loving  compassion 
of  his  Guide  and  Savior,  his  True  Self. 

It  is  this  experience  which  is  symbolized  by  the  death 
and  burial  and  the  lying  in  the  grave  for  three  days. 
The  three  days  do  not  refer  to  an  arbitrary  period  of 
time,  for  you  lie  in  the  grave  until  the  completion  of 


32  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

three  periods  which,  for  convenience,  we  will  call  sun- 
rises. The  Sun  of  Righteousness  must  rise  for  you 
upon  three  days  or  conditions.  First,  it  must  illumine 
your  understanding.  It  must  penetrate  into  the  grave 
of  despondency  and  loss  of  hope  and  show  you  why 
you  are  dead  and  buried.  Second,  it  must  illumine 
your  consciousness  so  that  the  realization  of  your 
Father's  nearness  and  guidance  shall  become  a  reality. 
Then  the  grave,  with  all  its  horrors  will  become  endur- 
able, for  you  know  that  you  must  pass  through  this 
experience  ere  the  new  life  can  begin.  As  St.  John 
puts  it  (XII-24)  :  "Except  a  corn  of  wheat  fall  into 
the  ground  and  die,  it  abideth  alone:  but  if  it  die,  it 
bringeth  forth  much  fruit."  You  realize  that  you  must 
lie  there  without  struggling  or  complaining,  just  as 
the  grain  does,  until  the  Spirit  working  in  you  can 
bring  you  forth  anew.  Third,  the  Sun  of  Righteous- 
ness must  illumine  your  heart.  That  is,  the  love  that 
passeth  understanding  must  dawn  within  you  so  that 
you  can  love  all  things,  all  men,  and  all  conditions,  and 
be  able  to  cry  out,  "O  death,  where  is  thy  sting?  O 
grave,  where  is  thy  victory?"  On  the  third  day,  very 
early  in  the  morning,  ye  shall  rise  from  the  grave  and 
become  a  Child  of  the  Resurrection.  Remember  that 
the  days,  like  the  days  of  creation,1  each  have  their 
morning,  their  noon-tide  and  their  evening.  And  it 
was  very  early  in  the  morning  of  the  third  day,  ere 
it  was  yet  light,  that  The  Christ  arose  from  the  tomb. 
There  is  a  wonderful  significance  in  the  expression 
"very  early  in  the  morning"  that  will  be  referred  to  in 
our  lesson  on  Earth's  Finer  Forces?  Until  you  re- 
ceive that  lesson  we  trust  this  short  explanation  of  why 
you  are  passing  through  such  darkness  will  give  you 

JSee  Chapter  XXIV,  in  The  Voice  of  Isis.  Curtiss. 
'Ibid,  Chapter  XXIII. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  33 

strength  to  lie  quietly  in  the  grave,  in  loving  trust, 
until  the  morning  of  the  third  day  dawns  for  you  and 
the  Spirit  brings  you  forth  anew. 

In  your  case  you  have  been  learning  some  very 
deep  lessons  and  must  have  time  to  digest  them  and 
correlate  them  with  your  life.  For  until  you  have 
been  tried  and  have  proven  your  strength  you  cannot 
bring  forth  the  harvest.  The  greater  the  work  laid 
out  for  a  neophyte,  the  greater  the  necessity  for  thor- 
ough testing.  This  is  a  merciful  law,  for  the  suffer- 
ing and  the  evil  Karma  would  be  much  worse  to  bear 
if  you  were  given  a  great  opportunity  and  failed  for 
lack  of  proper  training,  for,  of  necessity,  you  would 
draw  others  down  with  you.  One  by  one  the  things 
that  hold  you  back  are  being  taken  from  you,  and 
your  whole  character  is  being  tested  and  tried.  Fight 
on,  brave  Soul.  You  have  our  love,  our  help  and  our 
encouragement. 

May  19th,  1908. 

"I   have  been  exceedingly  busy  as   I   am   em- 
ployed in  a  hardware  store and  it  keeps 

me  so  busy  that  when  night  comes  I  am  worn 
out  so  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  concentrate  and 

gather  my  thoughts I  long  to  know,  but 

at  present  I  cannot  as  I  am  under  this  strain,  but 
I  am  hoping  that  I  shall  soon  be  in  a  position 
where  all  is  peaceful  and  quiet." 

So  many  students  are  in  a  position  similar  to  yours, 
so  busy  that  everything  but  bread-and-butter  winning 
seems  crowded  out.  This  is  partly  the  result  of  the 
false  standards  of  business  and  the  methods  which 
give  no  chance  for  the  poor  man  to  get  ahead,  because 
the  man  with  money  is  king.  But  behind  it  all  there 
is  a  Karma  working  itself  out  collectively  in  the  masses 
of  humanity,  and  individually  in  its  units.  No  man  is 
in  the  wrong  place.  This  does  not  mean  that  the  man 


34  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

who  finds  himself  in  the  position  of  under-dog  should 
not  try  to  better  himself. 

There  is  only  one  way  to  effectually  bring  about  a 
better  condition,  and  that  is  to  recognize  that  you  are 
where  you  are  because  the  Soul,  or  Higher 
Self,  realizes  that  there  is  some  important  les- 
son to  learn  which  those  conditions  can  teach 
better  than  any  other,  and  set  to  work  to 
learn  that  lesson.  No  mental  or  faith-cure  for 
poverty  can  in  reality  lift  you  out  of  your  condition. 
It  can,  if  applied  to  the  exclusion  of  all  other  desires, 
bring  you  riches  for  a  time ;  that  is,  if  you  are  willing 
to  give  up  learning  the  lesson  which  your  Higher 
Self  has  set  for  you  to  learn  and  for  which  the  path 
of  your  present  incarnation  was  especially  mapped  out, 
and  devote  your  whole  desire  to  obtaining  wealth. 
You  will  get  it,  but  you  will  have  to  come  back  and 
learn  the  lesson,  perhaps  at  a  time  when  the  learning 
will  be  far  harder. 

You  are  beginning  to  realize  that  conditions  do  not 
really  retard,  but  are  intended  to  make  you  think  and 
take  account  of  stock.  First,  try  to  determine  what 
lesson  you  must  learn,  then  take  it  determinedly  to 
heart  until  you  have  conquered.  The  world's  Karma 
limits  individual  Karma,  but  within  those  limits  indi- 
vidual Karma  places  you  either  high  or  low.  We  de- 
sire to  help  each  student  to  live  the  best  he  can  in 
his  karmic  position  and  to  help  him  understand  him- 
self so  that  he  can  use  this  earth-life  as  a  stepping- 
stone  to  something  higher.  We  do  not  desire  impos- 
sibilities. We  know  that  no  man  has  conditions  given 
to  him  that  he  does  not  need,  and  that  the  moment  he 
gets  out  of  a  condition  its  highest  good  he  is  rid  of  it 
forever.  We  aim  to  help  all  to  find  the  Jewel  of 
Truth  in  the  mire  of  their  existence,  and  to  make  their 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  35 

lives  more  tolerable  because  less  mysterious  and  crush- 
ing. Nothing  that  we  understand  can  crush  or  terrify 
us,  for  we  can  set  out  to  overcome  it  without  fear. 
You  may  remember  the  story  of  the  great  naturalist 
who,  while  watching  a  butterfly  emerge  from  its  chry- 
salis, was  moved  to  cut  some  of  the  confining  sheath 
by  pity  at  its  violent  struggles  to  free  itself.  But  when 
the  butterfly  emerged  he  found  it  but  a  poor,  weak, 
crippled  thing  unable  to  fly.  He  was  forced  to  see 
that  the  very  violence  of  the  struggle  for  freedom  was 
necessary  for  the  perfection  of  its  strength  and  self- 
reliance.  It  is  just  so  with  each  human  Soul  in  its 
struggle  to  free  itself  from  the  chrysalis  of  the  phys- 
ical. The  greater  the  struggle,  if  persisted  in  to  vic- 
tory, the  stronger  and  more  self-reliant  will  be  the 
new-born  Soul. 

March  6th,  1908. 

"But  in  the  existence  of  free-will  can  you  show 
me  that  it  exists  to  any  considerable  degree? 
I  know  that  it  is  the  teaching  of  both  secularists, 
and  occultists,  but  in  its  application  to  life 
I  have  yet  to  learn  its  range  of  action.  I  do 
not,  and  cannot,  philosophically,  believe  in  the 
final  loss  of  a  single  spark  of  divinity — yet — if 
free-will  existed  such  a  loss  follows  as  a  matter 
of  course.  Is  it  free,  or  free  within  limits?" 

As  to  free-will,  each  and  every  Soul  is  but  a  sep- 
arated part  of  the  One  Life,  and  as  such  its  highest 
aspect  has  but  the  Will  of  the  Father,  i.  e.,  to  do  His 
will  on  earth  in  a  separated  body  as  it  is  done  in  the 
bosom  of  the  Father.  As  it  gets  more  and  more  im- 
mersed in  matter  the  True  Self  sets  up  many  side  is- 
sues as  it  were  j1  makes  many  new  karmic  debts.  And 
while  the  True  Self  never  changes  in  its  desire  and 
will  to  be  reunited  to  the  Father,  yet  the  lower  or  ani- 

^ee  Chapter  XI,  in  The  Voice  of  I  sis,  Curtiss. 


36  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

mal  consciousness  (the  sum  of  the  consciousness  of 
the  atoms  composing  the  various  bodies  through  which 
the  Soul  has  garnered  experience)  has  set  up  a  will  of 
its  own.  This  has  crystallized  into  an  entity  with  a 
will  opposed  to  the  Will  of  the  Real  Self.  This  lower 
will  is  not  free,  for  it  can,  and  indeed  must,  ultimately, 
be  subservient  to  the  Will  of  the  Real  Self. 

But  perhaps  this  does  not  answer  your  question,  for 
probably  what  you  mean  by  free-will  is  freedom  of 
choice  as  to  the  guidance  of  the  environments  and  ex- 
periences of  life.  But,  my  son,  in  this  case  as  in  the 
former,  there  is  absolute  free-will  for  the  Real  Self. 
For,  as  I  have  said,  being  a  separated  part  of  the 
whole,  the  desire  is  to  gain  such  experiences  as  shall 
fit  it  to  fill  the  place  which  is  its  own  in  the  Temple 
of  Truth.  At  each  incarnation  the  Soul  chooses  such 
an  expression  in  the  earth  life  as  shall  give  the  best 
opportunity  to  gain  the  needed  knowledge.  The  Soul 
wills  not  that  the  perishable  mortal  body  of  flesh  shall 
skim  gaily  through  its  allotted  time,  for  only  too  well 
does  the  Soul  know  the  dangers  of  such  care-free  lives 
and  the  depressing  lines  of  Karma  that  result,  which 
must  be  worked  out  ere  it  can  go  on  with  other  needed 
experiences.  It  wills  to  suffer  and  conquer  and  learn. 
After  the  result  of  each  petty  life-period  is  garnered 
the  Soul  creates  a  new  path  in  which  to  walk,  per- 
haps even  more  strenuous  than  those  already  traversed. 
The  Soul  sees  what  is  needed  to  impress  the  most  im- 
portant lessons  upon  the  true  consciousness,  for  the 
Soul  never  has  experiences  that  are  not  needed.  It 
wills  to  learn,  and  when  the  lesson  is  learned  and  the 
experience  assimilated,  it  wills  to  experience  some- 
thing else ;  and  so  on  and  on,  until  a  consciousness  of 
all  conditions  on  the  earth-plane  is  garnered  into 
the  storehouse  of  the  Real  Self. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  37 

April  13th,  1908. 

"I  find  myself  so  much  out  of  touch  with  the 
community  here  who  are  thoroughly  saturated 
with  church  dogmas  regarding  forgiveness  of  sins 
and  reducing  Deity  to  physical-plane  dimensions 
that  it  would  be  very  selfish  in  me  to  wish  the 
gap  made  wider.  I  am  doing  what  little  I  can 
to  assist  some  to  a  larger  conception  without  pro- 
ducing chaos  in  their  minds." 

All  manifestations  of  life,  from  atom  to  cosmos,  are 
in  a  circle.  This  is  as  true  of  the  spiritual  life-wave 
of  a  community  as  of  any  of  the  lower  forms  of  life. 
You  feel  that  because  you  have  some  conception  of 
truth  in  advance  of  your  neighbors  that  you  are  sep- 
arated from  them,  and  you  fear  to  take  another  step 
lest  the  separation  grow  wider.  I  know  your  difficulty 
is  a  real  one,  and  that  from  your  standpoint  you  do  not 
see  that  there  is  extreme  egotism  in  the  supposition 
that  you  are  so  far  in  advance  that  in  kindness  and  con- 
descension you  will  not  make  the  gap  wider.  Just  for 
a  moment  try  to  grasp  the  idea  of  a  circle  with  you  and 
your  neighbors  disposed  in  various  positions  on  its 
outer  rim.  Naturally,  as  you  cannot  see  around  the 
circle,  the  man  at  the  opposite  pole  seems  hopelessly 
separated  from  you.  But  if  you  will  consider  the 
manifestations  of  life  you  will  find  that  within  the 
circle  of  manifestation  there  is  a  germinal  point  or 
nucleus,  and  that  from  this  central  point  all  growth 
proceeds;  that  the  radiating  lines  of  force  spread  out 
and  touch  all  points  of  the  circumference  at  the  same 
time.  Therefore,  any  nutriment  or  knowledge — no 
matter  of  what  type — applied  to  one  point  would  be 
gradually  absorbed  by  the  germinal  point,  and  from 
thence  would  radiate  to  all  parts  of  the  circle. 

A  community  is  just  such  a  circle.  Its  thought  and 
spiritual  ideas  have  crystallized  and  have  poured  their 


38  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

force  into  the  germinal  point,  and  that  point  can  give 
out  only  such  food  as  corresponds  with  the  stimulus 
from  the  outer  rim  demanding  a  certain  kind  of  re- 
sponse. If  any  point  on  the  circle  should  open  its 
consciousness  to  a  higher  rate  of  vibration  or  cor- 
relate with  more  advanced  truth,  i.  e.,  should  live  The 
Christ-life,  the  absolute  Law  of  Harmony  must  ad- 
vance all  the  rest,  even  without  a  word  being  spoken, 
that  is,  if  the  truth  received  is  assimilated  and  ex- 
pressed in  the  life  as  vital  growth.  You  must  "live  the 
life." 

The  very  truth  of  the  conditions  you  so  much  de- 
plore shows  that  there  is  a  hunger,  a  reaching  out  for 
light.  All  true  growth  proceeds  from  the  center. 
What  comes  from  the  heart  touches  the  heart.  No 
one  can  give  spiritual  force  to  another  until  he  has 
made  it  a  part  of  himself,  for  as  long  as  the  "great 
heresy  of  separateness"  holds  sway  over  your  mind 
you  are  in  bondage  to  the  lower  self.  Find  the  cen- 
ter within  your  own  heart  and  you  will  soon  find  that 
you  are  closer  to  all  humanity,  rather  than  more  sep- 
arate. If  your  object  is  merely  to  be  considered  a 
saint,  then  failure  and  sorrow  are  your  inevitable 
portion. 

June   1st,  1908. 
"Your  communication  of  nearly  a  month  ago 

has  been  very  carefully  considered, and 

I  have  waited  for  the  outcome  and  believe  that 
the  leading  of  the  Higher  Self  has  prompted  me 
to  take  up  the  work  of  the  Order.  Upon  my 

suggestion wrote  you and  we 

may  find  others  to  join  us,  but  until  then  we 
would  like  to  think  of  ourselves  as  a  little 
nucleus,  a  little  attracting  center,  working  for 
the  development  of  the  best  within  ourselves  and 
humanity." 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  39 

We  appreciate  your  attitude  of  devotion  to  the 
Higher  Life,  and  we  are  glad  that  you  have  realized 
the  only  way  really  to  help  humanity  is  to  take  hold 
of  that  morsel  of  humanity  over  which  you  have  been 
given  command  (your  various  bodies  and  all  pertain- 
ing to  them,  the  portion  of  goods  belonging  to  you — 
given  to  you  by  your  Father  ere  you  took  your  jour- 
ney into  this  far  country  of  earth-life)  and  begin  by 
redeeming  it.  That  is  the  only  way  to  make  an  im- 
pression and  help  accomplish  the  work.  If  we  try  to 
lift  up  the  whole  mass  we  are  crushed  under  its  weight 
and  become  hopelessly  discouraged  by  the  vastness 
of  the  task.  It  is  like  trying  to  break  a  great  bundle 
of  twigs  all  at  once.  But,  to  find,  as  a  Soul  reality, 
that  the  "I  and  my  brother  are  one"  and  then  set  to 
work  within  the  Self  to  seek  and  to  save  that  which 
is  lost,  is  to  create  a  center  or  home  in  which  The 
Christ  can  manifest — a  fit  Temple  for  the  Living  God 
(your  Higher  Self)  to  dwell  in  among  men. 

This  is  the  sure,  in  fact  the  only  true,  way  to  become 
an  agent  of  the  Masters.  We  are  apt  to  speak  lightly, 
or  at  least  without  understanding,  of  the  body  as  the 
Temple  of  the  Living  God,  but  a  few  moments'  medita- 
tion on  the  subject  each  day  will  open  up  wondrous 
vistas  of  the  Path  to  Mastery.  A  Holy  Temple  must 
not  only  have  its  sacred  shrine  wherein  The  Presence 
dwelleth,  but  it  must  also  have  its  attendant  High 
Priest  and  High  Priestess,  its  daily  sacrifice,  its  feasts 
and  its  fasts  of  purification;  and  over  and  above  all, 
it  must  make  its  impression  upon  the  community. 
Think  back  over  the  ages  and  see  how  the  rise  and  fall 
of  civilizations  has  followed  the  purity  or  the  pollution 
of  the  Temples  and  the  worship.  Enumerate  them  and 
you  will  find  an  exact  analogy  to  the  effect  on  a  com- 
munity of  one  purified  human  temple  with  its  wor- 


40  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

ship  of  the  Living  God,  be  it  in  apparently  ever  so 
humble  a  human  body.  When  two  or  three  such  are 
gathered  together  the  promise  must  fulfill  itself: 
"Behold,  there  am  I  (The  Christos)  in  the  midst." 

Jan.  21st,  1908. 

"Will  you  kindly  tell  me  whether  this  philos- 
ophy will  reveal  to  me  why  there  seems  to  be  so 
much  demand  for  self-sacrifice  with  apparently 
so  little  return?" 

This  philosophy  will  at  least  show  you  what  the  Real 
Self  is.  And  once  you  become  acquainted  with,  or 
even  begin  to  realize,  your  Real  Self  you  will  know  that 
there  can  be  no  self-sacrifice.  All  lower  forms  of 
self  are  but  expressions  of  the  One  Self,  and  must  be 
indrawn  into  the  One  Self.  The  lower  selves  are  like 
the  outer  husks  of  the  seed  which  are  dissolved  and 
their  substance  indrawn  to  form  nourishment  for  the 
seed,  to  enrich  it  and  enable  it  to  grow  and  blossom. 
If  you  choose  to  call  promoting  the  growth  and  blos- 
soming in  that  way  self-sacrifice,  it  must  remain  that 
for  you  for  the  present.  But  if  you  call  it  growth  and 
unfoldment,  the  return  is  happiness  and  a  greater 
fullness  of  life. 

May  5th,  1908. 

"I  hesitate  to  take  a  step  which  may  place  me  in 
the  light  of  an  example,  lest  I  fail  in  some  way 
that  would  bring  reproach  upon  the  work." 

As  to  failings,  we  all  have  them.  The  greatest  ex- 
ample the  world  can  have  is  to  see  a  brave  Soul  strug- 
gling to  do  right.  A  perfect  man — perfect  in  his  own 
estimation — if  such  a  one  could  be  found,  perfect 
and  immaculately  moral  and  correct  in  every  out- 
ward seeming,  would  help  the  world  very  little.  It  is 
those  who  are  honest  with  themselves;  who  know 
their  own  weaknesses  yet  are  striving  to  conquer ;  who 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  41 

recognize  that  they  are  not  above  their  fellow  men ; 
who  are  capable  of  feeling  a  sympathetic  thrill  with 
every  failing  and  can  grasp  a  brother's  hand  and  from 
the  heart  encourage  him  to  struggle  onward,  because 
they  themselves  are  still  struggling — they  are  the  ones 
who  are  the  real  examples.  Apply  this  test  to  any 
earthly  contest  and  you  will  see  that  it  is  not  the  one 
who  is  perfect,  who  knows  it  all,  who  helps,  but  it 
is  the  one  who  is  struggling  with  all  his  strength  for 
supremacy  who  awakens  the  spirit  of  endeavor  in  his 
comrades. 

June  15th,  1908. 

"I  am  becoming  unpleasantly  sensitive  to  all 
conditions;  today  I  am  on  the  heights  and  tomor- 
row in  the  depth  of  despair  and  misery.  Can 
you  tell  me  how  to  gain  more  poise?" 

Poise  is  not  the  stoical  indifference  to  pain  and 
pleasure,  but  rather  rising  above  it.  We  never  reach 
a  point  where  the  waves  of  force  generated  by  the  op- 
posite poles,  pain  and  pleasure,  cannot  reach  us,  but 
we  can  rise  above  them  so  they  cannot  sweep  us  from 
one  extreme  to  another.  It  is  like  riding  on  a  see-saw, 
those  on  the  ends  are  lifted  now  high  in  the  air  and 
now  are  bumped  on  the  ground ;  but  a  person  standing 
in  the  middle  and  balancing  it  has  absolute  control  of 
both  extremities  without  being  moved  to  any  appreci- 
able extent  in  either  direction.  To  enjoy  intensely 
carries  with  it,  as  the  opposite  swing  of  the  pendu- 
lum, the  power  to  suffer  to  a  corresponding  degree. 
Poise  is  the  ability  to  remain  calm  at  the  center,  and, 
while  recognizing  and  understanding  both  the  great- 
est joy  and  the  greatest  sorrow,  not  be  carried  to 
either  extreme. 

Ere  a  disciple  can  conquer  he  must  become  more 
than  ordinarily  sensitive;  must  be  capable  of  vibrating 


42  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

more  intensely  than  his  imagination  can  picture  at 
lower  stages  of  development.  No  Soul  can  enter  into 
the  joy  of  the  Lord,  i.  e.,  have  an  illuminating  sense 
of  the  glory  of  The  Christos,  until  that  Soul  has  be- 
come like  a  quivering  bundle  of  nerves,  capable  of 
registering  the  extremes  of  sensation.  But  with  this 
extreme  sensitiveness  must  come  the  power  to  con- 
trol it;  the  ability  to  hold  still  and  not  be  moved;  in 
fact,  to  master  sensation.  To  control  sensation  is  the 
first  step  toward  Mastery.  Until  this  step  has  been 
taken  all  others  are  barred  by  the  very  laws  of  Nature, 
for  the  seat  of  sensation  is  in  the  astral  body  which 
is  the  path  of  communication  between  the  physical  and 
the  spiritual.  Hence,  until  the  Soul  can  consciously 
walk  this  path  without  fear  and  without  reproach, 
steady  and  calm,  the  disciple  can  never  reach  into  the 
spiritual  realms. 

You  can  gain  a  good  idea  of  what  we  mean  if  you 
will  study  the  needle  of  a  compass  that  is  badly  poised 
(centered).  Such  a  needle  is  called  "sluggish,"  that 
is,  it  is  not  easily  set  in  motion,  but  when  it  is  it  rushes 
madly  around  the  circle  and  probably  gets  wedged 
or  stuck.  At  most  it  will  fail  to  settle  on  the  N  point. 
A  highly  sensitized  needle,  on  the  contrary,  will  regis- 
ter every  magnetic  wave  and  will  be  in  almost  a  con- 
stant quiver,  but  no  matter  how  rapid  the  vibration 
caused  by  adverse  conditions,  it  will  scarcely  move 
from  the  N  point.  If  it  should  be  displaced  it  will 
always  come  back  and  settle  exactly  true  to  the  North. 
This,  in  a  nut-shell,  is  the  whole  lesson  of  poise. 

April  21st,  1908. 

"I  have  never  been  able  to  see  how  'a  ray  from 
the  infinite'  can  in  its  essence  be  separated  from 
the  all-pervading  whole  and  require  any  working 
out  of  its  own  redemption.  To  me  the  working 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  43 

out  of  a  personal  salvation  partakes  of  the  nature 
of  selfishness  which  is  the  principal  cause  of  pres- 
ent world  troubles." 

In  answer  to  your  query  let  me  give  you  a  parable. 
Two  men  were  shipwrecked  in  the  night  while  they 
slept  and  were  cast  upon  a  desert  island.  One,  upon 
gaining  consciousness,  was  very  much  concerned  as  to 
how  he  got  there,  so  he  spent  his  time  sitting  around 
trying  to  solve  the  problem.  The  other  man  was  just 
as  much  puzzled,  but  instead  of  sitting  down  to  think 
it  out,  he  started  at  once  to  find  out  what  kind  of  an 
island  he  had  landed  upon  and  how  he  was  going  to 
live  there  most  comfortably.  He  was  so  busy  with  this 
that  he  had  very  little  time  to  worry  about  how  he  got 
there.  He  built  a  hut,  found  food  and  water,  and 
finally  discovered  a  mine  of  pure  gold.  He  also  found 
a  means  of  signaling  and  making  his  distress  known. 
In  the  fullness  of  time  a  ship  saw  his  signals  and  took 
him  home  to  civilization.  There  he  found  out  all  about 
how  he  got  on  the  island  where  he  had  learned  so 
many  valuable  lessons ;  and,  moreover,  he  was  very 
rich.  He  then  realized  that  his  experience  on  the 
island  was  for  his  best  good  after  all,  even  though 
he  could  not  see  it  at  the  time. 

The  other  man  pined  away  and  died  in  hunger  and 
misery  because  he  could  not  solve  the  problem  of  how 
he  got  on  the  island.  Which  of  these  men,  think  you, 
was  the  wiser?  He  who  made  the  best  of  things, 
using  all  the  powers  and  intelligence  he  had  and  wait- 
ing until  he  got  to  a  point  where  knowledge  of  the 
"why"  was  possible,  or  he  who  made  himself  miserable 
because  he  wanted  knowledge  that  could  not  be  given 
him  until  he  himself  had  found  a  way  to  reach  the 
necessary  point? 


44  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

Thus  must  it  be  with  mankind.  Solve  the  problems 
that  confront  you  here  and  now  and  the  higher  prob- 
lems that  belong  to  the  Infinite  leave  until  your  finite 
mind  becomes  absorbed  into  the  Infinite,  when  all 
things  will  be  made  plain. 

When  it  is  once  grasped  that  the  working  out  of 
a  personal  salvation  is  the  only  way  really  to  help  the 
world,  the  man  who  neglects  it  is  a  retarder  of  the 
public  good.  No  one  can  be  a  savior  until  he  has  re- 
deemed every  atom  of  all  the  bodies  (physical,  mental, 
and  spiritual)  committed  to  his  care.  These  are  the 
portion  of  goods  belonging  to  him — given  to  him  at 
his  own  request  by  his  Father-in-heaven  ere  he  took 
his  long  journey  into  this  "far  country"  of  physical 
embodiment.  If  one  fails  to  see  the  necessity  for  car- 
ing for  and  redeeming  his  goods,  he  must  eat  husks 
with  the  swine  until  he  is  ready  to  say:  "I  will  arise 
and  go  to  my  Father." 

You  say  you  are  willing  to  take  light  from  any 
source;  then  look  for  the  light  of  The  Christ  that 
shines  within  your  own  heart.  Dig  among  the  refuse 
and  uncover  the  Flame  and  set  it  upon  a  candlestick 
that  the  light  may  shine  before  men. 

Jan.  9th,  1908. 

"I  feel  the  need  of  guidance  and  protection  in 
treading  the  narrow  path  between  subjective 
mediumship  on  the  one  hand  and  'quenching  of 
the  spirit'  on  the  other.  I  have  had  dreams  and 
visions  of  a  marked  character,  some  of  which 
seem  like  initiations.  Also  some  psychic  ex- 
periences   I  have  never  had  from  anyone 

an  explanation  of  them,  or  personal  instruction  in 
these  matters." 

I  would  like  you  to  write  down  carefully  just  what 
your  brain  mind  was  able  to  register  of  the  initiations 
through  which  you  seem  to  have  passed.  You  have 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  45 

realized  the  truth  that  it  is,  indeed,  a  narrow  path  be- 
tween subjective  mediumship  and  the  "quenching  of 
the  spirit."  This  is  the  "Bridge  of  Swords"  over 
which  Mahomet  crossed  the  abyss  ere  he  entered  para- 
dise. Every  true  disciple  of  the  Masters  of  Wisdom 
must  walk  this  Path.  There  is  no  other  bridge  across 
that  terrible  abyss,  but  each  of  the  Masters  has  crossed 
it  and  They  are  waiting  with  loving  encouragement  on 
the  other  side.  They  have  fastened  a  three-fold  cord 
all  the  way  across.  Hold  fast  to  it  and  your  feet  will 
not  slip  in  the  darkness,  nor  will  the  monsters  of  the 
deep  have  power  to  frighten  you.  This  three-fold 
cord  is  Love,  Trust  and  Obedience.  Your  loving 
Father  waits  patiently  for  you  on  the  brink  and  sends 
out  His  voice  to  you  through  the  darkness ;  a  still  small 
voice,  yet  it  sounds  in  your  heart  like  the  sound  of 
many  waters.  If  you  listen  it  will  swallow  up  all  other 
sounds  and  will  say  to  you,  "Lo !  I  am  with  thee,  even 
unto  the  end.  Fear  thou  not!"  But,  dear  child,  full 
well  do  we  know  the  way  is  lonely  and  your  human 
heart  cries  out  for  companionship.  You  have  reached 
a  point  where  you  shall  meet  and  know  your  fellow 
travelers  on  the  Path.  Therefore  I  say  unto  thee: 
Open  thine  understanding  and  heed  the  words  I  have 
spoken.  Follow  the  dictates  of  your  intuition,  for  no 
matter  if  your  earthly  brain  does  forget,  your  Soul 
knows  and  can  make  no  mistake. 

In  the  early  days  of  the  Theosophical  movement  it 
was  necessary  to  warn  disciples  against  psychism 
because  of  the  many  dangers  that  beset  the  way,  know- 
ing full  well  that  the  real  mystic  could  not  be  quenched. 
Unfortunately,  however,  these  well  meant  warnings 
were  so  embellished  by  the  later  followers  of  H.  P.  B. 
by  those  who  knew  least  about  such  ex- 
periences and  who  became  most  rabid  and  bitter 


46  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

against  anyone  who  apparently  took  a  step  beyond 

their  own  dense,  materialistic  ideas that  there 

was  great  danger  of  "quenching  of  the  spirit."  This 
is  one  of  the  reasons  for  this  new  Movement,  namely, 
that  all  who  are  able  to  perceive  spiritually  may  have 
the  personal  help  necessary  in  treading  the  "Bridge  of 
Swords." 

March  3rd,  1908. 

"How  can  I  increase  my  love  for  my  'fellow 
man'  when  the  very  sight  of  some  of  them  gives 
me  the  'creeps'?  Now,  I  do  not  mean  the  un- 
fortunates. I  do  seem  to  love  the  outcast,  the 
tramp,  the  generally  unlovely!  But  people  of  re- 
finement, even  one  member  of  my  own  family,  I 
just  dread  to  hear  her  footstep  and  dislike  her 
personality  so  that  I  could  almost  scream  when  I 
hear  her  coming.  Many  a  time  I  go  out  of  the 
house  and  stay  out  as  long  as  I  can  just  to  avoid 
looking  at  her.  I  feel  condemned." 

As  to  what  you  say  about  increasing  your  love  for 
your  fellow  men,  the  best  way  is  to  forget  all  about 
those  who  upset  you  and  think  only  of  The  Christ- 
love  and  draw  near  to  that.  Keep  away  from  those 
who  are  absolutely  repugnant  to  you,  if  possible,  for 
there  is  always  a  good  reason.  If  you  think  contin- 
ually of  those  who  only  arouse  the  evil  side  of  your 
nature  you  retard  your  growth,  and  most  likely  .in- 
crease their  natural  antagonism.  If  you  cannot  do 
this,  determine  that  you  will  create  a  wall  of  force 
around  yourself  that  nothing  inharmonious  or  un- 
lovely can  pierce ;  that  you  will  not  speak  an  unkind 
word ;  that  you  are  too  well  balanced  and  surrounded 
with  immortal  love  to  allow  anything  that  is  outside 
to  affect  you.  Repeat  The  Healing  Prayer  and  realize 
that  you  are  filled  with  "Life  and  Love  and  Purity," 
and  that  you  will  give  out  nothing  but  those  forces 
to  anyone  with  whom  you  come  in  contact. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  47 

If  anything  inharmonious  arises,  be  sure  that  it  is 
something  outside  yourself,  then  calmly  ignore  it. 
Generally  there  is  some  condition  brought  over  from 
a  past  life  that  must  be  worked  out  in  your  present 
environment.  If  you  realize  that  you  will  have  to 
endure  until  you  learn  the  lesson  of  equanimity  and 
grow  above  their  power  to  disquiet,  you  will  at  once 
find  an  improvement.  It  has  been  said  that  people 
are  neither  our  friends  nor  our  enemies,  only  our 
teachers ;  and  we  may  make  things  worse  by  trying 
to  force  conditions  instead  of  learning  the  lesson  they 
have  to  teach.  Hold  the  attitude  of  always  being 
ready  to  help  whenever  your  help  is  needed. 

July  25th. 

"I  am  a  member  of  a  New  Thought  Church  and 

the  classes  and  teachings  of  the  same I  . 

have  done  some  teaching  along  New  Thought 
lines  and  am  considered  very  advanced  and  strong 

by     my     associates     there During     the 

last  year I  seem  to  have  no  vitality  or 

enthusiasm  over  anything.  I  first  thought  it  was 
a  physical  condition,  but  physical  remedies  do  not 
abolish  it.  Besides,  for  many  years  now  my 
mind  has  been  able  to  make  me  forget  and  over- 
come my  body.  My  mind  seems  to  be  unable  to 
give  me  the  stimulus  it  used  to.  I  have  to  con- 
stantly fight  depression.  There  are  no  material 
causes  for  this  mental  heaviness Per- 
haps you  may  think  it  is  a  case  of  mental  in- 
digestion, but  I  have  tried  rest  for  my  mind,  but 
it  only  makes  these  attacks  of  numbness  more 
pronounced.  Is  there  any  knowledge  which  can 
help  me?" 

You  ask  for  help  and  the  Law  is  that  all  who  ask 
must  receive,  but  we  feel  that  we  cannot  help  you  much 
without  upsetting  some  of  your  preconceived  ideas, 
and  we  know  from  sad  experience  that  this  is  not  a 


48  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

pleasant  task.  But  when  one  asks  we  can  but  give  the 
food  the  Master  has  given  us  to  distribute.  It  is  but 
two  loaves  of  bread  and  five  small  fishes,  and  those 
who  cannot  eat  bread  and  fish  may  have  to  go  away 
hungry,  but  for  those  who  can  eat  and  be  filled  with 
such  food  they  are  more  than  welcome. 

You  complain  of  a  lack  of  vitality  and  enthusiasm ; 
let  us  look  for  the  cause.  The  whole  trend  of  the  so- 
called  New  Thought  is  to  deify  mind,  to  make  mind 
and  self  supreme.  As  you  put  it,  the  mind  has  been 
trained  to  forget  and  overcome  the  body.  That  is  all 
very  well,  but  what  if  the  mind  itself  grows  exhausted? 
What  if  it  reaches  a  point  of  development  where  it 
has  emptied  itself?  Where  constant  affirmations  and 
strenuous  thought- forces  have  ceased  to  satisfy? 
Where  the  mind  refuses  longer  to  sit  upon  the  throne 
it  has  usurped?  Where  the  mind  has  awakened  to  a 
knowledge  that  it  is  but  a  vehicle,  a  servant,  and  cries 
out  for  help  and  guidance?  This  is  the  point  that 
you  have  reached,  and  nothing  can  help  you  but  a 
recognition  of  this  truth. 

Instead  of  bowing  down  to  mind,  listen  for  the  Still 
Small  Voice  that  speaks  in  the  "Soundless  Sound."1 
What  was  it  that  led  you  to  come  to  us  for  help? 
Whatever  it  was  listen  to  it  again  and  ask  it  if  this  ad- 
vice is  good.  You  are  hungry  for  Divine  Love  and 
the  guidance  of  your  Father-in-heaven.  You  have 
reached  the  parting  of  the  ways  and  must  choose  the 
table  from  which  you  will  eat  henceforth.  If  the 
morsel  of  food  you  receive  herewith  is  acceptable  to 
you  we  would  be  pleased  to  hear  the  reply  you  receive 
from  the  Voice. 

1  The  Soundless  Sound,   Curtiss.  A  book  of  devotion. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  49 

July  28th. 

"Do  you  not  regard  mind  as  God's  greatest  gift 
to  man,  and  the  desire  to  cultivate  it  a  divine 

instinct  ? I    feel    like    a    chrysalis — in    a 

state  of  development — so  reach  out  to  the  light 
wherever  I  see  a  glimpse." 

As  to  mind  being  God's  greatest  gift,  we  would  say 
that  mind  is,  indeed,  man's  crowning  gift,  or,  to  put 
it  differently,  mind  is  the  highest  step  attainable  for 
mere  man.  But  mind  or  manias  f  the  fifth  principle,  is 
dual  and  is  called  in  Eastern  philosophy  the  higher  and 
lower  manas.  It  can  be  attached  to  the  lower  princi- 
ples (sthula  sharira  or  gross  physical  body;  linga 
sharira  or  astral  body  or  body  of  sensation;  prana  or 
life-force,  and  kama  or  animal  soul)  and  make  man 
an  intellectual  animal,  or  it  can  be  drawn  upward  and 
merged  into  and  become  one  with  the  higher  princi- 
ples (Buddhi,  the  Soul,  and  Atma,  the  Spirit)  and 
form  the  Divine  triangle — something  more  than  mere 
human  mind.  Mind  alone  is  but  an  instrument,  a 
tool,  but  mind  merged  into  Soul  and  Spiritual  Essence 
becomes  the  Divine  Indweller,  the  Father-in-heaven, 
the  Higher  Self.  In  the  majority  of  mankind  mind 
is  vacillating,  occasionally  reaching  up  to  the  Divine, 
but  again  falling  to  earth. 

To  devote  all  one's  efforts  to  the  cultivation  of 
mind  (the  instrument)  and  to  set  mind  upon  the  throne 
of  Spirit,  is  eventually  to  become  a  mere  intellectual 
machine ;  and  sooner  or  later  the  mind  itself  rebels 
and  forces  rest  and  recuperation.  To  quote  Bulwer 
Lytton :  "The  soul  has  need  of  pauses  of  repose — 
intervals  of  escape,  not  only  from  the  flesh,  but  even 
from  the  mind.  A  man  of  loftiest  intellect  will  ex- 
perience times  when  mere  intellect  not  only  fatigues 
him,  but  amidst  its  most  original  conceptions,  amidst 


50  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

its  proudest  triumphs,  has  a  something  trite  and  com- 
monplace compared  with  one  of  those  vague  intima- 
tions of  a  spiritual  destiny  which  are  not  within  the 
ordinary  domain  of  reason."  We  strongly  recom- 
mend you  to  read  Bulwer  Lytton's  A  Strange  Story. 
Read  it  carefully,  recognizing  that  the  character, 
Dr.  Fenwicky  represents  mind  or  pure  intellect  and 
reason  alone ;  Margrave,  animal  man  alone,  and  Lillian 
the  Soul,  and  we  think  you  will  get  a  new  conception 
of  the  relative  position  and  value  of  the  three. 

What  you  are  pleased  to  term  "instinct"  as  prompt- 
ing you  to  write  to  us  we  would  give  the  higher  name 
of  intuition.  Instinct  is  that  which  guides  the  lower 
kingdoms  alone,  not  man.  Instinct  is  that  unseen 
guiding  force  of  the  universal  Life-essence  that  urges 
inanimate  nature  to  seek  for  the  best  conditions  for 
growth,  and  to  overcome  obstacles  and  adapt  itself  to 
conditions  until  it  reaches  the  end  for  which  it  was 
created.  It  also  acts  in  all  creatures,  animal  man  in- 
cluded, with  an  incessant  urge  toward  an  end — the 
end  for  which  they  are  destined.  Intuition,  on  the 
contrary,  is  the  Voice  of  the  Soul  speaking  to  man, 
who  alone  of  all  creation  has  reached  a  point  in  evolu- 
tion where  mind  has  become  dual ;  for  many  brutes 
have  mind,  and  a  highly  developed  mind,  but  it  is  not 
dual.  That  is,  the  brutes  have  only  what  we  call 
lower  manas  and  are  guided  through  instinct  by  the 
Universal  Mind,  while  man,  who  has  reached  the 
point  of  development  where  the  lower  mind  has  been 
overshadowed  by  and  attached  to  Soul  and  Spirit, 
has  the  guidance  put  into  his  own  hands.  Hence,  the 
brute  thinks,  but  only  along  lines  which  lead  to  its 
own  well-being.  Man  can  listen  to  the  dictates  of  a 
higher  Will  and  can  fashion  his  mind  after  the  Divine, 
or  we  might  put  it  that  the  brute  is  guided  by  an  Uni- 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  51 

versal  Mind  outside  of  itself  while  man  has  his  source 
of  guidance  within  himself  and  is  individually  respon- 
sible for  the  result. 

The  chrysalis  which  you  feel  enfolding  you  is  the 
effort  of  the  mind  to  draw  away  from  the  lower  fields 
of  mere  intellectual  activity,  and  the  struggling  into 
the  Divine  Light  where  the  mind  shall  take  its  true 
place  at  the  base  of  the  triangle  whose  apex  is  Divinity. 
Just  as  a  grub,  when  it  has  fulfilled  its  life  as  a  grub 
and  has  garnered  all  the  experience  to  be  gained  from 
that  state,  wraps  itself  round  with  a  cocoon  and  be- 
comes a  chrysalis  and  drops  into  a  lethargic  sleep  only 
to  awaken  as  a  butterfly — a  thing  with  wings  capable 
of  reaching  up  into  and  exploring  a  higher  element 
(the  air) — so  the  mind  shall  find  its  wings  and  shall 
soar  upward  into  spiritual  realms.  The  grub  and  the 
butterfly  are  the  same  creatures,  but  how  different! 
The  butterfly  has  not  left  the  earth,  but  it  is  no  longer 
confined  to  it.  So  it  is  with  the  mind  when  wedded  to 
Soul  and  guided  by  intuition. 

To  laboriously  cultivate  the  mind  is  well,  for  knowl- 
edge is  power,  but  there  is  a  better  way,  the  way  indi- 
cated by  the  great  Master  Jesus  when,  in  speaking  of 
The  Christ-principle  within,  He  said :  "I  am  the  way, 
the  truth  and  the  life."  For  Christ-life  is  Wisdom, 
and  Wisdom  includes  all  knowledge.  When  The 
Christ  within  is  enthroned  the  Still  Small  Voice  will 
never  desert  or  fail  us,  and  only  then  are  all  things 
ours,  all  knowledge  and  all  needed  help,  for  your 
Father  knoweth  that  ye  have  need  of  them  be  they 
what  they  may.  The  attempt  to  avoid  living  The 
Christ-life  by  worshiping  mind  is  futile.  "Seek  ye 
first  the  kingdom  of  heaven  and  all  these  things  shall 
be  added  unto  you"  is  not  a  mere  platitude,  but  the 
most  practical  of  all  occult  directions. 


52  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

Feb.  2nd,  1908. 

"I  should  be  glad  if  you  could  give  me  a  clear 
explanation  of  how  I  should  approach  the  'enter- 
ing into  the  silence.'  I  have  been  attempting  this 
but  the  result  so  far  has  only  been  to  disturb 
my  usual  sound  sleep  and  bringing  into  my  wak- 
ing consciousness  broken  remnants  of  life  during 
sleep,  many  of  which  I  can  only  associate  with 
the  working  of  the  lower  mind.  Also  what  will 
the  remembering  consist  of  and  when  is  the 
best  time  to  make  the  effort?  So  far  it  has  been 
made  immediately  before  going  to  sleep." 

All  that  is  desirable  at  the  time  of  falling  to  sleep 
is  to  compose  the  mind  and  give  an  upward  trend  to 
the  thoughts  by  a  heart-felt  prayer  such  as  we  sent 
you  with  the  last  lesson.  (The  Morning  Prayer.  Ed.) 
Sink  off  to  sleep  as  nearly  as  possible  like  a  little 
child,  with  a  calm  faith  in  the  Father's  care  and  a 
feeling  of  brotherhood  to  all  humanity.  Should  there 
be  anyone  with  whom  you  find  it  hard  to  get  along,  or 
who  has  deeply  wronged  you,  do  not  harass  yourself 
in  a  vain  effort  to  think  lovingly  of  them.  Just  say: 
"I  forgive.  If  I  cannot  forgive  now  I  pray  the  Father 
to  give  me  a  forgiving  spirit."  In  the  meantime  put 
the  unforgiven  one  out  of  your  mind  entirely;  for 
man  cannot  think  of  wrongs  without  stirring  up  un- 
kind feelings,  and  this  must  never  be  allowed,  especi- 
ally upon  going  to  sleep. 

The  time  to  enter  into  the  Silence  is  any  convenient 
time  when  you  can  have  at  least  ten  minutes  alone.  If 
possible,  have  the  same  time,  the  same  room  and  the 
same  chair ;  for  thought  impresses  itself  upon  so- 
called  inanimate  things  and  in  this  way  no  effort 
is  lost.  Sit  down  comfortably,  close  your  eyes 
and,  after  repeating  The  Healing  Prayer1  and  adding 

1  See  Appendix. 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  53 

any  personal  petition  that  your  Soul  dictates,  quietly 
determine  that  the  mind  shall  remain  blank.  Then 
believe  that  your  Real  Self  can  and  will  draw  near  and 
will  guide  you  if  you  can  succeed  in  stilling  the  phys- 
ical vibrations.  This  may  take  time  and  practice,  and 
you  may  fall  asleep,  but  do  not  let  anything  discour- 
age or  worry  you.  If  your  mind  wanders  or  becomes 
active,  bring  it  back  and  mentally  repeat  Silence ! 
Silence !  You  will  soon  find  that  you  will  come  from 
this  period  of  silence  refreshed  in  body  and  mind  and 
that  you  have  strong  impressions  and  a  comprehen- 
sion of  truths  that  previously  were  vague. 

Never  argue  with  yourself  about  a  truth  heard  for 
the  first  time,  but  mentally  take  it  with  you  and,  before 
going  into  the  Silence,  lay  the  puzzle  before  your 
Higher  self.  You  may  not  get  immediate  enlighten- 
ment, but  sooner  or  later  you  will  see  that  the  matter 
has  cleared  up  and  apparently  you  have  "thought  it 
out"  for  yourself.  You  may  get  your  answer  most  unex- 
pectedly from  a  book,  a  letter,  a  lecture  or  a  chance  re- 
mark of  a  friend,  but  somehow  you  will  get  your 
answer.  Finally  you  will  gain  the  power  of  coming 
personally  and  consciously  into  union  with  your  Higher 
Self,  who  is  one  with  God.  You  will  then  hear  the 
spoken  words  that  will  answer  every  question.  Do 
not  expect  this  at  first,  but  hunt  for  the  answer  and  be 
ready  to  recognize  it  when  given. 

"I  have  had  many  psychic  experiences 

and  am  now  sitting  in  a  circle  to  develop  into 
a  spiritual  medium.  Will  you  please  help  me  to 
become  a  medium?" 

As  to  your  experiences,  you  are  evidently  develop- 
ing the  ability  to  leave  the  physical  body  and  come  into 
contact  with  higher  planes.  And  right  here  there  is  a 


54  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

great  need  for  caution,  for  the  denizens  of  the  astral- 
plane  are  of  many  sorts,  just  as  there  are  entities  upon 
the  physical-plane  of  many  sorts.  Unless  you  keep 
faithful  watch  over  your  "doors"  some  very  undesir- 
able visitors  may  enter  your  aura  and  your  conscious- 
ness. To  be  what  is  known  as  a  "medium"  is  far  from 
desirable,  for  as  the  term  is  generally  used  it  means 
one  who  allows  himself  to  become  negative  and 
hands  over  his  body  to  some  discarnate  entity  to  do 
with  as  it  pleases.  Remember,  each  person  is  held 
accountable  and  absolutely  responsible  both  for  his 
mentality  and  individuality.  It  makes  no  difference 
whether,  through  your  negligence  or  ignorance,  you 
vacate  the  premises  and  another  enters  who  misuses 
your  organism  and  faculties.  You  are  still  respon- 
sible. And  if  responsible,  it  is  desirable  that  you  re- 
main in  full  command  and  able  to  open  the  "doors"  to 
those  whom  you  desire  to  enter  and  close  them  to  all 
others.  The  lesson  on  Narcotics,  Alcohol  and 
Psychism  will  give  you  the  reasons. 

Every  gift  unfolded,  however,  is  yours  to  use.  But 
as  each  one  adds  to  your  responsibility  you  must  be 
careful  to  learn  all  about  the  laws  governing  such 
gifts  that  you  may  use  them  only  for  the  glory  of 
God.  The  only  right  way  to  contact  the  higher  planes 
is  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  your  physical  body  and  its 
centers  through  a  spiritual  life,  loving  thoughts  and 
helpful  actions,  until  they  vibrate  in  harmony  with 
the  key-note  of  the  higher  planes  and  at  such  a  pitch 
that  "no  evil  thing  shall  come  nigh  thy  dwelling." 

There  are  two  ways  to  come  into  touch  with  the 
higher  planes.  The  first  is  by  vibrating  to  the  spirit- 
ual note  of  love.  To  do  this  you  must  be  clothed  with 
spiritual  atoms.  You  thus  come  into  harmony  with 
the  spiritual-plane  and  become  aware  of  spiritual  Be- 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  55 

ings  whom  you  are  temporarily  able  to  contact  because 
you  vibrate  in  harmony  with  Them. 

The  second  method  is  to  make  yourself  negative 
and  allow  your  physical  vibrations  to  be  so  stilled 
that  many  physical  atoms  are  easily  loosened  and  de- 
tached and  your  vitality  is  drawn  upon  by  any  astral — 
not  spiritual — entity  who  may  wish  to  gather  them 
and  clothe  himself  in  them  and  thus,  temporarily,  vi- 
brate to  the  key-note  of  the  physical-plane  and  become 
temporarily  recognizable  on  that  plane. 

In  the  first  instance  the  whole  experience  will  be 
uplifting  and  the  spiritual  atoms  which  you  have  con- 
tacted and  drawn  into  your  body  will  rejuvenate  and 
strengthen  it  and  will  elevate  your  mind  and  advance 
you  on  the  Path  of  Attainment.  The  second  method 
will  deplete  and  weaken  your  physical  body,  enervate 
your  nervous  system,  dull  your  mentality  and  place 
a  great  stumbling  block  in  your  path  if  it  does  not 
lead  to  insanity  or  moral  degeneration.  This  can 
easily  be  verified  by  following  the  history  of  the  ma- 
jority of  subjective  "mediums."  They  almost  in- 
variably end  by  becoming  physical  or  moral  wrecks 
and  find  it  necessary  to  resort  to  stimulants,  and  the 
stimulants,  by  opening  still  wider  the  "doors"  and 
weakening  still  more  the  control  over  the  centers,  but 
shorten  the  time  ere  the  person  is  ruined. 

The  first  method  is  a  spiritually  constructive  proc- 
ess, the  other  a  spiritually  destructive  one.  If  you 
understand  these  facts  and  the  fact  that  most  entities 
upon  the  astral-plane  are  not  spiritual  beings,  but 
merely  your  friends  with  their  dense  and  outer  cover- 
ing or  garment  (the  physical  body)  removed,  you  will 
understand  the  danger  of  giving  yourself  up  to  their 
use. 


56  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

You  would  hesitate  to  lend  your  body  to  any  of 
your  friends  on  earth  to  do  with  as  they  pleased,  and 
the  mere  passing  over  makes  no  difference  whatever ; 
they  are  able  to  use  their  astral  faculties,  which  are  a 
little  finer  than  the  physical,  but  that  is  all.  They  are 
just  as  spiritually  advanced  as  when  on  earth,  know 
just  as  much  of  the  laws  of  life,  but  no  more.  Never 
give  them  any  form  of  worship.  Simply  take  such 
advice  as  they  have  to  give  as  you  would  take  their 
advice  when  upon  earth,  i.  e.,  subject  to  your  own  good 
judgment  and  common-sense. 

You  can  always  be  sure  which  of  these  two  methods 
has  been  used  by  the  effect  on  the  psychics'  physical 
body.  If  after  the  experience  they  are  exhausted, 
tired,  cross,  fretful,  nervous  and  uneasy,  sometimes 
as  long  as  a  day  or  two,  you  can  rest  assured  that  they 
have  allowed  some  entity  to  absorb  their  vital  atoms 
and  have  allowed  their  physical  vitality  to  clothe  that 
entity  according  to  the  destructive  method.  If,  on 
the  other  hand,  you  find  that  their  physical  vitality  is 
augmented;  that  a  peaceful,  happy  and  vigorous  feel- 
ing remains,  even  for  days  after  the  experience;  that 
life  seems  fuller,  trials  easier  to  bear  and  love  more 
abundant,  you  can  rest  assured  that  they  have  risen 
above  earthly  things  and  have  been  clothed  upon  by 
the  Spirit  and  have  been  enwrapped  in  spiritual  atoms, 
and  have  descended  into  the  astral  only  to  cull  its  les- 
sons for  their  own  good  and  for  the  help  of  humanity. 

You  cannot  always  tell  which  of  the  above  methods 
is  being  used  from  the  teachings  received  at  such  a 
time,  for  in  both  cases  the  teachings  may  be  helpful ; 
but  the  fact  remains  that  the  first  method  is  harmful 
to  both  the  medium  and  to  the  entity  who  communi- 
cates. It  is  more  a  question  of  how  the  teachings 
are  given  than  what  is  given.  No  Master  of  Wisdom, 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  57 

or  anyone  connected  with  The  Great  White  Lodge, 
will  ever  give  out  teachings  or  even  communicate,  by 
the  second  and  destructive  method.  No  matter  who 
the  communicating  entity  may  claim  to  be,  it  will  not 
be  a  Master  of  Wisdom. 

The  first  or  constructive  method  is  the  form  of 
spiritual  communion  to  be  desired,  not  "mediumship." 
But  do  not  strive  even  for  this.  Let  it  be  a  natural 
growth  resulting  from  a  life  filled  with  loving 
thoughts  and  deeds. 

"I  would  like  you  to  give  me  conclusive  evi- 
dence that  man  is  composed  of  different  and  in- 
dependent entities  called  respectively,  body, 
life,  mind,  soul,  spirit.  It  has  always  been  my 
opinion  that  these  terms  designate  only  dif- 
ferent attributes  of  the  organism." 

You  ask  for  "conclusive  evidence,"  but  you  must 
bear  in  mind  that,  even  in  science,  what  is  "con- 
clusive" to  one  group  of  scientists  is  not  to  another. 
If  by  "conclusive  evidence"  you  mean  that  you  wish 
us  to  dissect  the  human  body  before  your  eyes  and 
pull  out  life  and  mind  and  Soul  as  a  nest  of  Chinese 
boxes  might  be  pulled  one  from  the  other,  we  frankly 
admit  that  we  cannot  do  it.  If,  however,  you  accept 
as  conclusive  the  sort  of  evidence  that  science  accepts 
in  regard  to  imponderable  things,  we  can  give  you 
conclusive  evidence.  For  instance,  no  doubt  you  ad- 
mit that  you  have  a  brain,  altho  you  have  never  seen, 
weighed  or  measured  it,  nor  can  you  find  anyone  who 
has  ever  seen,  weighed  or  measured  it.  You  may  be- 
lieve that  you  have  a  mind,  but  your  own  materialistic 
psychology  says  that  you  have  nothing  but  automatic 
reactions  to  external  and  internal  stimuli.  Science 
says  that  you  cannot  prove  that  you  exist,  or  that  any- 
thing exists;  that  all  things  present  themselves  to 


58  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

your  consciousness  by  their  effect  on  your  sense 
organs,  the  things  themselves,  possibly,  being  quite 
different  from  the  report  of  them  given  by  your 
senses.  The  evidence  that  man  is  a  complex  being 
made  up  of  different  entities  must  be  judged  by  the 
manner  in  which  your  consciousness  is  affected,  and 
hence  can  be  conclusive  only  to  yourself.  No  ma- 
terialistic "proof"  can  be  given.  There  are  those, 
however,  who  are  willing  to  take  the  word  of  Those 
who  have  passed  beyond  the  human  stage  and  know. 
This,  of  course,  is  not  proof  to  you  unless  certain  of 
your  sense  organs  can  respond  to  Their  message. 

We  would  not  attempt  to  prove  to  you  that  "man 
is  composed  of  different  and  independent  entities,"  for, 
as  body,  life,  mind,  Soul  and  Spirit  manifest  on  the 
physical-plane  they  are  not  wholly  independent,  but 
closely  interrelated.  When  the  life  leaves  the  body 
you  still  have  that  you  call  "the  human  organism," 
but  its  so-called  "attributes"  have  disappeared;  the 
mind  may  depart  and  yet  leave  the  organism  and  the 
life  functioning  apparently  as  well  as  before,  as  seen  in 
idiots  and  the  insane ;  the  Soul  and  the  Spirit  may  also 
be  absent,  yet  the  mind  and  the  life  may  continue 
to  function  through  the  intact  "human  organism." 
If  man  were  merely  an  automatic  organism  with  "at- 
tributes," wherever  you  found  the  organism  you  would 
find  the  attributes.  But,  as  we  have  seen  above,  any 
one  or  all  of  the  attributes  may  be  absent. 

Our  teaching  is  that  the  Soul  is  the  immortal,  rein- 
carnating Ego,  while  the  Spirit  is  the  universal  Breath 
of  Divinity  which  animates  the  Soul  or  Ego  just  as 
the  Breath  of  Life  animates  the  physical  body.  The 
mind  is  a  dual  expression  of  the  Soul,  consisting  of  a 
Higher  (spiritual)  and  a  lower  (brain)  mind,  the 
lower  being  but  a  reflection  in  physical  matter  of  the 


Spiritual  Growth  and  Development  59 

Real  Mind  which  is  Spiritual  Self-consciousness. 
Thus  the  real  I  is  an  immortal  Soul  having  finite  Spirit- 
ual Self-consciousness,  overshadowed  and  animated 
by  or  filled  with  Infinite  Spirit.  This  Real  Self  is 
spoken  of  as  the  Higher  Self  or  the  Father-in-heaven 
of  the  different  religions,  and  manifests  on  earth 
through  a  vehicle  composed  of  a  physical  body  and  its 
astral  counterpart,  and  a  reflection  of  the  Spiritual 
Mind  acting  as  Desire,  all  animated  by  prana  or  life- 
force. 

A  good  way  to  distinguish  the  Real  Self  is  to  elimi- 
nate everything  that  can  be  considered  as  a  possession, 
i.  e.,  my  body,  my  mind,  my  life,  etc.  You  cannot  say 
"my  Spirit"  any  more  than  a  sponge  resting  on  the 
bed  of  the  ocean  can  say  "my  water";  for  it  is  said 
that,  could  the  sponge  last  long  enough  every  drop  of 
water  in  the  ocean  would  pass  through  it,  as  well  as 
through  every  other  sponge.  To  say  "my  Spirit"  is 
to  limit  Spirit  which  is  Infinite.  The  Spirit  moved 
upon  the  face  of  the  waters  in  the  beginning  and  must 
ever  move  in  and  through  and  over  all  creations.  It 
is  the  Breath  of  Life  of  the  Real  Self. 

"Tell  me,  brother,  how  best  to  cultivate  and 
make  strong  the  Spiritual  Will."     An  Aspirant. 

You  can  strengthen  your  Spiritual  Will  by  not  try- 
ing. Just  endeavor  to  interest  yourself  in  spiritual 
matters,  think  pure  thoughts  and  do  kind  deeds.  Read 
books  of  an  uplifting  character.  Study  them  not  only 
with  your  head  (intellect),  but  strive  to  enter  into 
their  deeper  meaning  with  your  heart  (intuition). 
Know  well  that  no  matter  how  lofty  a  philosophy  or 
how  good  a  lesson,  unless  it  brings  to  your  individual 
Soul  some  practical  application,  something  that  you  can 
work  into  your  daily  life,  that  philosophy  or  lesson  is 


60  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

of  no  account  to  you.  You  cannot  force  yourself  to 
will  what  you  do  not  desire,  but  you  can  cultivate  a 
desire  for  spirituality.  And  desire,  being  a  lower  note 
of  the  same  octave,  will  of  necessity  awaken  Will. 

"If  a  psychic  receives  a  message  given  in  the 
first  person,  i.  e.,  if  he  is  told  to  do  certain  things, 
perhaps  a  great  work  for  humanity,  and  if  with 
the  message  there  comes  a  wonderful  promise,  I 
have  been  told  that  he  only  overheard  a  message 
given  to  humanity  at  large,  and  that  only  his  poor, 
weak,  human  egotism  makes  him  apply  the  mes- 
sage and  the  promise  to  himself.  What  is  your 
teaching  on  this  point?"  Occult  Student. 

The  Elder  Brothers  of  humanity,  the  great  Masters 
of  Wisdom,  into  whose  hands  the  evolution  of  the 
Race  is  entrusted,  are  continually  sending  forth  the 
cry  for  helpers.  "The  harvest  truly  is  great,  but  the 
laborers  are  few,"  for  They  can  work  on  the  earth- 
plane  only  through  human  agencies.  With  the  cry 
goes  the  promise  of  sure  reward  for  all  who  hear  and 
obey.  The  answer  to  your  question  is  plainly  given  in 
Revelation  XXII,  17:  "And  the  Spirit  and  the  bride 
say,  Come.  And  let  him  that  heareth  say,  Come.  And 
let  him  that  is  athirst  come.  And  whosoever  will,  let 
him  take  of  the  water  of  life  freely." 

None  can  hear  unless  their  vibrations  are  keyed  to 
the  note  of  the  call.  When  this  takes  place  they  hear 
the  cry  because  it  comes  to  them  and  enters  their  heart 
and  understanding.  What  is  everyone's  business  is 
seldom  attended  to,  but  he  who  hears,  and  understands 
his  duty,  to  him  does  the  message  apply  personally. 
Many  reform  movements  appeal  to  the  sympathy  of 
all,  but  the  Pharisees  and  Sadducees  pass  by  on  the 
other  side.  The  one  who  hears  the  cry  to  help  hu- 
manity and  heeds  it,  even  if  he  be  only  one  of  the 


Spiritual  Grozvth  and  Development  61 

humblest  of  the  Samaritans,  will  stop  and  bind  up  the 
wounds  of  the  helpless  and  accept  the  work  as  his  own. 
To  every  one  who  thus  hears,  the  promise  is  given. 
When  the  cry,  "Come/'  is  heard,  instead  of  waiting 
for  some  one  more  worthy  to  answer  first,  the  reply 
should  be,  "Here  am  I.  Speak,  Lord,  for  thy  servant 
heareth." 

If  the  Samaritan  had  done  the  work  in  a  grandiose 
manner  to  be  seen  of  men,  or  had  he  refused  to  allow 
anyone  else  to  participate  in  that  work  for  fear  of  los- 
ing the  worldly  honor  for  the  deed,  he  would  have 
been  acting  from  "human  egotism."  And,  no  matter 
how  faithfully  he  did  the  work,  it  would  bring  only 
bitterness  and  sorrow,  and  he  could  not  claim  the 
promised  reward.  He  could  not  take  of  the  water  of 
life  freely,  because  by  the  manner  of  doing  the  work 
he  would  prove  that  he  had  not  yet  overcome  human 
egotism,  and  the  promise  is  "unto  him  that  over- 
cometh." 

When  a  psychic  hears  such  a  call  let  him  or  her  at 
once  determine  to  set  about  preparing  himself  or  her- 
self to  obey  the  call  in  true  humility  and  without  false 
modesty,  which  is  the  outgrowth  of  egotism1. 


'See  Chapter  XX,  in  The  Voice  of  his.  Curtiss. 


PART  II. 

THE  MASTERS  OF  WISDOM  AND  THEIR 
WORK. 

"If  there  are  in  the  Universe  such  beings  as  Angels 
or  Spirits,  whose  Incorporeal  essence  may  constitute 
an  intelligent  Entity,  notwithstanding  the  absence  of 
any  (to  us)  solid  organism ;  and  if  there  are  those  who 
believe  that  a  God  made  the  first  man  out  of  dust,  and 
breathed  into  him  a  living  Soul — and  there  are  mil- 
lions upon  millions  who  believe  both — what  does  this 
doctrine  of  ours  contain  that  is  so  impossible?" — The 
Secret  Doctrine,  Blavatsky,  Vol.  II. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        63 


PART  II. 

THE  MASTERS  OF  WISDOM  AND  THEIR 
WORK. 

June  1st,  1908. 

"Since  I  was  about  fourteen  years  of  age,  I've 
been  a  church  member  and  worker  therein,  always 

loving  it  because  it  is  God's  work I  have 

been  the  recipient  of  a  communication  from  you 
relative  to  The  Order  of  the  15.  It  is  entirely 
new  matter  to  me,  so  I  should  be  glad  for  you 
to  write  to  me  and  explain  the  meaning  of 
'Masters  of  Wisdom'  and  'Great  White  Lodge.' " 

The  Masters  of  Wisdom  are  Great  Souls  who, 
through  repeated  experiences  and  determined  effort 
through  many  earth  lives,  have  obtained  mastery, 
firstly,  over  the  passions,  appetites  and  desires  of  the 
personal  self;  and  secondly,  over  the  forces  of  Their 
bodies  and  over  the  life-currents  of  the  Cosmos. 
Hence  They  have  become  one  with  the  Fount  of  all 
Wisdom.  They  and  the  Father  are  one.  Jesus  was 
such  a  Master,  in  fact  was  and  is  a  Master  of  Masters. 
But  there  are  many  more,  all  banded  together  in  what 
is  known  as  The  Great  White  Lodge;  a  lodge  in  the 
sense  of  oneness  of  aim  and  motive;  for  They  are  all 
working  for  the  uplifting  of  humanity.  They  are  di- 
vided into  certain  degrees  and  subdivided  into  orders 
so  as  to  systematically  cover  all  the  needs  of  humanity 
in  its  different  stages  of  evolution.  You  will  thus  see 
that  there  are  Masters  of  all  grades,  that  is,  upon  all 
steps  of  the  ladder  leading  to  the  point  of  highest  at- 
tainment where  a  Master  of  Masters  stands.  Each 
group  and  each  individual  has  a  certain  work  to  do 


64  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

for  the  betterment  of  humanity.  These  Great  Souls 
are  able  to  function  on  all  planes,  hence  They  are  near 
to  all  who  really  need  Their  help;  for  humanity  must 
reach  out  for  help  ere  it  can  be  given. 

As  long  as  individuals  are  satisfied  with  a  purely 
physical  existence  the  Masters  know  well  that  they  are 
not  yet  ready  to  be  helped;  for  their  lessons  are  those 
of  the  physical.  So  They  wait  patiently  through  the 
ages  knowing  that  all  is  well,  and  that  the  treading  of 
the  downward  arc  of  the  cycle,  while  apparently  lead- 
ing away  from  Godhood,  in  reality  is  leading  the  Soul 
to  a  necessary  point  where,  having  fed  on  the  husks 
and  consorted  with  the  swine,  it  lifts  up  its  eyes  and 
sees  afar  off  its  Father's  home  and  says,  "I  will  arise 
and  go  to  my  father."  It  is  here  that  some  helping 
hand  is  always  stretched  out  to  them,  and  it  is  always 
from  the  Lodge  of  Masters,  which  has  been  watching 
and  waiting  in  patient  love  for  that  moment,  that  the 
help  comes.  It  may  seem  to  come  from  some  natural 
and  ordinary  source,  but  in  reality  it  is  from  these 
Watchers  and  Elder  Brothers  of  humanity  who  make 
use  of  natural  channels  to  answer  the  cry  of  the  Soul 
for  light  and  help. 

As  the  Soul  evolves  upward  and  inward  it  will  take 
many  decided  steps ;  will  reach  points  where  all  the  old 
props  which  seemed  so  satisfying  will  drop  away  like 
the  straws  that  elude  the  grasp  of  a  drowning  man. 
This  simply  means  that  the  Soul  has  entered  a  new 
Order,  and  that  which  helped  in  the  old  grade  or  Order 
is  now  no  longer  sufficient.  The  Soul  cries  out  in  dis- 
may, "Help,  Lord,  or  I  perish!"  Then  it  is  that  the 
outward  recognition  comes,  just  as  these  new  teach- 
ings are  coming  to  you.  The  Masters  of  Wisdom 
know  who  need  the  outer  help,  and  it  never  fails  to 
present  itself.  It  is  no  new  teaching  nor  a  getting 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        65 

away  from  Christianity  and  the  Savior ;  it  is  but  a 
new  step  on  the  Path ;  a  higher  grade  in  the  school  of 
the  Soul ;  a  drawing  nearer  to  the  only  Savior,  The 
Christ  who  dwells  forever  among  men — aye,  in  their 
very  midst.  One  of  the  aims  of  this  Order  is  the  ex- 
pounding of  the  teachings  of  the  Master  Jesus,  and  we 
trust  the  above  outline  will  help  you  to  grasp  some- 
thing of  its  significance. 

May  13th,  1908. 

"In  the  existence  of  Masters  I  joyfully  believe 
but  that  there  are  also  astral  entities  masquerad- 
ing as  Masters  I  believe  as  well.  How  are  we 
going  to  know  the  difference?  So  far,  appar- 
ently, the  wisdom  of  the is  quite  unable 

to  help  us  on  this  point,  for  at  present  that  society 
presents  the  unedifying  spectacle  of  intelligent 
men  and  women  prostrate  under  the  glamor  of 
the  most  morbid  and  unhealthy  character, 
blindly  following  beings  who,  if  we  are  to  judge 
them  by  the  words  given  to  us  as  theirs,  are  thor- 
oughly erratic  and  unreliable,  and  indeed,  dis- 
reputable. These  are  the  Masters  of  a  large  por- 
tion of  the !" 

We  are  not  surprised  at  your  attitude,  for  it  is 
quite  natural  under  the  circumstances.  But  when  you 
come  to  grasp  the  significance  of  all  the  seeming  con- 
fusion of  which  you  complain  you  will  understand 
that  it  is  the  necessary  working  out  of  the  Great  Law 
as  expressed  in  The  Voice  of  the  Silence,  "  'Great 
Sifter'  is  the  name  of  the  'Heart  Doctrine/  O  Disciple. 
The  wheel  of  the  Good  Law  moves  swiftly  on.  It 
grinds  by  night  and  by  day.  The  worthless  husks  it 
drives  from  out  the  golden  grain,  the  refuse  from 
the  flour.  The  hand  of  Karma  guides  the  wheel ;  the 
revolutions  mark  the  beating  of  the  cosmic  heart." 

The ,  and  its  subsidiary,  the ,  as  well  as 

many  other  bona  fide  movements,  were  started  for  the 


66  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

express  purpose  of  testing  and  selecting  the  wheat 
from  the  chaff.  This  explains  the  many  upheavals  and 
troubles  that  have  come  to  all  these  movements;  they 
are  but  the  threshing  of  the  grain.  This  has  been  go- 
ing on  for  its  appointed  time  and  now  the  winnowing 
process  has  begun.  This  Movement  is  but  one  more 
stroke  of  the  flail.  Being  nearer  the  end  the  strokes 
come  quicker  and  heavier,  and  all  the  grains  must  feel 
the  blows ;  but  with  them  comes  the  skill  and  strength 
of  the  Great  Sifter  who  already  discerns  the  golden 
grain  and  directs  His  strokes  with  wisdom,  so  that  no 
true  grain  will  be  crushed  or  lost.  "Shun  ignorance, 
and  likewise  shun  illusion.  Avert  thy  face  from 
world  deceptions."  Many  are  called,  truly,  but  few 
are  chosen. 

As  you  say,  the  leaders  may  have  proof  of  the  pres- 
ence of  the  Master,  yet  each  student  must  find  and 
prove  that  Presence  for  himself.  The  whole  aim  and 
end  of  this  Movement  is  to  help  each  individual  Soul 
to  find,  not  only  The  Christ  within  himself,  but  also 
the  guiding  hand  of  the  Master.  We  cannot  assure 
you  that  you  will  find  Him,  for  many  feel  around  in  a 
darkness  created  by  themselves  and  never  touch  the 
out-stretched  hand.  To  quote  again,  "For  mind  is 
like  a  mirror ;  it  gathers  dust  while  it  reflects.  It  needs 
the  gentle  breezes  of  Soul-wisdom  to  brush  away  the 
dust  of  our  illusions."  We  can  only  say  that  the 
Teacher  and  Guide  stands  ready,  close  at  hand,  to 
guide  and  help  you  through  this  labyrinth  of  dark- 
ness into  the  light  of  the  perfect  day. 

May  6th,  1908. 

"I  am  desirous  of  associating  with  you  as 
closely  as  I  may  be  permitted,  so  that  you  may 
teach  me  how  to  better  understand  the  law  of 
our  eternal  Being  and  help  humanity." 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        67 

The  Lodge  of  Masters  is  eagerly  watching  and  wait- 
ing for  the  development  of  every  avenue  through 
which  They  can  pour  love  and  wisdom  to  enlighten 
the  world  in  this  its  darkest  hour — the  hour  that  pre- 
cedes the  dawn  of  the  coming  day.  In  exact  propor- 
tion to  the  true  Soul-desire  for  light,  and  the  practical 
effort  toward  the  purification  and  sanctification  of  the 
instrument,  will  you  become  "a  center  through  which 
the  Lodge  can  work."  "Blessed  are  they  who  hunger 
and  thirst  after  righteousness,  for  they  shall  be  filled." 
Meditate  upon  The  Prayer  of  Devotion}-  Study  it 
line  by  line  and  word  by  word  until  you  get  a  realiza- 
tion of  its  meaning. 

May  2nd,  1908. 

"Please  tell  me  what  you  mean  by  the  Shining 
Ones2  you  mentioned  in  your  previous  letter." 

The  Shining  Ones  are  called  by  various  names,  ac- 
cording to  their  seven  degrees  or  divisions,  from  the 
Elohim  and  the  Devas  down  to  the  Nature  Sprites  and 
Elementals.  The  lower  orders  (elementals)  create  the 
forms  of  Nature,  while  the  higher  orders  (Angels)  are 
the  builders  of  man's  higher,  spiritual  body  through 
which  he  must  ultimately  express  his  Higher  Self. 
"They  are  'Gods  the  creatures,'  while  he  (the  Su- 
preme. Ed.)  is  'God  the  Creator9 More 

brilliant  than  flames,  more  rapid  than  the  wind,  and 
they  live  in  love  and  harmony,  mutually  enlightening 
each  other,  feeding  on  bread  and  a  mystic  beverage 
— the  communion  wine  and  water? — surround  as  with 
a  river  of  fire  the  throne  of  the  Lamb,  and  veiling 
their  faces  with  their  wings.  This  throne  of  love  and 
glory  they  leave  only  to  carry  to  the  stars,  the  earth, 
the  kingdoms  and  all  the  sons  of  God,  their  brothers 

1See  Appendix. 
8See    page    109. 


68  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

and  pupils,  in  short,  to  all  creatures  like  themselves,  the 
divine  influence."1 

The  spiritual  or  Nirmanakaya  body  is  the  Fire-body 
that  is  builded  slowly  and  gradually,  cell  by  cell,  by 
each  Soul  throughout  its  incarnations.  It  is  not  some- 
thing attained  at  the  time  of  death  or  at  the  time  of 
triumph,  but  all  along  the  Path.  In  each  body  in- 
formed by  the  Ego  there  are  some  few  atoms,  more 
or  less,  which  have  been  redeemed  by  him,  and  it  is 
these  atoms  (whether  physical,  mental  or  spiritual) 
that  the  Angels — the  Shining  Ones — gather  and  hold 
and  manipulate,  under  karmic  law,  into  the  final  glori- 
fied body  in  which  there  is  no  death,  because  each 
molecule  and  cell  has  been  purified  in  the  fire  and 
redeemed  forever  more.  This  is  "the  Nirmanakaya's 
humble  robe"  in  which  the  Soul  clothes  itself  when  it 
has  taken  the  final  step.  It  is  these  redeemed  atoms 
that  the  Angels  gather,  even  at  the  expense  of  the 
unredeemed. 

May   18th,  1908. 

"I  have  been  in  search  of  my  Higher  Self  or 
the  Cosmic  Consciousness  that  I  have  read  so 
much  about  but  seen  so  little  of  its  manifesta- 
tion by  those  who  make  such  great  claims  of 

having  realized  the  Inner  Light My  last 

experience  has  been  with .who  claims  to 

be  an  Initiate  of  the  Great  White  Lodge,  and  I 
was  under  the  training  of  a  so-called  Master  for 
18  months,  with  the  result  that  my  wife  became  a 

nervous   and  mental  wreck At  present   I 

am  studying  with  Mr of  New  York  but 

his  prices  are  so  high  that  it  nearly  prevents  me 

from  going  any  farther In  my  case   I 

have  paid  out  hundreds  of  dollars  and  given  20 
years  of  time,  and  have  lived  to  the  best  of  my 
understanding  a  pure  and  spiritual  life,  yet  the 
further  and  deeper  I  go  the  darker  seems  to  be 

the  path." 

1  The  Secret  Doctrine,  Blavatsky,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  207. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        69 

You  are  indeed  wandering  round  and  round  the  end- 
less circle  of  existence  seeking  on  the  outer  rim  that 
which  can  only  be  found  within,  at  the  very  germinal 
point  of  the  mundane  egg.  You  cry :  "Lo !  here  !  Lo ! 
there !"  and  are  seeking,  seeking  everywhere,  while  all 
the  time  the  Divine  One  stands  close  to  you  and  with 
outstretched  arms  cries:  "Come  unto  me  and  rest,  O 
thou  weary  and  heavy  laden!" 

You  can  set  it  down  as  a  positive  fact  that  no  Master 
of  Wisdom  ever  did,  ever  will  or  ever  could  advertise 
Himself  or  give  out  spiritual  teachings  at  so  much  per 
lesson.  Nor  is  there  any  such  thing  as  an  Initiate  of 
the  Great  White  Lodge  upon  the  physical-plane  acting 
in  His  physical  body,  and  claiming  to  be  such.  The 
Great  White  Lodge  does  not  work  that  way.  If  there 
were  such  an  Initiate  thus  working  you  would  probably 
never  find  it  out ;  for  He  would  go  about,  like  the 
Master  Jesus,  among  the  sick  and  poor,  and  be  de- 
spised of  men — His  works  alone  proclaiming  Him. 
Neither  can  money  buy  the  gifts  of  God.  You  re- 
member the  rebuke  given  to  Simon  when  he  offered 
money  to  the  disciples  for  those  gifts?  "Thy  money 
perish  with  t'hee,  because  thou  hast  thought  that  the 
gift  of  God  can  be  purchased  with  money.  Thou  hast 
neither  part  nor  lot  in  this  matter,  for  thy  heart  is  not 
right  in  the  sight  of  God."1  No  one  can  claim  to  give 
spiritual  development.  Only  the  Soul  itself  can  earn 
it.  And  how  dare  one  take  money  for  that  which  is 
not  his  to  give  ?  The  very  claim  of  being  able  to  give 
such  gifts  for  money  proclaims  the  impostor. 

Do  not  confuse  The  Order  of  the  15  with  any  such 
claims.  This  Order  is  put  forth  by  the  Lodge  of 
Masters ;  but  we  make  no  personal  claims  as  to  being 

1While  it  is  now  recognized  that  this  saying  is  an  interpolation  made 
by  the  early  church  fathers,  nevertheless  it  illustrates  the  point.— Ed. 


70  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

Masters,  or  even  Initiates,  or  anything  but  human  be- 
ings who  have  reached  a  point  where  The  Lodge  can 
work  through  us.  This  Order,  being  the  result  of  the 
normal  evolution  of  humanity,  is,  of  necessity,  under 
the  direct  and  special  guidance  of  the  Masters  of  Wis- 
dom from  the  higher  planes.  Its  mission  is  to  awaken 
in  the  minds  of  those  who  are  waiting  and  seeking  for 
light,  a  desire  to  seek  within.  It  is  proposed  to  give 
such  assistance  to  humanity,  through  human  agents 
who  are  willing  to  devote  their  time  and  energy  with- 
out compensation,  as  will  help  all  Souls  who  are  ready 
to  step  onward,  upward  and  inward. 

All  persons  laying  claim  to  being  Masters  of  Wis- 
dom or  Initiates  must,  of  necessity,  come  under  the  law 
governing  such  advanced  Beings.  And  at  the  very 
Threshold  of  Initiation  they  must  be  confronted  with 
the  sacrifice  of  all  personal  ambitions  and  worldly 
preferments ;  for  these  must  be  given  up  ere  victory 
can  be  won.  "Ye  cannot  serve  God  and  mammon" 
was  spoken  directly  to  neophytes  seeking  Initiation, 
and  was  not  given  to  the  general  run  of  mankind. 
The  law  is  imperative  and  inviolable ;  once  having 
renounced  all  worldly  honor  as  the  price  of  the  power 
to  be  won,  they  cannot,  if  they  would,  demand  a  money 
price  for  their  services ;  for  that  would  at  once  put 
them  outside  The  Lodge  force,  and  no  gifts  would  be 
theirs  to  impart.  "Freely  ye  have  received,  freely 
give"  was  another  direction  given  by  the  Master  Jesus 
to  His  immediate  disciples  who  were  candidates  for 
Initiation,  and  it  applies  to  all.  The  gifts  of  God  are 
free,  and  are  given  only  to  the  sincere  seeker,  the  Law 
of  Compensation  demanding  as  a  price  that  he  shall 
freely  give,  i.  e.,  to  give  (not  pay)  to  others  of  his 
time,  love,  sympathy,  money — of  all  he  has — to  spread 
the  good  tidings;  never  to  enrich  one  person  who 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        71 

claims  all  power.  If,  after  the  solemn  services  and 
obligations  of  Initiation,  a  neophyte  should  take  pay 
for  what  is  not  his  to  give  (for  at  most  he  is  but  an 
agent — a  transmitter  of  the  gifts  of  God  entrusted  to 
him  to  distribute)  he  becomes  a  deserter  and  a  repro- 
bate. All  that  any  agent  dare  claim  is  just  compen- 
sation for  money  expended,  or  to  be  the  custodian  of 
money  given  for  the  spread  of  the  work. 

The  sad  condition  of  your  wife  is,  unfortunately,  a 
very  common  result  of  this  serving  of  Mammon — the 
Beast  spoken  of  in  Revelation — under  the  name  of 
the  anti-Christ ;  for  that  is  what  it  is  to  demand  pay  for 
spiritual  gifts.  While  most  students  accept  the  fact 
that  the  Beast  is  the  money  power,  yet  there  is  a  failure 
to  realize  things  literally,  especially  the  fact  that  the 
Revelation  of  St.  John  was  a  true  prophecy1  which  in 
this  day  is  being  fulfilled.  If  this  is  true,  then,  surely, 
it  is  well  to  take  to  heart  the  message  of  the  third 
Angel  who  cried  with  a  loud  voice :  "If  any  man  wor- 
ship the  Beast  and  his  image  and  receive  his  mark  in 
his  forehead  or  in  his  hand,  the  same  shall  drink  of 
the  wine  of  the  wrath  of  God."  To  worship  the  Beast, 
however,  does  not  mean  that  we  are  not  to  give  money 
its  proper  place ;  we  worship  it  by  exalting  it  above  all 
else.  In  the  present  state  of  the  world,  i.  e.,  during 
the  reign  of  the  Beast,  we  must,  of  necessity,  use  the 
coin  of  the  realm,  yet  we — especially  such  as  claim  to 
be  the  spiritual  guides  and  teachers  of  others — must  be 
very  careful  not  to  have  the  mark  of  the  Beast  on  our 
hands  or  foreheads. 

The  lesson  of  your  wife's  affliction  is  that  all  forced 
development — and  all  is  forced  that  is  being  supposedly 
given  at  so  much  per  lesson — is  like  forcibly  tearing 

1  Alt  ho  copied  almost  bodily  from  the  Book  of  Enoch,  which  in  turn 
was  but  a  transcript  from  far  older  texts. — Ed. 


72  Letters  From  tJie  Teacher 

open  a  rose-bud.  The  more  sensitive  and  highly  at- 
tuned the  one  receiving  such  treatment,  the  more  dire 
the  results.  No  growth  is  normal  or  lasting  except 
that  which  follows  the  law  of  natural  growth — "He 
that  doeth  the  will  of  the  Father/'  We  will  do  all 
that  is  possible  to  help  your  wife ;  but  again  we  must 
warn  you  that,  as  it  has  been  the  result  of  abnormal 
conditions,  her  return  to  health  must  be  slow  and  must 
follow  the  line  of  natural  spiritual  growth  and  develop- 
ment. 

Feb.  12th,  1908. 

"I  have  just  finished  reading  a  book  entitled 
The    Crucifixion'    which    refutes    the    death    of 

Christ  while  on  the  cross What  do  you 

think  of  it?" 

The  book  about  which  you  ask  may,  or  may  not,  be 
true;  but  it  makes  very  little  difference,  as  far  as  the 
truth  of  His  teachings  is  concerned,  whether  or  not 
such  a  man  as  Jesus  ever  lived.  As  a  matter  of  his- 
tory, there  was  a  high  Initiate  of  that  name  who  did 
pass  through  the  experiences  symbolized  in  the  Bible 
during  the  pilgrimage  of  His  Soul  toward  mastery, 
just  as  every  Soul  must  pass  that  way.  But  the  whole 
story,  as  it  is  told,  is  one  grand  allegory1  designed  to 
teach,  exoterically,  the  inner  truths  of  the  different 
steps  on  the  Path.  Each  step  has  its  trials  and  suf- 
ferings, its  mockery  of  the  multitude  and  the  final 
crucifixion  of  the  lower  personality  on  the  cross,2  and 
the  glorious  resurrection  into  life  immortal — the  tri- 
umph of  the  spiritual  over  the  temporal  man.  The 
story  is  woven  around  this  Initiate,  Jesus,  and  events 
and  places  are  adapted  or  created  to  carry  out  the 
symbology ;  but  every  name  used,  as  well  as  every  in- 

1  See  lesson  Concerning  the  Doctrine  of  Hell-Fire,  in  The  Voice  of 
7-ji.y,  Curtiss,  Chapter  V. 

*bee  lesson  The  Meaning  of  the  Cross. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        73 

cident,  has  its  inner  meaning  when  interpreted  kabal- 
istically.  This  is  the  style  after  which  all  scriptures  are 
written,  i.  e.,  the  Vedas,  Upanishads,  etc.  It  is  the 
method  always  adopted  by  Initiates  in  giving  out  the 
great  truths  so  that  only  those  who  have  developed  the 
qualities  necessary  to  the  true  understanding  can  see 
the  inner  meaning.  The  multitude  see  the  beautiful 
story,  which  always  contains  a  sound  moral  lesson,  and 
each  one  gets  from  it  exactly  what  he  is  ready  to  re- 
ceive. The  man  Jesus  may  never  have  died  upon  a 
cross,  in  fact  He  may  have  lived  to  an  advanced  age 
and  have  laid  down  the  earth  life  when  He  was  ready 
to  enter  the  higher ;  but  it  makes  little  difference  either 
way,  for  it  is  His  teachings  that  count.  And  they  re- 
main today  the  most  beautiful  ever  given  to  man. 
Some  day,  perhaps,  we  will  be  given  His  actual  his- 
tory as  a  man;  but  it  is  of  little  moment.  Take  the 
lesson  intended  by  the  allegory  and  "live  the  life." 

May  30th,  1908. 

"I  am  much  interested  to  know  just  why  the 
Master  of  the  Order  could  not  tell  me  more  about 
the  psychical  experience  to  which  I  referred  in 

my  last  letter I  confess  that  I  sent  the 

question  to  you  partly  as  a  test  and  partly  be- 
because  I  would  really  be  grateful  for  more  in- 
formation regarding  the  experience." 

If  it  were  desirable  to  give  a  mediumistic  "test"  it 
could  easily  be  done,  even  without  the  overshadowing 
of  the  Master.  This,  however,  is  far  from  the  idea  of 
this  Movement.  The  Order  of  the  15  is  put  forth  to 
feed  the  heart-hunger,  to  assist  the  weary  Soul  to  en- 
lightenment and  to  help  to  a  better  understanding  all 
who  are  looking  for  love  and  sympathy  and  help.  The 
Master  knows  very  well  what  the  lesson  was  that  was 
given  to  you  by  the  experience  of  which  you  speak; 


74  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

but  no  one  except  yourself  can  know  the  exact  inter- 
pretation you  have  given  to  it  unless  it  is  filched  from 
your  mind  by  a  mediumistic  trick.  Until  you  give  your 
version,  in  a  heartfelt  desire  to  obtain  help  in  under- 
standing the  lesson,  the  Master  cannot  help  you.  In 
fact,  if  you  are  satisfied  that  you  have  gotten  it  straight 
and  that  there  is  no  more  to  it  and  only  ask  as  a  "test," 
then  there  is  no  need  to  help  you ;  you  do  not  want  it 
and  the  lesson  given  has  failed. 

April  llth,  1908. 

"I  have  a  brother  who  disappeared  about  1898 
and  has  never  been  positively  heard  from  since 

then Is  it  within  your  power  or  right  to 

help  me  find  him  if  alive,  and  reunite  him  to  his 
sisters?" 

As  to  your  brother's  whereabouts,  this  cannot  be 
revealed  to  you  at  the  present  time.  It  is  not  expe- 
dient for  the  Masters  to  interfere  with  the  personal 
Karma  of  any  individual.  He  must  be  permitted  to 
work  out  his  problems  in  his  own  way.  But  while  he 
is  working  them  out  he  is  guided  and  helped,  and  ad- 
vantage is  taken  of  every  opening  that  will  aid  him  in 
learning  his  lessons.  This  does  not  mean  that  you  are 
not  to  do  your  best  to  find  and  help  him;  but  when 
you  have  done  your  best  leave  the  rest  in  the  hands 
of  your  Father-in-heaven. 

Feb.  21st,  1908. 

"I'm  in  some  doubt  as  to  whether  I  belong  to 
the  sheep  or  goats,  but  as  your  circular  is  'to 
those  who  truly  desire  to  progress'  I  may  classify 

myself  in  that  category From  my  many 

occult  experiences  the  conviction  was  forced  upon 
me  that  humanity  as  a  whole  is  practically  under 

hypnotic  control At  one  time  I  thought 

that  those  Deities  who  are  the  most  intimately 
related  to  the  evolution  of  every  ego,  yet  who 
have  the  power  to  flout  discovery  of  Themselves. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        75 

did  not  know  Their  business  as  well  as  I ! ! !  I  was 
given  great  truths  but  was  told  that  the  time  was 
not  ripe  for  their  publication.  I  insisted  neverthe- 
less that  I  would  tell  what  I  had  perceived.  My 
article  was  put  in  type,  but  in  some  way  they 
neglected  to  let  me  read  the  proof.  When  I  saw 
the  article  in  print  words  were  misspelled  or  pied 
and  lines  transposed  so  that  it  was  impossible  for 
anyone  to  guess  what  I  meant  to  say.  Those 
Deities,  Beings,  Adepts  had  verified  my  concep- 
tion of  Their  power,  and  at  the  same  time  effect- 
ually blocked  my  effort  to  disclose  Their  identity." 

It  makes  very  little  difference  whether  or  not  you 
belong  to  the  sheep  or  the  goats.  Each  has  his  own 
place  and  his  own  work.  One  makes  good  mutton, 
while  the  other  affords  a  grand  lesson  in  fortitude,  con- 
tentment with  whatever  food  comes  along  and  a  main- 
tenance of  a  persevering  determination  to  climb  to  the 
very  top  and  surmount  every  difficulty. 

There  is  much  still  for  you  to  learn,  and  there  is  no 
one  more  in  need  of  careful  training  and  guidance  than 
one  who  has  found  entrance  to  the  inner  planes  while 
still  unable  to  fully  grasp  and  correlate  the  teachings 
received.  Especially  is  this  true  of  one  who,  in  his 
great  desire  to  give  out  to  the  world  that  which  fills 
him  with  ecstasy,  is  yet  impatient  of  restraint,  and  who 
lacks  the  ability  to  classify  to  such  an  extent  that  the 
results  would  do  more  harm  to  humanity  than  good. 
For  instance,  your  surmise  that  humanity  is  under 
hypnotic  control,  if  given  out  to  the  world,  would  be 
a  death  blow  to  progress  and  would  stultify  all  effort 
to  conquer  on  the  part  of  all  who  accepted  it.  When 
you  are  able  to  see  farther  you  will  understand  why. 
In  the  present  condition  of  humanity,  at  a  superficial 
glance,  it  might  look  as  though  they  were  but  a  mass 
of  puppets  moved  by  wires  manipulated  by  those  on 


76  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

other  planes ;  but  this  is  only  the  result  of  man's  long 
continued  refusal  to  live  up  to  his  real  possibilities  and 
his  consequent  loss  of  certain  powers.  Behind  it  is  the 
grand  truth  of  free-will.  But,  alas,  man  himself  has 
erected  barriers,  has  subordinated  his  powers  and  de- 
based his  understanding  and  given  over  control  of  both 
his  mind  and  his  actions  to  entities  who  must,  through 
karmic  right,  hold  the  reins  until  man  once  more 
awakens  to  his  Divine  heritage  and  once  more  takes  the 

guidance  upon  himself. 

Do  you  not  have  faith  enough  to  believe  that  those 
Masters  who  have  devoted  Their  all  to  the  advance- 
ment of  humanity  know,  better  than  your  finite  mind 
could  possibly  comprehend,  what  will  benefit  humanity 
most  ?  And  what,  by  being  trampled  in  the  mire,  will 
but  add  to  the  karmic  burden  of  humanity  ?  Your  at- 
titude of  desiring  to  rush  into  print  with  what  is  given 
you  personally  is  as  foolish  as  if  you  insisted  on  feed- 
ing a  fever  patient  with  a  newly  discovered  food  when 
the  doctors  told  you  not  to. 

May  8th,  1908. 

''When  I  said  the  human  kingdom  overlapped 
the  animal  kingdom  through  the  anthropoid  ape 
there  was  no  connection  in  my  mind  with  any  of 
the  degrees  of  The  Lodge.  Will  you  please  ex- 
plain?" 

The  anthropoid  ape,  being  the  degenerate  offspring 
of  man — the  result  of  his  cohabitation  with  antedilu- 
vian (Atlantean)  monsters — has  in  it  the  spark  of 
Manas,  and  hence  belongs,  to  that  extent,  to  the  hu- 
man kingdom.  Therefore,  it  must  be  under  the  direct 
guidance  of  the  7th  degree  of  The  Lodge  during  its 
"evolution ;  for  no  entity  can  obtain  mastery  and  final 
liberation  until  all  the  atoms  for  whose  expression  he 
is  responsible,  have  been  redeemed.  This  includes  all 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        77 

the  atoms  thrown  off  from  all  his  various  bodies  during 
all  his  incarnations,  as  well  as  all  the  entities  he  has 
created  either  with  his  physical  creative  force  or  by  the 
creative  power  of  thought.  It  is  only  then  that  he 
has  finished  his  "cycle  of  necessity." 

When  a  Great  Soul  reaches  the  Threshold  of  Mas- 
tery he  realizes  that  he  is  mysteriously  connected  with 
and  responsible  for  a  host  of  entities  in  almost  every 
stage  of  development  on  all  the  lower  planes.  Hence 
the  septenary  division  of  the  work  of  The  Lodge  into 
degrees  and  sub-degrees,  each  under  the  guidance  of 
certain  Masters,  so  that  all  may  be  cared  for  and  helped 
in  exact  justice.  It  is  very  like  a  school  divided  into 
grades,  and  each  grade  into  classes,  each  under  a  dif- 
ferent teacher,  yet  all  subject  to  the  Principal,  and  he 
in  turn  to  the  Commissioner  of  Education. 

April  29th,  1908. 
"I  have  been  given  some  duties  to  perform  in 

the  way  of  exercises  given  out  by  Master 

which  I  cannot  perform  as  I  would  owing  to 
too  much  work  for  others.  The  chase  for  bread 
and  butter  is  so  great  that  it  takes  nearly  all 
my  time.  I  have  to  work  from  10  to  14  hours  a 
day  in  a  saw-mill  and  you  can  see  that  it  keeps  me 
'goin'  some.' " 

We  note  what  you  say  about  performing  exercises, 
but  think  you  must  have  made  some  mistake  as  to  their 
source ;  for  no  Master  would  ever  give  to  a  pupil  exer- 
cises of  a  physical  nature  that  would  be  likely  to  over- 
tax his  capacity.  You  can  readily  understand  that  such 
exercises  cannot  be  given  out  in  a  general  way,  but 
each  lesson  must  be  adapted  to  the  personal  develop- 
ment of  the  student,  thus  they  would  not  be  such  as  to 
overtax  his  capacity  for  performance.  The  Masters  of 
Wisdom  know  well  the  physical  conditions  as  well  as 


78  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

the  spiritual  development  of  each  pupil,  and  the  Law 
of  Growth  is  always  followed;  each  pupil  must  learn 
to  correlate  with  his  special  environment. 

Anything  that  would  tend  to  retard  or  prevent  you 
from  doing  your  plain  duty  in  that  condition  and  posi- 
ti^n  in  life  in  which  the  great  Law  of  Karma  has 
placed  you,  would  be  a  serious  setback  to  your  spiritual 
development  and  hence  such  directions  would  never  be 
given  by  a  Master  of  Wisdom.  We  can  never  conquer 
a  thing  until  we  have  worked  it  out,  and  to  take  up 
Yogi  exercises  when  your  strength  is  fully  taxed  to 
perform  your  necessary  physical  labor  is  to  crowd  out 
something  which  should  come  first — something  which 
lies  nearer.  People  often  make  the  mistake  of  saying 
that  some  Master  requires  a  certain  thing  of  them 
when,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  they  have  never  received 
any  direct,  personal  instructions  from  a  Master.  You 
can  apply  this  test  to  instructions  received  from  any 
source:  Are  they  reasonable?  are  they  just?  are  they 
right?  Directions  for  physical  exercises  are  never 
given  by  a  Master  of  Wisdom  except  in  a  personal  way, 
and  in  such  a  case  they  would  be  adapted  to  that  pupil's 
ability  and  capacity,  and  to  that  pupil  alone. 

May  19th,   1908. 

"I  am  pleased  with  the  titles  Teachers,  Guides, 
Elder  Brothers,  but  the  title  'Masters'  grates  on 
my  nerves.  I  long  to  see  this  world  without  a 
master  or  a  slave  in  it." 

We  understand  and  appreciate  your  attitude.  You 
are  suffering  from  a  very  common,  and  a  very  natural, 
misunderstanding  of  the  term  mentioned  owing  to  the 
common  use  and  abuse  of  the  word  Master  by  many 
so-called  followers  of  the  Wisdom-Religion.  Jesus, 
who  was  the  greatest  Initiate  (Master)  the  world  has 
ever  known,  said :  "One  is  your  master  even  Christ ; 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work       79 

and  all  ye  arc  brethren.  Neither  be  ye  called  masters ; 
for  one  is  your  master  even  Christ."  When  the  expres- 
sion "Masters  of  Wisdom"  is  used,  reference  is  had  to 
this  very  thing.  Masters  are  Beings  who,  through 
much  travail  of  Soul,  have  attained  The  Christ  center 
where  The  Christ  has  regained  His  rightful  place  as 
Master  of  all  the  forces,  molecules  and  powers  that 
compose  mortal  bodies — physical,  astral  and  mental — 
The  Christ  in  command  is  the  Master. 

It  is  erroneous  to  use  the  expression  "my  Master" 
or  "your  Master,"  for,  as  Jesus  pointed  out,  no  man 
can  be  your  master.  When  you  have  gained  mastery 
over  the  kingdom  given  to  you  yourself,  with  its 
sheaths  or  bodies,  by  your  Father,  then  do  you  be- 
come a  Master.  Again,  Jesus  said,  "Ye  have  been 
faithful  over  a  few  things,  (i.  e.  your  emotions,  words, 
acts,  etc.)  behold  I  (The  Christ)  will  make  you  ruler 
(Master)  over  many."  Think  this  matter  over.  Medi- 
tate especially  upon  the  text  given  that  "All  ye  are 
brethren."  You  have  recognized  the  point  to  which 
humanity  has  struggled  and  should  have  faith  to  know 
that  whenever  such  a  point  is  reached  an  effort  is  made 
to  bring  back  the  disobedient  wanderers  to  the  true 
center ;  to  prepare  at  least  a  few  who  will  and  can  rec- 
ognize the  necessity  for  the  coming  of  a  direct  Savior 
or  Avatar — a  perfected  Soul  such  as  the  Master  Jesus. 
This  has  never  yet  failed  in  the  history  of  the  world, 
and,  as  you  say,  conditions  are  ripe  at  the  present  time 
for  such  another  coming.  Think  you  that  there  will 
now  be  the  first  failure?  The  cry  of  every  sincere 
heart  for  light  and  upliftment  shall  be  answered,  and 
at  the  present  time  the  cry  from  many,  many  hearts  is 
calling  continually,  day  and  night :  "How  long,  O 
Lord?  How  long?"  And  the  answer  comes :  "While 
they  are  yet  speaking,  I  will  hear." 


80  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

June  1st,  1908. 

"If  the  Persian  teacher  called  The  Bab  is  a 
Master  why  does  he  not  teach  Reincarnation  and 
Karma?" 

The  Bab1  is  a  very  high  Master.  In  fact  he  is  an 
Emanation  or  Personification  of  the  coming  Avatar  or 
World  Savior.  That  is,  the  mortal  body  of  a  Persian 
youth  has  been  over-shadowed  and  informed  by  The 
Christos  to  such  a  degree  that  it  manifests  The  Christ. 
Such  a  manifestation,  however,  must,  of  necessity,  work 
through  a  physical  body  sufficiently  purified,  and  a 
brain  sufficiently  trained  to  become  an  instrument 
through  which  The  Christ  can  work  to  an  exceptional 
degree.  The  Bab  is  a  Persian,  with  all  the  national 
leadings  and  tendencies  that  appeal  to  that  race,  who 
has  been  especially  prepared  to  be  an  instrument 
through  which  The  Christ  can  come  to  the  Mohamme- 
dans. It  is  a  case  of  Avesha  Avatara,  the  overshad- 
owing and  informing  of  the  lesser  by  the  greater.  As 
one  writer  says :  "In  the  Avesha  Avatara  a  pure  vessel 
is  chosen,  not  necessarily  a  mukta  yogi  (a  liberated 
man),  and  the  Divine  Life  utilizes  the  Man  thus  quali- 
fied, for  a  limited  period  and  for  a  particular  purpose 
Generally,  for  a  life  time,  the  Divine  In- 
fluence continues  to  shine  through  the  purified  vessel 
and,  to  all  appearances,  as  in  reality  it  is,  the  human 
nature  of  the  man  is  submerged  by  the  overflowing 
Divine  Life."2  In  such  cases  nothing  of  the  individ- 
uality is  lost ;  it  is  the  personality  plus  the  higher  prin- 
ciples of  some  Great  Teacher,  or  say  of  The  Christ. 
Such  overshadowing  is  by  no  means  as  rare  as  may 
be  supposed,  the  difference  being  in  the  advancement 

JThe  term  Bab,  as  herein  used,  refers  to  the  great  Master  on  the 
higher  planes  who  overshadowed  the  three  human  personalities — the  Bab, 
Baha'u'llah,  Abdul  Baha— not  the  Bab  alone. 

*  Studies  in  The  Bhagavad  Gita,   III  series,  p.    130. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        81 

of  the  overshadowing,  or,  we  might  say,  incarnating 
Teacher,  who,  in  all  such  cases,  projects  His  higher 
principles  (Atma,  Buddhi,  Manas)  into,  or  grafts  them 
upon,  the  individuality  of  the  disciple  who,  through  his 
own  choice  and  purity  of  life,  has  prepared  a  mentality 
and  a  personality  capable  of  expressing  the  Great  Soul 
who  descends  thus  to  help  humanity. 

As  to  the  Bab's  teaching  Reincarnation  and  Karma, 
it  is  given  to  every  Great  Teacher  to  use  His  own  judg- 
ment as  to  the  amount  and  the  method  of  giving  out 
the  Divine  Teachings.  Also,  being  a  Persian,  the 
brain-mind  of  the  personality  or  instrument  used  does 
not  respond  to  the  truths  mentioned  and  does  not  make 
them  a  reality,  as  would  be  the  case  with  a  disciple  who 
had  been  trained  in  that  line  of  thought.  The  Teacher 
overshadowing  the  Bab  does  not  think  the  Persians,  or 
rather  the  Mohammedans  in  general,  are  ready  for  the 
teaching  of  Reincarnation.  And  when  you  think  of 
the  materialism  of  the  Mohammedans  you  will  not  won- 
der at  this  decision ;  for  such  a  teaching  would  be  too 
great  a  jump  from  their  previous  race-training  and 
habits  of  thought  and  would  tend  to  confuse  instead 
of  to  unify  them.  Therefore  that  Teacher  teaches 
such  ethics  of  life  as  will  prepare  them  to  overcome 
their  Karma  and  be  ready  for  Reincarnation.  He 
teaches  immortality,  but  does  not  specify.  Perhaps 
some  of  his  followers  may  be  led  to  deny  Reincarna- 
tion, because  it  is  not  found  in  his  teachings;  but  the 
Bab  himself  does  not  deny  it ;  he  simply  does  not  realize 
it  because  the  overshadowing  entity  ignores  it,  think- 
ing that  his  children  are  not  yet  ready  for  it  and  that, 
if  they  follow  his  teachings  and  make  their  lives  con- 
form to  them,  Reincarnation  will  take  care  of 
itself.  No  one  is  ready  to  learn  Reincarnation  to  whom 


82  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

it  does  not  appeal.  Only  those  who  feel  an  inward 
urge  to  know  the  whole  truth  need  have  it  given  them. 
The  Bab  is  giving  the  Mohammedans  all  they  can  grasp 
and  live  up  to. 

The  Bab  is  not  a  direct  Avatar  or  World  Savior,  but 
is  the  Savior  for  the  Mohammedans.  Those  of  the 
Western  world  who  feel  especially  drawn  to  his  teach- 
ings are  probably  reincarnated  Mohammedans  and 
naturally  come  under  his  magnetic  influence. 

Each  sub-race  has  a  direct  Avatar  who  embodies  the 
highest  ideals  of  that  sub-race.  The  Avatar  is  always 
in  advance  of  the  sub-race  to  which  He  comes,  being 
the  highest  type  to  which  the  sub-race,  as  a  sub-race, 
can  evolve.  The  coming  Avatar  for  the  new  sub-race 
(the  sixth),  now  evolving  in  the  Western  hemisphere, 
will  represent  the  highest  nossibilities  of  the  sixth  sub- 
race  humanity,  and  His  teachings  will  embrace  all  to 
which  it  is  possible  for  the  new  sub-race  to  evolve. 
Each  Avatar  must  have  prepared  for  Him,  and  must 
overshadow,  inhabit  and  work  through,  a  body  capable 
of  expressing  all  the  advanced  truths  needed  by  the 
sub-race  to  which  He  comes.  The  characteristic  of 
the  new  sub-race  will  be  a  desire  to  delve  into  the 
deepest  mysteries  of  all  truth,  hence  its  Avatar  must 
be  capable  of  expressing  the  most  advanced  truths 
given  to  any  Race  or  sub-race  thus  far. 

The  fundamental  object  of  The  Order  of  the  75  is 
to  gather  together  and  prepare  those  faithful  Souls 
who  are  ready  to  make  conditions  for  His  manifesta- 
tion possible. 

The  one  rule  must  be  applied  to  all,  namely,  "By 
their  fruits  ye  shall  know  them."  No  one  can  study 
the  pure  teachings  of  the  Bab  or  observe  his  blameless 
life  and  his  Christ-like  influence  and  not  know  that 
he  has  The  Christ  abiding  in  him. 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        83 

"Have  I  reached  that  point  where  I  am  ready 
for  personal  instruction?  Am  I  ready  to  come 
into  personal  touch  with  the  Masters  of  Wisdom? 
What  directions  can  you  give  for  form- 
ing such  contact?" 

The  way  in  which  a  pupil  is  brought  into  personal 
touch  with  the  Masters  of  Wisdom  is  firstly,  as  we 
state  in  our  circulars:  "It  will  be  only  through  your 
own  individual  effort,  your  attitude  of  Soul,  and  the 
character  of  your  life  that  will  enable  you  to  place 
yourself  in  personal,  conscious  touch  with  the  Mas- 
ters. It  depends  upon  no  personality  but  your  own." 
And  secondly,  until  this  conscious  touch  has  been 
made,  you  may  come  into  personal  touch  by  corre- 
spondence with  the  Order.  For  whenever  a  pupil 
writes,  in  singleness  of  purpose  and  with  a  heart-cry 
for  help  and  enlightenment,  the  letter  sent  him  in 
reply  is  dictated  by  a  Master  of  Wisdom.  Often  the 
application  of  the  letter  thus  transmitted  is  not  under- 
stood by  the  agents,  for  they  may  not  understand  the 
circumstances  of  the  pupil,  but,  nevertheless,  the  pupil 
can  see  the  application  of  the  message.  Often,  too, 
the  letters  are  beyond  the  full  comprehension  of  the 
pupil  unless  he  studies  and  meditates  upon  them.  That 
is,  the  intuition  of  the  pupil  is  not  sufficiently  awak- 
ened to  perceive  under  the  words  the  answer  to  his 
real  need.  And  since,  as  it  frequently  happens,  the 
pupil  has  his  own  ideas  of  what  he  needs,  while  the 
Master  takes  quite  a  different  view  of  the  situation, 
it  is,  in  reality,  a  severe  test  to  the  pupil  and  he  often 
fails  to  pass  it,  being  unable  to  recognize  the  Master's 
words.  Thus  the  pupil  wonders  why  he  has' not  come 
into  personal  touch,  as  he  understands  it,  and  perhaps 
accuses  the  Order  of  misrepresentation.  But  there  is 
no  claim  made  in  the  letters  that  they  are  dictated  by 


84  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

a  Master  of  Wisdom.  They  are  signed  by  the  Sec- 
retary who  says  that  he  is  "directed  by  the  Teacher  of 
the  Order  to  say,"  leaving  it  to  the  pupil  to  accept  it 
as  from  a  Master  or  from  the  human  brain  of  the 
Secretary,  as  his  intuition  directs. 

If,  however,  the  pupil  recognizes  something  more 
than  mere  human  wisdom  in  the  letters  and  welcomes 
the  Master's  words,  it  is  seldom  long  ere  he  or  she  is 
in  interior,  personal  communication  with  the  Master 
who  dictated  the  letter.  Indeed,  many  of  the  more 
advanced  pupils  receive  the  answers  to  their  questions 
before  they  have  finished  writing  them  to  the  Secretary 
and  the  latter's  letter  merely  confirms  what  they  had 
received  interiorly 

You  are  ready  for  personal  help  when  you  can  recog- 
nize and  accept  the  instruction  when  it  comes.  Such 
personal  help  cannot  be  withheld  when  the  demand  is 
made ;  but  it  never  flatters  the  pupil.  On  this  account 
the  pupil  often  thinks  that  the  Master  does  not  appre- 
ciate him  at  his  true  worth,  that  is,  at  his  own  estima- 
tion of  himself;  for  the  Master  gives  what  is  most 
needed  rather  than  what  is  most  wanted 

As  to  directions  for  forming  such  interior  contact, 
my  son,  there  are  no  directions  that  anyone  could  give 
you  unless  your  own  intuition  can  speak.  If  you  have 
formed  a  conception  of  a  mysterious  interview  with 
some  wonderful  Being  whose  presence  will  send  thrills 
down  your  spine  and  who  will  confer  upon  you  some 
mysterious  power  that  you  can  carry  with  you  hence- 
forth and  proclaim  to  the  world  "I  am  holier  than  thou, 
for  I  have  met  the  Master,"  then  we  say,  most  em- 
phatically, that  all  the  force  and  power  of  the  great 
Lodge  of  Masters  would  be  set  in  motion  to  prevent 
such  a  catastrophe.  Such  a  thing  has  never  occurred, 
and  never  will  occur. . 


The  Masters  of  Wisdom  and  Their  Work        85 

The  whole  thing,  in  a  nut-shell,  is  that  no  pupil  is 
left  without  the  help  and  instruction  needed  for  his 
advance.  At  certain  stages,  life  alone  can  give  you 
this;  in  other  cases  there  are  books  and  earthly  teach- 
ers who  can  give  the  Soul  all  that  it  needs  for  a  cer- 
tain step  in  its  growth.  But  when  the  pupil  has  culled 
all  the  lessons  to  be  learned  in  these  ways;  when  life 
no  longer  teaches,  because  its  simpler  lessons  have 
been  learned  and  an  interpreter  is  needed  for  its  mys- 
teries ;  when  books  and  earthly  teachings  seem  like  dry 
husks,  and  the  Soul  cries  out  for  more  food,  it  must 
be  fed,  for  this  is  the  Law.  Then  there  begins  to  come 
to  him  something  closer,  generally  as  a  still  small 
voice,  as  a  dream,  vision  or  distinct  impression.  If  he 
listens  and  follows  these  leadings  he  will  find  them 
confirmed  and  work  out  in  his  life  and  become  steps 
on  the  Path,  until,  finally,  he  finds  himself  confronted, 
not  with  a  mysterious  personage,  but  in  close,  familiar 
communion  with  an  Intelligence  whom  he  has  learned 
to  love  and  trust.  Only  when  this  interior  communion 
is  established  can  the  pupil  come  face  to  face  with  his 
Guru.  Of  course  this  will  take  place  upon  the  inner 
planes,  but  long  ere  this  he  will  be  carefully  instructed 
as  to  the  necessary  steps,  the  necessary  cautions  to  be 
observed ;  will  be  told  how  to  recognize  and  treat  false 
teachers  and  false  teachings 

The  requisite  preparation  for  such  close,  personal 
contact  is  a  sincere  and  loving  heart,  a  child-like  con- 
fidence and  trust,  and  a  willingness  to  sit  at  the  Mas- 
ter's feet  and  be  taught,  rather  than  to  afford  an  op- 
portunity for  the  pupil  to  tell  the  Secretary  how  much 
human  wisdom  he  has  obtained.  That  is,  he  must  be 
willing  to  listen  to  and  study  and  meditate  upon  the 
teachings  received,  no  matter  how  hidden  the  meaning 


86 


Letters  From  the  Teacher 


may  at  first  appear  and  no  matter  how  opposed  to  his 
former  ideas  and  conceptions.  All  must  be  carefully 
weighed  and  pondered  and  such  as  appeal  to  the  pupil 
as  true  and  right  accepted,  that  is,  those  that  stand  the 
test  of  the  Law  of  Love  and  Life. . 


PART  III. 
CONCERNING  THE  ORDER  OF  THE  15. 

"For  my  part,  having  given  the  greater  part  of  my 
life  to  the  study  and  analysis  of  facts,  I  would  rather 
be  the  author  of  the  tritest  homily,  or  the  baldest 
poem,  that  inculcated  that  imperishable  essence  of  the 
soul  to  which  I  have  neither  scalpel  nor  probe,  than  be 
the  founder  of  the  subtlest  school,  or  the  framer  of  the 
loftiest  verse,  that  robbed  my  fellow-men  of  their  faith 
in  a  spirit  that  eludes  the  dissecting  knife, — in  a  being 
that  escapes  the  grave-digger." — A  Strange  Story, 
Bulwer-Lytton. 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  15  89 

PART  III. 
CONCERNING  THE  ORDER  OF  THE  15. 

April  9th,  1908. 

"I  note  that  it  is  stated  that  the  Teachers  of 
the  Order  will  remain  hidden.  One  would  natur- 
ally wish  to  know  on  what  authority  the  contem- 
plated teachings,  and  the  predictions  mentioned, 
are  given.  However,  I  suppose  that  the  instruc- 
tion given  will  soon  show  in  itself  its  source.  On 
the  other  hand,  I,  in  common  with  others  to 
whom  I  have  shown  your  circulars,  would  like,  if 
possible,  some  more  definite  information  as  to  the 
organizers  of  this  movement — the  physical-plane 
organizers,  if  the  others  must  remain  hidden." 

We  are  truly  sorry  that  we  cannot  comply  with  your 
request  as  to  the  personality  of  the  organizers  of  this 
Order.  All  we  can  say  is  that  it  is  a  direct  outpour- 
ing of  The  Lodge-force,  and  the  agents  through  whom 
it  is  manifesting  are  of  no  more  importance,  from  the 
standpoint  of  the  teachings,  than  would  be  the  pipe 
through  which  a  stream  of  pure  water  was  led  into 
a  parched  and  thirsty  land.  Those  who  are  athirst 
for  the  living  waters  will  drink;  those  who  are  sat- 
isfied with  that  which  is  at  their  disposal  will  pass  it 
by.  Only  the  thirsty  appreciate  water. 

If  a  history  of  the  personalities  were  set  forth,  with 
photographs,  names,  etc.,  of  what  avail  would  it  be? 
Would  it  make  the  message  any  more  satisfying? 
Would  it  make  truth  any  more  true  ?  Or  would  it,  as 
has  always  happened  heretofore,  tend  to  detract  from 
the  teachings  ?  Those  who  had  a  personal  leaning  to- 
ward the  agent  would  cling  to  the  personality,  excus- 
ing every  eccentricity  and  perhaps  following  some  per- 


90  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

sonal  bias  or  weakness,  and  would  waste  many  words 
and  much  force  in  defending  such  a  personality.  Such 
an  attitude  has  heretofore  put  many  temptations  in  the 
path  of  agents,  and  has  even  made  them  unfit  instru- 
ments for  The  Lodge  to  use.  On  the  other  hand,  all 
who  did  not  altogether  admire  the  personality  of  the 
agent  would  have  a  target  at  which  to  throw  stones. 
To  them  all  the  teachings  would  be  tainted  by  the  per- 
sonality of  the  agent.  This,  and  much  more,  has  been 
the  sad  experience  of  all  past  attempts  to  give  out  The 
Lodge  teachings.  Humanity  has  proved,  most  con- 
clusively, that  it  is  not  yet  ready  to  be  trusted  with 
a  knowledge  of  the  personality  of  the  agent.  There- 
fore, in  sorrow,  the  Masters  of  Wisdom  have  taken 
away  from  them  the  gift  which,  like  children,  they 
have  shown  their  utter  inability  to  appreciate.  The 
Karma  ignorantly  incurred  in  the  past  by  the  treat- 
ment of  former  agents  of  The  Lodge  is  to  be  spared 
humanity  this  time.  As  each  individual  grows  into 
touch  with  this  work  on  the  soul-plane,  and  displays 
a  right  appreciation  of  the  sacrifice  made  by  such 
agents,  and  ability  to  judge  the  matter  impartially  and 
apart  from  personality,  the  knowledge  may  be  given 
them. 

You  are  quite  right  in  thinking  that  the  teachings 
are  themselves  their  own  authority,  for  if  they  did  not 
indicate  their  source  no  amount  of  specious  claiming 
on  the  part  of  the  agents  would  avail.  "If  this  work 
be  of  men,  it  will  come  to  naught ;  but  if  it  be  of  God, 
ye  cannot  overthrow  it;  lest  haply  ye  be  found  even 
to  fight  against  God." 

At  present  we  can  only  say  that  this  Movement  is 
a  modern  prophet  without  the  walls  of  the  city,  cry- 
ing, "Prepare  ye  the  way  of  the  Lord,  make  his  paths 
straight."  It  is  a  modern  "Voice  of  one  crying  in  the 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  15  91 

wilderness,  Repent  ye:  for  the  kingdom  of  heaven  is 
at  hand."  If  that  voice  finds  an  echo  in  your  heart 
follow  it;  if  not,  go  your  way  in  peace,  for  your  time 
is  not  yet  come.  June  gth>  ^ 

"I  note  what  you  say  about  organizations.  I 
am  so  glad  we  can  be  in  The  Order  of  the  15 
without  being  buried  within  its  folds ;  that  we  can 
have  its  air  and  its  vibrations  yet  be  free.  O, 
that  word  free  means  so  much  to  me !" 

All  real  cosmic  Orders  will  aid  toward  the  indivi- 
dualization  of  freedom.  Anything  which  engulfs  you 
and  smothers  out  all  natural  growth  must  be  unnat- 
ural, hence  of  man.  God  works  always  on  broad  lines 
leading  to  freedom.  The  true  lesson  of  universal 
brotherhood  and  freedom  and  the  oneness  of  all  crea- 
tion can  never  be  learned  except  as  Nature  demon- 
strates the  lesson,  i.  e.,  each  growing  thing  after  its 
own  kind  without  interference,  yet  each  and  all  at- 
taining perfection  through  the  same  forces — sun,  air, 
earth  and  water.  The  oak  and  the  violet  at  its  root, 
each  from  the  selfsame  soil,  and  in  the  same  environ- 
ment, attain  to  an  individualized  perfection ;  each  adds 
its  quota  to  the  one  perfect  picture.  And  the  oak  does 
not  continually  reproach  the  violet  because  it  does  not 
try  to  be  an  oak.  The  Japanese,  through  so-called 
"art,"  can  so  dwarf  and  pervert  Nature  that  the  oak 
can  grow  in  a  pot  no  larger  than  that  required  for  the 
violet,  and  this  is  what  many  man-made  movements 
are  attempting  to  do  with  the  human  oak. 

April  27th,  1908. 

"I  am  a  Theosophist  and  would  like  further  in- 
formation regarding  your  Order." 

Many  sincere  Theosophists  have  questioned  our 
Movement  by  asking  why,  since  it  comes  direct  from 
The  Lodge,  it  is  not  given  out  through  the  already 


92  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

established  channels.  We  do  not  desire  to  have  it  un- 
derstood that  the  formation  of  this  new  channel  is  a 
reflection  upon  or  a  criticism  of  those  organizations ; 
for  they  all  have  their  particular  work.  The  work  of 
this  Order,  however,  is  something  quite  different,  i.  e., 
the  interpretation  of  the  teachings  of  the  Master  Jesus 
and  the  giving  of  the  help  required  by  each  Soul  after 
it  has  reached  a  certain  point  of  development  where 
the  teachings  given  out  to  the  mass  of  students  as  a 
whole  no  longer  meet  its  needs.  This  cannot  be  done 
by  organizations  that  are  bound  by  general  rules ;  for 
their  fundamental  principle  is  that  all  must  fare  alike 
and  take  such  general  instructions  as  can  be  given 
without  regard  to  the  needs  of  individual  pupils.  If 
you  will  carefully  study  the  lesson  on  Degrees  and 
Orders1  you  will  understand  why  such  laws  and  rules 
are  necessary  for  such  organizations,  and  from  their 
standpoint,  are  right  and  proper.  They  must  follow 
their  instructions  from  The  Lodge ;  for  those  are  laws 
given  to  all  organizations  working  on  the  negative  side 
of  the  cross.  Hence  they  must  follow  the  negative 
law,  i.  e.,  advance  can  only  be  made  collectively  and 
all  must  fare  alike  as  to  instruction.  The  Order  of  the 
75,  however,  as  you  will  see  from  that  lesson,  is  on 
the  positive  side  of  the  cross,  and  is  put  forth  to  aid 
those  who  need  personal  instruction;  those  who  have 
reached  a  point  where  they  can  come  into  personal 
touch  with  the  Masters  of  Wisdom  interiorly,  yet  who 
need  instruction  and  direction  in  forming  such  contact. 

We  do  not  aim  to  supplant  the ,  but  should 

supplement  its  work  in  greatest  harmony ;  for  its  teach- 
ings are  the  basis  upon  which  we  build  and  which  we 
require  from  our  pupils.  This  is  the  Law :  Only  he 

'See  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss,  Chapter  III. 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  75  93 

who  asks  can  receive,  because  the  asking  opens  the 
doors  through  which  help  can  come. 

May  4th,  1908. 

"I  very  gladly  ask  to  study  with  you,  but  in 
fairness  I  must  say  that  I  am  old  and  sick  and 
poor,  and  will  not  consider  myself  aggrieved  if 
classed  as  ineligible." 

We  are  most  happy  to  welcome  you  into  our  Order. 
We  welcome  the  "old  and  sick  and  poor/'  and  those 
who  are  heart-hungry  for  love  and  sympathy.  Hear 
ye  not  the  voice  of  the  Master  saying,  "Blessed  are 
the  poor  in  spirit:  for  theirs  is  the  kingdom  of 
heaven"?  Yea,  blessed  are  the  sick;  for  they  shall 
be  healed.  Blessed  are  the  old ;  for  they  have  gar- 
nered the  wisdom  of  earth  and  are  nearing  the  very 
hour  when  the  Lord  shall  walk  in  the  garden  with 
them,  in  the  cool  of  the  day.  Whosoever  sends  out  a 
cry  of  heartfelt,  loving  desire  shall  be  heard  and  shall 
meet  Him  face  to  face.  We  are  only  too  glad  of  the 
privilege  granted  us  of  sending  even  a  little  love  and 
light  and  joy  to  you. 

Can.,  Jan.  12th,  1908. 

"The  temperament  which  I  have  earned,  and  of 
which  I  am  at  present  the  possessor,  demands  that 
certain  things  shall  be  clearly  explained  to  me, 
because  in  this  great  country  of  North  America, 
there  are  more  fakes  and  frauds  in  so-called 
spiritual  organizations  than  in  any  other  country 
with  which  I  am  acquainted.  You  will  no  doubt 
recognize  that  to  those  who  are  worthy  of  join- 
ing your  organization  you  must  reveal  as  much 
concerning  it  as  will,  with  their  want  of  knowl- 
edge concerning  it,  satisfy  them  that  you  are  what 
you  claim  to  be." 

No  doubt  if  this  Movement  were  a  fake  or  a  fraud 
or  some  scheme  to  get  money  from  the  credulous  there 


94  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

would  be  voluminous  "proofs"  and  attestations  as  to 
its  genuineness  and  loud  protestations  of  its  power  to 
stand  above  all  other  organizations.  But  as  it  does  not 
belong  to  that  class  we  must  adhere  to  the  universal 
rule,  the  law  always  followed  by  The  Lodge  of  Mas- 
ters, i.  e.,  the  one  law  of  creation,  growth  and  evolu- 
tion: "By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know  them."  When  a 
planet  is  born  it  does  not  herald  the  advent  abroad, 
but  goes  on  its  appointed  way,  following  the  law  of 
its  being,  until  some  earnest  investigator,  who  is  watch- 
ing and  seeking,  discovers  and  records  it.  When  a 
tree  blossoms  or  bears  fruit  it  does  not  blow  a  trumpet, 
but  waits  patiently  until  someone  finds  it,  and  through 
his  previous  knowledge  of  trees  and  through  his  rea- 
soning power  decides  that  the  blossom  is  rare  and  that 
the  fruit,  even  though  hitherto  unknown,  must  neces- 
sarily be  wholesome.  This  is  the  Law :  true  Wisdom 
cannot  swerve  from  it. 

Every  Soul  has  implanted  within  it,  as  an  integral 
principle,  the  power  of  intuition,  just  as  every  mineral, 
vegetable  and  animal  has  the  power  of  selection  or  in- 
stinct which  leads  it  to  follow  the  lines  of  evolution 
best  fitted  for  its  growth  and  perfection  in  accord  with 
its  environment.  This  beneficent  provision  was  not 
denied  man — the  highest  point  reached,  so  far,  in  the 
scale  of  evolution — indeed,  it  was  given  him  in  far 
greater  abundance  than  to  the  lower  kingdoms.  With 
it  was  given  the  power  of  reason,  and  free-will,  that 
he  might,  if  he  would,  know  or  he  might,  if  he  would, 
doubt  and  go  astray  and  waste  time — a  privilege  de- 
nied the  lower  kingdoms. 

April  19th,  1908. 

"What  appealed  to  me  so  forcibly  in  The  Order 
of  the  15  was  its  grand,  broad  foundation  and  the 
loving  help  and  recognition  it  held  out  to  those 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  15  95 

who  were  ready.  In  all  my  asking  before  in  this 
line,  I  had  been  put  off  with  stones,  and  no  recog- 
nition of  possible  individual  preparation  or  de- 
velopment taken  into  consideration." 

When  all  candidates  are  placed  upon  the  same  level 
and  no  spiritual  insight  is  employed,  from  a  merely 
earthly  standpoint  all  must  pass  through  the  same 
wearying  delays.  But  no  movement  can  be  a  heart- 
help  which  stamps  itself,  at  the  outset,  as  incapable 
of  discerning  inward  qualifications.  All  so-called 
"inner"  instructions  coming  from  such  a  body  must, 
of  necessity,  be  designed  to  help  the  general  mass 
rather  than  individuals.  It  is  but  a  corroboration  of 
the  teaching  given  in  the  lesson  on  Degrees  and  Orders 
that,  while  true  and  necessary,  nevertheless  such  teach- 
ings belong  to  the  negative  side  of  the  cross,  where 
advance  comes  in  a  general  way  for  the  mass  of  pupils 
as  a  whole  and  is  not  especially  adapted  to  individual 
needs. 

March  6th,  1908. 

"The  question  arises  whether  this  Order  would 
give  such  teachings  and  training  or  discipline  as 
would  clash  with  that  of  the School  ?" 

The  object  of  the  personal  instruction  in  this  Order 
is  to  help  each  pupil  to  come  into  personal  touch  with 
his  own  Guru  or  Teacher,  and  thus  receive  his  instruc- 
tion in  practical  occultism  at  first  hand.  There  are  no 
two  persons  who  need  exactly  the  same  help,  and  for 
that  reason  no  Soul  who  had  not  reached  Mastery 
would  dare  give  such  instruction  and  assume  the  kar- 
mic  responsibility  for  the  teachings  given.  Therefore, 
when  a  student  is  prepared  for  such  instruction  the 
Guru  will  be  ready  to  give  him  personal  training.  But 
unless  the  student  has  awakened  his  intuition  suffi- 
ciently to  recognize  the  Master's  presence,  and  has 


96  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

acquired  sufficient  knowledge  of  the  laws  governing 
such  communication,  the  message  will  be  meaning- 
less; for  he  will  be  unable  correctly  to  interpret  it. 
This  Movement,  then,  is  the  fulfillment  of  the  promise 

made  to  the  students  of  the School,  as  you 

will,  perhaps,  realize  later  on. 

April  15th,  1908. 

"I  want  particularly  to  know  whether  member- 
ship in  The  Order  of  the  15  is  incompatible  with 
membership  in  the School." 

As  to  your  inquiry  about  joining  the School, 

we  assure  you  that  it  can  make  no  possible  difference 
to  us  except  that  we  hope  you  will  not  take  obliga- 
tions that  will  prevent  you  from  remaining  in  the 
Order.  This  Order,  being  a  real  Order  of  The  Lodge, 
is  gathering  its  members  from  all  organizations  and 
cannot  possibly  interfere  with  them.  In  fact  we  desire 
to  have  our  members  remain  faithful  to  obligations 
already  assumed  and  thus  infuse  The  Lodge  force  into 
their  organizations. 

May  15th,  1908. 

"I  never  had  any  uplifting  power  like  I  have  re- 
ceived from  this  Order.  Your  first  letter  and  les- 
son came  direct  to  the  soul.  I  have  learned  a  lot 
of  mantrams  but  never  one  that  has  done  me  as 
much  good  as  the  one  in  the  lesson.  (The  Morn- 
ing Prayer. — Ed.) I  cannot  help  the 

Order  as  I  would  like  but  will  send  you  as  much 
as  I  can  as  soon  as  I  can." 

We  are  happy  to  hear  that  you  have  been  able  to 
correlate  with  the  force  sent  you ;  for  it  is  only  those 
who  have  something  within  themselves  that  is  attuned 
to  the  special  note  of  truth  sounded  by  this  Order  who 
can  feel  the  sympathetic  vibrations  of  the  life-force 
from  this  Center.  We  understand  your  true  attitude 
and  your  desire  to  help,  and  as  you  know,  love  and 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  15  97 

sympathy  are  far  higher  and  more  lasting  helps  than 
money.  Still,  while  humanity  is  bound  on  the  wheel  of 
the  almighty  dollar,  it  is  impossible  to  do  anything 
practical  to  help  it,  such  as  sending  out  these  teach- 
ings, without  the  physical  expression  of  interest  which 
takes  the  form  of  financial  aid.  We  know,  however, 
that  you  will  do  all  you  can,  and  we  have  no  fear  of 
the  failure  of  the  work.  One  way  in  which  you  can 
help  is  to  hold  strongly  to  the  thought  of  financial 
success  for  the  Movement ;  for  it  must  place  its  feet  up- 
on the  earth-plane  through  earthly  means,  and  every 
one  who  recognizes  this  truth  practically  helps  more 
than  he  can  understand. 

May  22nd,  1908. 

"I  am  being  led  into  new  and  wonderful  paths 
as  fast  as  I  am  able  to  understand  their  meaning, 
but  I  must  know  that  it  is  the  leading." 

As  to  your  just  demand  to  know  if  this  Movement 
is  the  leading  you  are  seeking,  we  can  only  say  that 
no  embodied  entity  can  answer  that  question  for  an- 
other. Each  Soul  must  decide  for  itself  that  all-im- 
portant question.  If  you  ask  sincerely,  in  the  Silence, 
for  guidance,  and  if  it  is  the  real,  sincere  cry  of  the 
heart  for  help  and  light  that  goes  out,  verily  your 
Father-in-heaven  who  heareth  in  secret  shall  reward 
you  openly.  Never  has  a  sincere  cry  for  help  been 
sent  out  in  the  Silence — where  God  dwelleth — that 
was  not  answered.  Just  as  soon  as  the  demand  is 
truly  voiced  and  put  into  definite  form,  yea,  "Before 
they  call,  I  will  answer;  and  while  they  are  yet  speak- 
ing, I  will  hear."  The  thing  to  do  is  to  recognize 
the  answer  when  it  comes.  That  you  must  do  for 
yourself.  We  can  only  assure  you  that  we  are  ready 
and  willing  to  help  you;  but  our  ability  to  do  this 
depends  upon  yourself.  If  you  want  what  we  can 


98  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

give,  it  is  yours;  if  for  some  reason  you  need  other 
training  for  a  time,  we  willingly  stand  aside  and  give 
our  time  to  others  who  are  hungry  for  the  food  that 
is  given  us  by  the  Masters  to  break  and  distribute. 
It  is  only  five  loaves  and  two  small  fishes,  but  to  all 
who  sit  down  and  partake  it  will  prove  sufficient  and 
satisfying. 

Jan.  5th,  1908. 
"I  certainly  'desire  to  progress'  and  therefore 

shall  be  glad  to  hear  further  concerning  that  of 

which  the  circular  treats." 

We  appreciate  your  attitude  and  know  the  real  heart- 
hunger  for  growth  that  is  almost  fearful  lest  the  prof- 
fered food  prove  to  be  a  stone.  Only  your  own  in- 
tuition can  help  you.  The  table  is  spread;  the  gar- 
ment is  ready,  and  we  invite  you  to  the  feast.  Yea, 
we  welcome  you ;  for  we  know  that  hunger  which  noth- 
ing but  spiritual  food  can  satisfy.  How  well  we  under- 
stand the  weary  disappointment  and  the  cry  of  your 
heart,  "How  long,  O  Lord?  How  long?"  No  longer, 
my  son,  than  you  yourself  hold  back.  Your  Father's 
hand  reaches  out  toward  you;  a  complete  happiness 
and  satisfaction  is  yours  for  the  picking  up.  "Ask 
and  ye  shall  receive,  seek  and  ye  shall  find."  There 
is  no  death  but  disappointment  and  lost  ideals.  Breathe 
life  into  your  ideals,  new  life  and  hope.  Set  them  once 
more  upon  the  pedestal  and  determine  that  they  shall 
be  imbued  with  life.  Nothing  is  lost  but  the  mere  husk 
of  an  ideal;  the  germ  is  still  there,  only  waiting  for 
the  breath  of  love  to  bring  it  forth  in  new  and  glorious 
garments,  fit  for  the  wedding  feast  of  thy  Soul. 

Jan.  16th,  1908. 

."I  have  not  been  ready  to  join  organizations 
or  movements  for  fear  that  they  might  not  be 
what  I  needed." 


Concerning  the  Order  of  the  15  99 

As  to  your  fear  that  you  are  wrong  in  entering  this 
Order,  that  all  depends  upon  your  attitude.  There 
is  always  one  way,  and  one  teacher  who  can  best  help 
each  Soul.  The  Soul  knows  intuitively,  or  can  know 
if  it  will  listen,  just  who  can  help  and  just  what  way 
is  best.  There  is  no  one  way  for  all.  Each  has  pecul- 
iar annuitizations  which  in  past  lives  have  laid  down 
the  lines  over  which  it  is  easier  for  helpful  force  to 
be  drawn.  The  injunction,  "Know  thyself,"  included 
this  point,  i.  e.,  to  know  intuitively  what  is  helpful  and 
to  follow  that  leading  independently  of  what  any  other 
may  think  or  say ;  for  what  is  the  correct  line  for  you 
may  be  all  wrong  for  your  neighbor.  Your  letter  rings 
true  and  sincere,  and  such  an  earnest  call  for  help 
never  remains  unanswered. 

April  9th,  1908. 

"I  do  not  know  what  you  mean  by  contributions 
unless  it  is  to  pay  for  the  lessons." 

A  thing  that  costs  you  nothing  is  valued  at  nothing. 
Just  in  proportion  to  the  real  love  and  sacrifice  will 
be  the  value  to  your  own  Soul.  In  other  words,  what 
we  love  we  work  for,  sacrifice  our  time  and  money 
for.  And  out  of  those  things,  or  their  inner  force, 
is  our  character  built  up.  If  we  value  dress,  earthly 
gain,  self-indulgence  or  earthly  honors,  we  work  and 
sacrifice  for  them,  and  the  inner  force  that  creates  the 
desire  grows  into  our  character.  And  soon  we  have 
either  a  frivolous,  miserly,  inordinately  selfish  or  am- 
bitious character.  If  we  desire  the  fruits  of  the  Spirit 
— love,  joy,  peace,  long-suffering,  gentleness,  patience 
and  humility — we  will  exert  our  every  effort  for  them. 
And  the  effort  thus  put  forth  will  grow  into  character ; 
for  only  through  effort  can  we  ever  gain  them. 

You  do  not  pay  for  the  lessons,  but  you  do  all  you 
can  to  help  on  the  work  in  whatever  way  you  can, 


100  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

making  sacrifices  of  time,  money  and  thought  if  you 
love  it  and  really  mean  to  build  into  your  character 
"the  fruits  of  the  Spirit." 

June  14th,  1908. 

"I  have  just  carefully  read  the  paper  on  Nar- 
cotics and  approve  of  it  so  much  that,  with  your 
permission,  I  will  publish  most  of  it  in  the  maga- 
zine, and  give  proper  credit." 

We  are  glad  the  paper  on  Narcotics*  pleases  you. 
None  of  our  lessons  aim  to  be  a  complete  or  full  treat- 
ment of  a  subject.  This  is  done  intentionally,  because 
we  wish  not  only  to  instruct,  but  to  stimulate  the  in- 
tuition of  our  pupils  and  lead  them  to  write  for  further 
explanation;  for  it  is  the  heart-cry — the  need  of  the 
Soul — that  is  answered,  rather  than  the  words  of  the 
letter. 

May  28th. 

"I  desire  to  know  something  of  how  your  work 
is  carried  on  and  what  the  expense  of  member- 
ship is." 

The  work  of  this  Order  is  carried  on  by  monthly 
lessons  and  by  personal  correspondence.  That  is,  all 
students  are  privileged  to  write  to  the  Teacher  of 
the  Order  and  ask  questions  upon  points  either  in  the 
lessons,  in  the  Bible  or  in  any  other  teachings.  They 
may  also  write  for  advice  in  regard  to  their  spiritual 
growth,  or  whenever  they  are  in  trouble  and  need 
help  and  sympathy.  Such  letters  form  a  direct  line  of 
communication  over  which  the  helpful  forces  from  this 
Center  can  flow  continually 

This  Movement  is  supported  entirely  by  voluntary 
contributions,  for  no  true  spiritual  teachings  can  be 
bought  for  a  price,  nor  can  they  be  withheld  from  any 
sincere  seeker  who  is  ready  for  them. 

*Se«  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtisi,  Chapter  VII. 


PART  IV. 
PRAYER. 

"Do  you  believe  that  if  there  really  did  not  exist 
that  tie  between  Man  and  his  Maker — that  link  be- 
tween life  here  and  life  hereafter  which  is  found  in 
what  we  call  Soul,  alone, — that  wherever  you  look 
through  the  universe,  you  would  behold  a  child  at 
prayer?  Nature  inculcates  nothing  that  is  superfluous. 
Nature  does  not  impel  the  leviathan  or  the  lion,  the 
eagle  or  the  moth,  to  pray ;  she  impels  only  man.  Why  ? 
Because  man  only  has  a  Soul,  and  Soul  seeks  to  com- 
mune with  the  Everlasting,  as  a  fountain  struggles 
up  to  its  source."  A  Strange  Story,  Bulwer-Lytton. 

"Prayer  is  an  ennobling  action  when  it  is  an  intense 
feeling,  an  ardent  desire  rushing  forth  from  our  very 
heart  for  the  good  of  other  people,  and  when  entirely 
detached  from  any  selfish  personal  object;  the  craving 
for  a  beyond  is  natural  and  holy  in  man,  but  on  con- 
dition of  sharing  that  bliss  with  others."  The  Secret 
Doctrine,  Blavatsky,  Vol.  III. 


Prayer  103 

PART  IV. 
PRAYER. 


May  22nd,  1908. 

"Though  the  daily  petition  for  physical  and 
spiritual  sustenance  may  be  well  adapted  for 
those  developed  to  no  higher  point  than  the 
anthropomorphic  idea  of  Deity,  it  seems  to  me 
that,  once  the  consciousness  is  reached,  even  if 
faint  and  imperfect,  that  Love  and  Power  are  our 
divine  inheritance;  purs  at  the  mere  desire  and 
will  to  use  them  (aright)  for  the  proper  reflection 
upon  all  other  life  in  full  measure,  of  love  and 
wisdom  received  by  us,  is  not  the  cultivation  of 
purity  in  love  and  desire — next  on  the  program? 
Thus  while  my  own  children,  as  infants,  expressed 
their  wants  or  needs,  so  soon  as  a  consciousness 
of  our  relationship  was  established,  the  necessity 
for  such  expression  ceased.  (How  much  sooner 
had  I  been  omniscient!)  So,  too,  our  intercourse 
is  one  of  mutual  love;  even  though  mingled  with 
discipline  and  obedience — not  one  of  petitions  and 
favors — this  is  for  masters  and  slaves." 

Your  idea  of  prayer  is  correct  as  far  as  it  goes,  but 
it  applies  only  to  prayer  as  generally  understood  and 
practiced.  There  is  but  one  universal  Law  governing 
all  manifestations  of  life,  from  molecule  to  cosmos, 
and  this  works  with  mathematical  precision  through 
foreordained  channels.  Hence  to  pray  for  (get)  any- 
thing you  must  obey  the  Law  and  seek  and  expect  to 
get  only  in  accordance  with  the'  Law  through  these 
natural  channels.  The  Infinite  Spirit,  manifesting  as 
Father-Mother-Love,  as  it  correlates  with  matter  must, 
of  necessity,  work  with  the  Law ;  for  Love  is  the  ful- 
filling of  the  Law.  Matter,  being  inert  and  dense,  is 


104  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

opposed  to  Spirit  in  that  the  finer  vibrations  of  Spirit 
find  it  difficult  to  set  the  comparatively  inert  matter 
into  harmonious  vibration,  and  as  each  is  at  an  opposite 
pole  there  can  be  no  direct  contact  the  one  with  the 
other.  Communication  between  the  two  must  follow 
the  regular,  lawful  channels.  It  is  here  that  prayer, 
in  its  true  conception,  comes  in.  True  prayer  or  spirit- 
ual aspiration  is  simply  a  correlating  of  the  brain  and 
physical  consciousness  with  the  spiritual,  thus  creating 
a  natural  channel  of  communication  through  which  the 
spiritual  force  can  flow.  In  other  words,  it  is  clos- 
ing the  circuit.  The  Will,  a  desire  for  spiritual  gifts, 
and  a  constant  attitude  of  devotion  are  the  proper  chan- 
nels, but  words,  meditation  and  a  recognition  of  the 
end  to  be  attained,  are  steps  leading  to  the  opening 
of  them. 

Prayer  is  a  channel  leading  to  the  attainment  of  the 
fixed  purpose  (desire  for  spiritual  gifts)  ;  and  Prayer, 
Will  and  Spiritual  Desire  are  steps  necessary  for  those 
to  follow  who  have  not  attained  that  perfect  control 
over  the  whole  life — mind,  emotions  and  purpose — 
which  they  may  ultimately  attain.  Those  who  have 
attained  can  well  dispense  with  prayer,  but  not  those 
who  are  still  striving.  Prayer  is  the  Jacob's  ladder, 
one  end  resting  on  earth,  the  other  reaching  into 
heaven.  If  you  have  climbed  to  the  top  of  the  ladder 
you  no  longer  have  need  of  it,  but  it  would  be  cruel 
to  cut  away  the  ladder  by  which  you  had  climbed  when 
so  many  eager  Souls  are  clinging  to  its  rungs. 

When  your  sons  and  daughters  were  young  you  ex- 
pected them  to  ask  for  what  they  thought  necessary, 
even  though  you  in  your  wisdom  did  not  grant  it;  but 
when  they  had  grown  to  the  age  of  discretion  you 
were  content  that  they  should  hold  an  attitude  of  re- 
spectful love  and  obedience.  Until  you  have  attained 


Prayer  105 

to  your  Father's  stature  in  spiritual  growth  He  ex- 
pects you  to  ask  for  what  you  think  necessary,  even 
though  He  in  His  Wisdom  does  not  grant  it.  Prayer 
is  but  the  asking. 

To  pray  for  assistance  is,  if  rightly  understood, 
merely  to  recognize  the  inflowing  of  Divine  Love  and 
to  struggle  to  make  a  place  for  it.  To  ask  for  guidance 
is  but  to  take  hold  of  the  power  of  Divinity  as  a  little 
child  grasps  its  father's  hand.  The  child  does  not  say, 
"Father,  give  me  bread  and  clothing  and  houseroom" ; 
for  all  that  is  its  birthright;  but  it  is  quite  right  to 
come  to  its  father  with  its  difficulties,  its  lessons  and 
its  little  tumbles  and  bruises  and  ask  for  sympathy 
and  help.  Altho  the  child  must  fight  its  own  way 
through  life  you  would  be  a  cruel  father  to  refuse  a 
helpful  talk  if  it  poured  into  your  ears  a  tale  of  diffi- 
culty and  discouragement,  or  to  refuse  sympathy  when 
it  was  bruised  or  wounded. 

A  most  erroneous  idea  of  Omniscience  prevails. 
Consider  it  as  perfect  Law.  Omniscience  is  all-know- 
ing, and  expresses  itself  perfectly  in  all  minutia,  even 
though  we  may  not  recognize  that  they  are  perfect 
expressions  of  the  conditions.  To  become  one  with 
the  Law  is  to  have  fulfilled  it.  Jesus  came  not  to  de- 
stroy, but  to  fulfill  it  through  the  power  of  The  Christ. 

March  20th,  1909. 

"Healing  prayer  can  be  used,  with  the  sanction 
of  the   higher   nature,   only  as   a   preventive   of 

further  mistakes To  make  the  cure  of 

disease  >the  object  of  prayer  is  a  degradation  of 
this  high  power." 

Prayer,  meditation  and  yoga  are  all  the  same  thing, 
the  names  differing  according  to  the  country  you  are 
in.  But,  my  son,  I  wish  to  call  your  attention  to  a 


106  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

grave  misconception  into  which  you,  in  company  with 
many  other  students,  have  fallen.  Evil  Karma  is  not 
punishment,  neither  is  it  fatality.  It  is  the  result  of  in- 
harmony — a  something  wrong — a  law  broken  that  must 
be  adjusted.  And  until  such  adjustment  is  made  more 
or  less  suffering  must  be  experienced.  It  is  like  a 
splinter  in  a  tender  spot.  The  spot  will  fester  until  the 
splinter  is  removed,  but  would  you  think  it  wise  to 
allow  the  spot  to  fester  until  by  the  sloughing  of  the 
surrounding  tissues  the  splinter  was  eliminated?  Or 
would  a  wise  physician  use  his  higher  powers  (his 
trained  intelligence)  to  remove  the  splinter  at  once  and 
allow  the  spot  to  heal  ?  Again,  a  wheel  has  become  flat- 
tened on  one  side  and  runs  with  great  friction  and 
jarring,  throwing  out  of  gear  all  parts  of  the  engine. 
This,  no  doubt,  is  bad  Karma  from  bad  usage,  but  the 
engineer  is  fully  justified  in  using  his  higher  powers  to 
have  the  defect  remedied  at  once.  Thus  it  is  with  The 
Healing  Prayer1  as  we  give  it  to  you.  The  earnest 
repetition  of  it,  with  an  effort  to  grasp  its  real  signifi- 
cance, arouses  in  the  consciousness  a  realization  of 
what  is  wrong.  You  recognize  the  Divine  Creative 
Force  of  Love — The  Christ-power — and  the  instant 
such  a  recognition  is  made  the  splinter  is  removed, 
the  defective  machine  repaired  and  atonement  is  made. 
For  The  Christ  has  spoken,  "Go  and  sin  no  more/' 

Much  that  is  called  prayer  is  but  selfish  sanctimo- 
niousness glazed  over.  To  make  the  cure  of  a  condi- 
tion the  object  without  a  recognition  of  the  Law,  or  to 
debase  the  force  for  personal  ends,  especially  to  get 
money  through  the  gullibility  of  the  weak  and  suffer- 
ing, is  not  prayer  at  all,  and  therefore  does  not  enter 
into  the  discussion. 

lSce  Appendix. 


Prayer  107 

April  9th,  1908. 

"The  prayer  on  Healing  sent  last  month  and  the 
Morning  Prayer1  for  this  month  seem  to  me 
to  be  two  extremes  of  thought,  one  making  life 
here  automatic,  the  other  assuming  too  much  in- 
dividual power When  I  was  confronted 

during  the  day  with  two  aged  women,  both  home- 
less, and  I  absolutely  had  not  a  place  to  send  them 
but  the  almshouse,  the  words  that  I  had  uttered  in 
the  morning,  'I  can  conquer  all  that  comes  to  me 

today/  seemed  to  grin  at  me  in  mockery 

The  effect  of  the  above  mentioned  prayers  would 
probably  cause  either  complete  self-depreciation, 
or  excessive  self-appreciation." 

All  manifestations  of  life,  from  molecule  to  cosmos, 
are  expressed  in  a  circle.  If  you  will  let  your  mind 
dwell  on  this  fact  for  a  moment  you  will,  in  fact  must, 
admit  that  a  circle  has  no  beginning  and  no  end,  hence 
no  extremes.  "Extremes  meet,"  is  an  aphorism  of 
daily  life,  and  like  all  such  is  founded  on  a  rock  of 
spiritual  truth.  The  two  prayers  you  are  troubled 
about  stand  as  examples  of  this  underlying  principle ; 
self  depreciation  from  the  viewpoint  of  the  lower,  per- 
sonal self;  self  appreciation  from  the  outlook  of  the 
Real  Self.  Both  are  true  and  the  force  from  each 
flows  eternally  round  and  round  the  circle  of  mani- 
festation. When  one  is  spending  all  her  energy  in 
work  upon  the  outer  rim  of  the  circle  as  you  are,  it 
is  impossible  to  see  all  the  way  around.  So  when  con- 
fronted with  earth  misery  which  you  are  unable  to  alle- 
viate, discouragement  and  a  feeling  of  helplessness  is 
inevitable.  Could  you  but  for  a  moment  transfer  your 
activities  to  the  center  of  the  circle  you  would  at  once 
realize  that  the  animating  force  that  keeps  this  circle  of 
manifestation  in  being  comes  from  the  central  point 

1  See  Appendix. 


108  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

and  is  distributed  equally  to  all  parts  of  the  circle — 
is  the  One  Life.  Working  from  this  central  point  dis- 
couragement is  impossible,  for  at  once  knowledge 
comes  to  you  that  all  is  well ;  that  they,  too,  the  indi- 
gent, the  helpless  and  homeless,  are  in  the  stream ;  that 
the  great  Heart  of  Love  holds  them  within  Its  shelter- 
ing folds,  and  that  It  does  not  depend  upon  your  per- 
sonal ability  to  place  them ;  that  your  Father-in-heaven 
(the  Great  Creative  Force  of  Love)  has  already  placed 
them  where  they  must  remain  until  they  have  learned 
a  needed  lesson.  Your  compassion  and  pity  for  them 
is  but  cold  and  harsh  in  comparison  with  the  yearn- 
ing tenderness  of  the  Masters  of  Compassion — of  the 
loving  Christ,  who  would  not  that  any  perish  but  that 
all  have  eternal  life.  They  know  that  time  and  place 
are  but  motes  in  the  sunbeam,  and  They  love  with 
enough  intensity  to  wait  patiently  until  the  lessons 
are  learned  and  the  sisters,  now  so  poor  and  ill,  can 
be  clothed  with  His  righteousness  as  with  a  garment, 
and  sit  down  with  Him  at  the  marriage  feast. 

This  does  not  at  all  decry  the  necessity  for  outer 
work — caring  for  the  desolate  ones,  "For  inasmuch 
as  ye  have  done  it  unto  one  of  the  least  of  these  ye 
have  done  it  unto  me."  But  it  does  mean  that  you  are 
to  "Work  as  those  work  who  are  ambitious"  to  lift 
all  the  world  into  better  physical  conditions,  yet  you 
are  to  "Kill  out  ambition"  and  know  that  all  is  well. 
If  you  have  done  your  best  let  it  rest  there.  Be  strong 
enough  to  stand  aside  and  see  the  workings  of  the 
Lord  (the  Law)  and  like  a  little  child  say  "Thy  will 
be  done,"  knowing  that  the  will  is  to  emancipate  all 
from  sin  and  sorrow.  But  the  only  path  is  the  one  that 
teaches  through  experience,  and  there  is  more  joy  in 
heaven  over  one  sinner  who  repenteth — who  has 


Prayer  109 

learned  his  lesson — than  over  ninety  and  nine  just 
persons  who  need  no  repentance — who  are  satisfied. 
The  Shining  Ones  are  all  the  time  creating  and 
building  for  each  and  every  Soul  the  immortal  habita- 
tion (spiritual  body)  in  which  that  Soul  will  find  ulti- 
mate liberation,  and  if  the  material  out  of  which  that 
body  must  be  built  can  only  be  obtained  by  tearing 
to  pieces  and  destroying  old  earthly  habitations  (phy- 
sical bodies)  in  which  the  personality  has  become  en- 
tangled, They  will  not  hesitate  to  tear  down  and  de- 
stroy. At  the  end  of  it  all — when  the  lessons  are 
learned  and  the  Soul  sits  down  at  the  Father's  table — 
do  you  think  a  residence  of  a  few  short,  mortal  years 
in  an  almshouse  will  in  any  way  detract  from  their 
joy? 


PART  V. 
THE  ASTRAL-PLANE. 

"Thou  canst  not  call  that  madness  of  which  thou  art 
proved  to  know  nothing."  Apology,  Tertullian. 

"The  astral  influences  are  invisible,  but  they  act  upon 
man,  unless  he  knows  how  to  protect  himself  against 
them.  Heat  and  light  are  intangible  and  incorporeal ; 
nevertheless,  they  act  upon  man,  and  the  same  takes 
place  with  other  invisible  influences."  Paracelsus. 


The  Astral-Plane  113 

PART  V. 
THE  ASTRAL-PLANE. 

April  28th,  1908. 
"What   is   the   astral-plane?    Is  it   a   place   or 

locality  in  any  sense  at  all? with  all  the 

evidence  of  the  substantiality  of  the  astral-plane, 
when  we  try  to  prove  things  it  at  once  becomes 
unsubstantial.  I  can  find  no  landmarks ;  I  cannot 
even  prove  whether  the  beings  are  external  to 
ourselves  or  are  creations  of  our  own  brain,  made 
of  the  same  stuff  as  are  our  thoughts — dramatiza- 
tions of  our  thoughts — yet  this  solution  does  not 
seem  true  when  checked  up  by  all  the  facts. 
What  then  is  real?" 

The  astral-plane  is  not  a  place  or  locality,  but  a 
state  or  condition.  To  quote  from  one  author :  _  "It 
cannot  be  measured  in  three  dimensions,  and  yet  it 
is  capable  of  measurement  by  degrees  in  the  scale  of 
vibrations.  These  states  or  degrees  of  vibrations  in- 
terpenetrate each  other  without  interference,  in  which 
peculiarity  they  have  correspondence  or  analogies  in 
physical  phenomena.  For  instance,  a  dozen  or  more 
currents  of  electricity  may  pass  along  the  same  wire, 
at  the  same  time,  without  interfering  with  each  other, 
and  may  then  register  each  on  its  special  instrument, 
providing  that  the  rate  of  tension  or  vibration  be  dif- 
ferent in  each  case." 

The  only  reality  is  spiritual  consciousness,  the  One 
Life ;  all  else  is  but  varying  degrees  of  expression  of 
the  One  Life.  These  expressions  are  cognizable 
through  vibrations  affecting  organs  attuned  to  receive 
them.  The  densest  matter  or  slowest  vibration  is  the. 
physical  expression  of  consciousness,  and  we  are  apt 


114  Letters  From  t]\e  Teacher 

to  call  this  reality  when  in  fact  it  is  the  least  real, 
because  least  permanent,  of  all.  Try  to  realize  that 
what  appears  to  you  as  real  is  but  the  greatly  slowed 
down  vibrations  of  the  One  Life,  matter  being  but 
retarded  motion  and  in  truth  ever  changing,  transi- 
tory and  evanescent.  This  is  easily  proven,  for  if  the 
experience  of  merely  holding  a  little  paper  of  a  certain 
drug  to  your  head,  as  you  describe,  could  so  change' 
the  rate  of  vibration  of  the  molecules  of  your  sense 
organs  that  they  no  longer  responded  to  the  vibrations 
of  physical  matter  (for  you  it  no  longer  existed),  but 
quickened  their  rate  until  you  were  responding  to  the 
vibrations  of  a  different  world  just  as  real  to  you  then 
as  the  physical  was,  you  have  proved  the  matter  in 
your  own  experience.  If  you  will  think  this  simple 
example  over  we  feel  sure  you  will  understand,  in  a 
way  that  no  number  of  words  could  tell  you,  just  where 
the  astral  world  is,  and  also  who  and  what  are  its 
denizens.  It  is  simply  the  next  higher  note  in  the 
scale  of  vibration,  and  its  entities  are  those  whose 
bodies  vibrate  in  harmony  with  that  note.  Their 
senses  respond  to  those  rates  as  readily  as  yours  do 
to  those  of  this  plane,  and  hence  it  is  just  as  real  to 
them  as  this  is  to  you.  Therefore,  the  astral  world 
is  around  and  within  you,  interpenetrating  the  phy- 
sical. The  different  parts  of  you — astral,  mental, 
spiritual  bodies,  etc. — each  functions  upon  its 
own  plane.  That  is,  your  astral  body  is  now  and  all 
the  time  functioning  upon  the  astral-plane,  while  the 
higher  principles  which  connect  you  with  the  key-note 
of  your  existence  and  vibrate  to  its  rate,  are  in  the 
spiritual  realm.  Your  experiences  vary  with  the  plane 
or  state  of  consciousness  in  which  the  Ego  is  func- 
tioning. The  dense  particles  of  your  physical  brain 
vibrate  to  the  rates  of  the  physical  and  ordinarily  con- 


The  Astral-Plane  115 

fine  your  consciousness  to  that  plane.  But  you,  your- 
self, have  proven  how  easy  it  is  to  transfer  your  con- 
sciousness and  respond  to  the  vibrations  of  other 
planes.  The  Path  is  not  a  public  highway,  but  is, 
nevertheless,  a  well  trodden  one  and  easily  found  by 
those  who  know. 

All  that  exists  is  substance,  but  in  different  rates 
of  vibration.  One  is  no  more  real  than  the  other ;  for 
with  whatever  rate  your  consciousness  is  vibrating 
that  rate  is  real  as  long  as  the  consciousness  functions 
there.  Persons  who  function  consciously  in  the  astral 
— such  functioning  being  possible  because  they  have 
dropped  their  denser  instruments ;  taken  off  their  over- 
coats, as  it  were — are  just  men  and  women  using 
bodies  and  senses  attuned  to  that  state*bf  matter  instead 
of  to  the  slower,  denser,  physical  matter.  Hence, 
since  their  range  of  response  to  vibration  is  wider, 
their  limitations  are  less  binding  and  less  hampering. 
This  accounts,  too,  for  their  limited  knowledge,  altho 
to  those  still  on  the  earth-plane  it  may  seem  great. 
It  is  unlawful  to  pass  the  barrier  because  the  Law  of 
Vibration  forbids.  Even  those  upon  the  astral  reach 
a  point  where  they  cannot  respond  to  a  still  higher 
rate  of  vibration  and  they  are  limited  unless  they  can 
receive  teachings  from  those  who  have  reached  into 
still  more  spiritual  vibrations  and  have  gained  deeper 
knowledge.  All  this,  however,  can  lawfully  be  ac- 
complished by  the  true  disciple,  even  while  still  upon 
the  earth-plane. 

The  astral  is  but  the  Hall  of  Learning.  Being  the 
nearest  to  the  earth  it  is  the  easiest  to  reach ;  but  man, 
being  essentially  a  Divine  Being,  has  the  power,  by 
uniting  his  lower  mind  to  his  spiritual  consciousness 
— of  becoming  one  with  his  Father-in-heaven — to  raise 


116  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

his  lower  vibrations  until  they  are  attuned  to  those  of 
the  One  Mind  or  God,  and  bring  back  His  wisdom 
through  all  the  realms.  This  is  what  we  are  here  to 
learn,  i.  e.,  the  powers  and  possibilities  of  vibration. 
"Man,  know  thyself." 

All  states  are  real  and  exist  as  long  as  the  con- 
sciousness holds  you  there.  The  Soul,  as  we  have 
already  said,  being  an  expression  of  the  one  Great 
Reality,  is  always  real,  and  through  the  real  vibra- 
tions of  mind-substance  creates  a  reality  out  of  what- 
ever it  believes,  i.  e.,  heaven,  hell,  etc.  That  is  what 
your  Soul  is  doing  now  in  regard  to  the  physical- 
plane.  From  the  standpoint  of  any  higher  plane 
physical  existence  is  the  most  stupid  kind  of  sleep, 
trance  or  stupor,  i.  e.,  limitation  of  your  Divine  powers. 

The  adjustment  of  Karma  is  brought  about  con- 
sciously through  spiritual  attainment.  The  Soul  in 
some  one  life  reaches  the  outermost  rim  of  the  Spiral 
of  Life  and  meets  the  Saturn-force — immobility,  sta- 
bility— and  conquers  it.  Then,  in  full  willingness,  de- 
sires to  go  back  and  pay  up  all  its  debts,  even  those 
which  have  remained  over  from  many  lives.  But  while 
such  a  one  is  reaping  all  sorts  of  things  belonging  to 
his  old  karmic  conditions  he,  nevertheless,  has  with 
him  the  power  of  the  Conqueror.  That  is,  he  knows 
that  these  things  cannot  overcome  him;  he  is  above 
them;  he  is  in  them  but  is  not  overcome  by  them;  he 
has  become  a  philosopher  and  can,  like  Epictetus,  be 
dragged  through  the  streets  in  chains  and  still  main- 
tain his  peaceful  calm. 

It  is  always  wrong  to  force  any  growth.  All  steps 
are  necessary.  Until  you  have  found  the  spiritual  per- 
fection of  each  step  you  cannot  pass  it;  and  if  you 
skip  one  you  must  come  back  and  take  it  up  later. 


The  Astral-Plane  117 

March  5th,  1908. 

"Does  the  soul  remain  in  the  same  state  after 
death  or  does  it  pass  through  various  condi- 
tions?" 

The  astral-plane  is  divided  into  seven  degrees  or 
states,  called  "spheres"  by  the  Spiritualists  (most  of 
whom  know  very  little  of  anything  beyond  these  seven 
degrees),  the  lowest  of  which  is  very  close  to  the 
earth.  It  is  in  this  astral-plane — with  its  seven  de- 
grees each  divided  into  seven  orders  and  each  order 
into  seven  sub-orders — that  the  Soul  works  out,  or 
realizes  all  its  earthly  desires.  If  the  desires  were  evil, 
the  experiences  will  be  evil ;  if  the  desires  were  good, 
the  experiences  will  be  good,  and  the  Soul  will  finally 
realize  just  how  futile  are  the  mere  earthly 
desires.  Some  remain  on  the  astral  for  long 
periods  of  time,  five  hundred  years  and  more, 
and  finally  enter  the  psychic-plane  (soul-plane) 
by  dropping  the  astral  body  just  as  the  one 
of  flesh  was  dropped,  but  generally  without  the 
same  terror.  There  they  pass  through  its  degrees  and 
orders  until  they  have  realized  the  very  highest  that 
they  have  ever  conceived  of.  That  is,  every  spiritual 
aspiration  has  its  realization  and  there  is  a  garnering 
of  the  experiences  of  the  earth  life.  Then  there  comes 
a  time  when  the  Soul  realizes  that  it  has  experienced 
all  it  knows  of  spiritual  happiness  and  that  there  are 
still  heights  beyond.  It  realizes  that  it  must  get  more 
experience  so  that  it  can  gain  higher  comprehension 
and  higher  aspiration.  Then  its  desire  for  further  ex- 
perience that  it  may  more  wisely  do  its  part  in  the  great 
scheme  of  redemption  causes  it  to  die  to  that  plane  and 
reincarnate  on  the  earth-plane ;  but  not  to  obtain  happi- 
ness on  earth,  for  it  has  realized  that  spiritual  happi- 
ness must  be  born  of  earthly  experience ;  must  be  the 


118  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

aroma  of  self-sacrifice  and  sorrow,  the  travail  of  re- 
demption. Its  only  desire  is  to  gain  more  experience 
that  it  may  learn  higher  lessons  and  so  assimilate  or 
gain  more  spiritual  growth  and  draw  nearer  to  the  All 
through  the  spiritualizing  and  redeeming  of  the  atoms 
composing  its  various  bodies.  When  this  point  is 
reached  it  chooses  its  own  earth  life  according  to  its 
needs.  And  from  that  lofty  point  the  Soul  chooses 
just  the  conditions  which  will  teach  it  the  lessons  in 
which  it  has  found  itself  lacking.  However,  it  soon 
forgets  this  when  incarnated  in  the  physical  body  and 
forced  to  express  itself  through  an  untrained  physical 
brain,  and  it  has  to  learn  the  lessons  through  sorrow 
and  suffering.  Indeed,  they  would  not  be  lessons  if 
the  personality  could  remember.  But  the  Higher  Self 
(the  Soul)  always  hovers  over  the  personality  trying 
to  impress  upon  it  these  great  truths.  We  would  advise 
you,  if  possible,  to  obtain  some  Theosophical  primers 
and  read  as  much  as  you  can  along  the  fundamental 
lines  of  the  philosophy. 

June  27th,  1908. 

"Why  cannot  the  Agent  of  this  Order  com- 
municate  with   and   bring   me   a   message   from 

who  has  recently  passed  out,  and  tell 

me  if  he  is  satisfied  with  the  condition  in  which  he 
left  his  affairs?" 

Your  letter  shows  that  you  have  no  very  clear  un- 
derstanding of  the  law  governing  communication  with 
higher  planes.  The  difference  between  spiritual  com- 
munication and  subjective  mediumship  is  a  difference 
both  of  vibration  and  method.  The  right  way  to  con- 
tact the  higher  planes  is  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  your 
physical  and  psychic  bodies  and  their  centers  until 
they  vibrate  in  harmony  with  the  key-note  of  the  Soul- 
plane,  at  which  pitch  "no  evil  thing  can  come  nigh  thy 


The  Astral-Plane  119 

dwelling."  As  we  can  only  become  aware  of  a  thing 
when  some  part  of  our  organism  responds  to  its  vibra- 
tions, the  psychic  must  have  the  proper  development  to 
come  into  harmony  with  the  spiritual-plane  ere  he  can 
contact  the  Masters  or  respond  to  things  which  touch 
upon  or  vibrate  within  the  octave  of  their  key-note. 

On  the  one  hand— -spiritual  communication — the  psy- 
chic, through  spiritual  living,  loving  thoughts  and 
helpful  actions  in  many  lives,  must  build  into  his  or 
her  character  enough  of  the  divine  principle  of  Com- 
passion for  all  humanity  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  all 
the  bodies,  either  temporarily  or  continuously,  to  the 
note  of  spiritual  love  to  which  the  Masters  of  Com- 
passion naturally  vibrate.  On  the  other  hand — sub- 
jective mediumship — the  psychic,  through  various 
means,  either  mentally  by  stilling  the  thoughts,  or 
physically  by  various  yoga  practices  such  as  gazing 
at  a  crystal,  a  black  spot,  or  sitting  in  a  constrained 
position,  through  breathing  exercises  and  many  other 
still  more  objectionable  practices — has  gained  the 
power  of  stilling  the  physical  vibrations  and  becom- 
ing negative;  or  when  through  the  oily  sheaths  hav- 
ing become  weakened  or  destroyed  the  psychic  is  nat- 
urally negative.  In  such  a  state  the  physical  atoms,  not 
being  held  together  by  the  vibratory  rhythm  to  which 
they  naturally  respond,  slow  down  and  drop  off  to  such 
an  extent  that  any  discarnate  entity  clothed  in  atoms 
of,  and  vibrating  to  the  note  of,  the  astral-plane — 
which  is  next  to  and  in  its  lower  degrees  overlaps  the 
earth-plane — can  gather  up  and  clothe  himself  in  suf- 
ficient of  the  physical  atoms  thus  thrown  off  to  tem- 
porarily vibrate  to  the  key-note  of  the  physical-plane 
and  become  temporarily  recognizable  on  that  plane. 

In  the  first  instance  the  whole  desire  of  the  psychic 
is  to  uplift  humanity;  he  is  filled  with  compassion  for 


120  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

the  Race  and  desires  to  give  himself  as  a  willing  sac- 
rifice to  bring  enlightenment  to  the  world.  This  is 
true  spiritual  development.  The  Teachers  and  Mas- 
ters whom  he  contacts  do  not  see  the  little  individ- 
ual difficulties,  or  if  They  do,  They  understand  the 
Law  and  know  that  all  is  working  out  for  the  best, 
that  only  Wisdom  can  really  help.  Given  Wisdom, 
Love  and  sustaining  help,  the  disciples  can,  and  indeed 
must,  work  out  their  own  personal  problems.  As 
Paul  says:  "Work  out  your  own  salvation  with  fear 
and  trembling."  All  spiritual  communication  is  up- 
lifting, and  the  spiritual  atoms  which  the  psychic  has 
contacted  and  drawn  into  his  body  will  rejuvenate  and 
strengthen  the  physical,  uplift  the  mental  and  advance 
him  on  the  Path  of  Spiritual  Attainment. 

In  the  second  instance,  by  giving  up  the  command 
over  the  life-forces  and  throwing  open  or  breaking 
down  the  doors  of  the  sacred  centers,  the  vitality  is 
drawn  upon  and  the  atoms  thrown  off  are  used  to 
bring  to  the  physical-plane  the  denizens  of  the  astral. 
These  may  be  pure  or  vile,  and  are  attracted  to  the 
medium  in  exact  ratio  to  the  state  of  the  atoms  which 
he  or  she  gives  off  during  the  negative  "sitting."  If 
you  understand  this,  and  the  fact  that  most  of  the 
entities  contacted  upon  the  astral-plane  are  not 
spiritual  beings,  but  merely  men  and  women  with 
their  most  dense  and  outer  garment  (the  physical 
body)  removed,  you  will  understand  the  danger  of 
giving  yourself  up  to  their  use.  Since  they  are  using 
astral  senses  they  can  see  farther  ahead  than  those 
of  the  earth-plane,  but  such  advice  as  they  have  to 
give  should  be  taken  just  as  you  would  take  the  ad- 
vice of  any  earthly  friend — subject  to  your  own  good 
judgment  and  common-sense.  Usually  such  entities 
are  interested  in  the  daily  life  of  the  sitters  rather  than 


The  Astral-Plane  121 

their  true  spiritual  advance,  but,  if  evilly  disposed  or 
lacking  Wisdom  and  a  knowledge  of  the  Law,  they 
can  and  often  do  deceive.  They  can  only  come  to  earth 
as  they  left  it,  i.  e.f  clothed  in  physical  atoms.  The  fact 
that  to  manifest  on  the  physical-plane  they  must  steal 
physical  atoms  from  the  medium  and  sitters  is  proof 
positive  of  this.  Often  their  desire  is  to  help  alleviate 
earthly  conditions,  but  their  advice,  while  valuable  in 
many  cases,  is  still  in  accord  with  worldly  standards. 
In  fact  their  activity  is  much  like  that  of  a  well-mean- 
ing but  over-meddlesome  friend  on  the  earth-plane. 
They  desire  to  help  their  friends  out  of  difficulties, 
over  hard  places,  and  often  give  advice  which  helps 
to  make  money  out  of  the  credulity  of  their  fellowmen. 
This,  as  you  can  see,  but  helps  to  sink  the  Race  deeper 
into  the  mire  of  earthly  affairs.  The  first  is  the  con- 
structive,  the  second  the  destructive  method  of  com- 
munication. In  no  case — unless  they  are  Masters,  in 
which  case  they  will  manifest  quite  differently,  as  we 
will  explain  later — are  they  different  from  the  people 
on  earth,  except  that  they  are  functioning  in  a  body 
composed  of  finer  matter. 

You  can  not  always  tell  which  of  the  above  men- 
tioned methods  has  been  used  by  the  teachings  re- 
ceived, for  even  in  subjective  mediumship  the  teach- 
ing may  be  of  a  higher  moral  character,  just  as  some 
friend  might  give  you  a  highly  moral  address.  But  no 
matter  who  the  entity  claims  to  be,  he  will  not  be  a 
Master  of  Wisdom  if  the  subjective  method  is  used, 
for  no  Master  of  the  Right  Hand  Path  ever  uses  that 
method.  In  this  case  it  is  not  a  question  of  what 
teachings  are  given,  but  how  they  are  given. 

One  absolute  test  as  to  which  method  a  psychic  is 
using  and  from  whence  the  messages  come  is  the  effect 
on  the  physical  body.  In  spiritual  communication  the 


122  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

psychic  is  clothed  upon  by  spiritual  atoms  which  self- 
effacement  and  compassion  have  drawn  to  him,  and 
he  grows  more  spiritual.  If  after  the  experience  his 
vitality  is  augmented  and  a  peaceful,  happy  and  vig- 
orous feeling  remains,  even  for  days  afterward ;  if  life 
seems  fuller,  trials  easier  to  bear  and  love  more  abun- 
dant, you  can  rest  assured  that  he  has  risen  above 
earthly  things  and  has  been  clothed  upon  by  the  Spirit, 
and  has  brought  back  lessons  for  the  benefit  of  human- 
ity. This  is  the  form  of  communion  with  the  higher 
planes  that  should  be  desired.  But  do  not  strive  for  it ; 
let  it  come  as  a  natural  growth  resulting  from  a  life 
filled  with  loving,  unselfish  thoughts  and  deeds. 

In  subjective  mediumship,  however,  owing  to  the 
loss  of  physical  atoms  and  vitality,  the  psychic  is  de- 
pleted and  weakened,  and  soon  shows  it,  not  only  in 
bodily  health,  but  also  in  mental  power.  His  nervous 
system  is  enervated,  his  mentality  is  dulled  and  a  great 
stumbling-block  has  been  placed  in  his  path.  If,  after 
communicating,  the  psychic  is  exhausted,  tired,  nerv- 
ous, cross,  fretful  and  uneasy,  even  for  days,  you  can 
rest  assured  that  he  has  allowed  some  astral  entity  to 
absorb  his  vitality  and  contact  him  by  the  second  and 
destructive  method.  It  must  be  remembered,  how- 
ever, that  even  the  psychic  who  uses  the  constructive 
or  correct  method  of  communication  is  far  more  highly 
sensitive  than  the  average  and  hence  is  easily  affected 
by  any  lack  of  harmony  in  surrounding  conditions, 
either  physical  or  mental,  and  often  suffers  from  such 
conditions,  although  later  is  able  to  conquer  or  rise 
above  them.  This  is  one  reason  why  in  all  ancient  re- 
ligions the  Sibyl  or  inspired  Priestess  was  always  sur- 
rounded by  love,  beauty  and  harmony  and  sacredly 
protected  against  all  forms  of  inharmony. 


The  Astral-Plane  123 

The  exception  we  mentioned  was  that  there  are  on 
the  higher  planes  regular  schools  of  learning,  presided 
over  by  the  Masters  of  Wisdom.  Many  persons  who 
pass  on  with  but  a  slight  knowledge  of  the  Wisdom 
Religion,  but  with  an  intense  desire  to  work  for  the 
upliftment  of  humanity — (quite  different  from  helping 
their  friends  in  temporal  affairs),  are  brought  into 
such  schools  and  are  taught  to  work  consciously  on 
those  planes,  both  gathering  together  and  helping  any 
who,  when  they  pass  on,  need  help  of  that  kind.  By 
the  permission  of  the  Masters,  and  under  Their  direc- 
tion, such  workers  can  come  into  touch  with  the  se- 
lected workers  of  the  Masters  on  the  earth-plane. 
They  can  enter  the  aura  of  The  Order  of  the  15  on 
earth  because  both  they  and  the  physical  plane  agents 
respond  to  the  same  spiritual  vibrations  from  the  Mas- 
ters of  the  Order.  An  earthly  agent  of  The  Lodge 
does  not  communicate  with  the  astral-plane,  but  is 
clothed  with  spiritual  atoms,  and  hence  can  communi- 
cate only  with  one  who  responds  to  the  same  vibra- 
tions, not  with  any  ordinary  person  who  has  just 
passed  out.  A  psychic  who  has  been  chosen  by  the 
Masters  and  especially  trained  to  do  Their  work  on 
earth  is  carefully  guarded.  An  auric  veil  is  thrown 
over  him  which  deters  discarnate  entities  from  ap- 
proaching, except  by  the  normal  route,  i.  e.t  he  can  be 
permitted,  if  it  is  thought  necessary,  to  transmit  a  mes- 
sage through  one  of  the  before-mentioned  trained 
workers  on  the  astral-plane,  but  in  no  other  way.  They 
cannot  come  into  direct  touch  unless  the  agent  is  dis- 
obedient and  perversely  throws  open  the  door  and 
scatters  physical  atoms  in  sufficient  quantity  for  the 
disembodied  one  to  create  a  temporary  covering  and 
contact  him.  In  such  a  case  even  the  Masters  cannot 
protect  such  an  agent  from  the  consequent  evil  results. 


124  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

April  llth,  1908. 

"Have  often  tried  to  follow  the  advice  of  en- 
tities on  the  astral-plane  who  seemed  friendly  and 
desirous  of  helping  me,  but  have  generally  been 
misled  or  they  have  been  unable  to  fulfill  their 
promises.  The  mediums  themselves  have  fre- 
quently been  misled.  Why  is  this?" 

In  your  case  we  wish  to  advise  you  most  seriously 
to  keep  away  from  mediums.  You,  yourself,  have  all 
the  psychic  qualifications  necessary,  and  your  centers 
are  already  dangerously  unguarded  to  the  denizens  of 
the  astral-plane.  Even  when  such  entities  are  friendly 
and  wish  to  help  you,  they  are  still  under  the  bondage 
of  Karma  and  are  not  permitted  to  do  anything  for 
you  that  would  interfere  with  your  working  out  your 
lessons.  They  mean  to  help  you,  but  are  purposely 
prevented;  for  if  they  fulfilled  their  promises  you 
would  once  more  be  enchained  in  the  astral  meshes 
through  which  it  is  your  present  great  task  to  break. 
That  is,  you  must  be  the  Ruler,  and  must  open  and 
shut  the  doors  of  your  inner  centers  at  your  own  will. 
Then  such  entities  will  prove  themselves  your  obedient 
servants  and  helpers ;  but  they  are  not  for  one  moment 
to  be  permitted  to  be  your  guides. 

April  llth,  1908. 

"That  which  I  have  received  from  you  answers 
all  doubts  I  had.  And  after  re-reading  your 
letter  of  the  4th  instant  I  could  not  help  ex- 
claiming, 'How  wonderful  it  is  that  such  teach- 
ings are  offered  me' My  occult  rec- 
ord and  experience  contains  points  that  I  can- 
not definitely  determine  in  my  own  mind  as  be- 
ing actual  or  imaginative.  Apparently  I  have 
conversed  with  elementals,  with  kama-rupas,  and 
with  the  shells  of  the  multitude  and  of  high 
statesmen,  with  Adepts  and  with  the  Gods  of 
ancient  Greece  and  Rome.  Speaking  of  those 


The  Astral-Plane  125 

I  have  met  from  the  other  side,  one  day  a  man 
asked  me  to  help  him  out  of  hades.  I  said,  In  the 
name  of  God  arise  and  pass  into  a  happier  world/ 
And  as  I  watched,  the  man  looked  up,  his  face 
brightened  as  he  saw  a  gateway  and  with  glori- 
fied countenance  he  passed  through  it.  The  next 
day  two  others  applied  to  me  for  release.  In  a 
few  days  there  was  a  row  of  6  to  12  waiting  for 
me  every  time  I  approached  the  astral-plane.  Did 
I  do  right  in  helping  them  ?" 

Your  whole  trouble  is  that  you  are  the  reincarna- 
tion of  an  old  Atlantean,  and  are  now  working  out 
the  culminating  experiences  of  all  your  past  incarna- 
tions— finishing  up  odds  and  ends  as  it  were.  If  the 
Soul  were  obliged  to  reap  all  the  Karma  in  one  life 
that  it  had  generated  in  the  last  preceding  life  there 
would  be  neither  time  nor  opportunity  for  progress. 
Therefore,  the  Lords  of  Light  hold  back  a  certain  per- 
centage from  each  life,  and  manipulate  the  currents  of 
force  so  that  a  chance  is  given  the  Soul  to  learn  the 
main  lesson  of  the  last  earth  life  and  at  the  same  time 
have  an  opportunity  to  gain  entirely  new  experiences. 
But,  before  final  liberation  can  come,  each  Soul  must, 
of  its  own  choice,  take  up  all  the  accumulated  odds 
and  ends  of  Karma  and  work  them  out  or  redeem 
them.  That  is,  it  must  find  the  germ  of  good  in  each 
experience  and  discard  the  husks  so  that  they  in  their 
turn  may  be  cast  into  the  great  furnace  of  transmuta- 
tion (the  8th  Sphere)  and  be  purified  and  evolve  into 
the  materials,  or  world-stuff,  from  which  future  globes 
will  be  formed. 

The  earth  life  you  are  now  living  is  such  a  culmi- 
nating one.  Your  psychic  experiences  are  due  to  the 
Karma  made  during  your  Atlantean  incarnation.  At 
that  time,  in  common  with  most  of  the  Race,  you 
abused  your  psychic  power  and  began  to  destroy  the 


126  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

coverings  or  oily  sheaths  that  protect  the  vital  centers 
of  the  body,1  and  you  have  not  yet  regained  complete 
mastery  over  them.  This  is  the  great  task  which  you 
must  now  accomplish.  We  realize  your  great  need 
for  help,  and  so  are  glad  that  you  have  frankly  told 
us  your  exact  condition  and  enabled  us  to  give  you 
exact  directions. 

Regarding  your  experience  in  releasing  entities  from 
hades,  all  such  states  are  a  mere  matter  of  conscious- 
ness. From  the  long  continued  teachings  as  to  hell 
and  damnation  there  are  many  departed  Souls  who 
have  died  in  the  firm  belief  that  hell  was  their  por- 
tion. When  they  awoke  upon  the  other  side  they  ex- 
perienced hell;  but  a  hell  of  their  own  creation;  cre- 
ated by  the  thought-forms  of  a  lifetime.  You,  in  al- 
lowing their  belief  to  influence  you,  yet  desiring  to 
help  them,  substituted  a  belief  in  heaven  and  found  it 
easy  to  impose  this  belief  upon  them.  But  it  was  not 
in  any  sense  freeing  them.  It  was  rather  substituting 
one  illusion  for  another  by  hypnotic  suggestion.  More- 
over, you  attached  to  your  Karma  the  necessity  of 
final  true  relief  for  all  whom  you  thus  deluded.  The 
only  real  way  to  help  such  discarnate  entities  whom 
you  find  in  bondage  to  their  thought- forms,  is  to  tell 
them  calmly  and  impressively  that  hell  is  only  a  delu- 
sion; that  no  matter  how  greatly  they  have  sinned  it 
will  all  be  straightened  out  later  on,  as  they  are  able 
to  bear  it,  by  restitution  on  the  plane  where  the  sin 
was  committed;  that  now,  while  they  are  excarnate, 
is  the  time  to  rest  and  gather  strength  to  go  on ;  that 
they  must  recognize  this  and  at  once  seek  out  the 
Teachers  who  are  waiting  to  help  them,  and  from 
Them  learn  how  to  repent  and  make  restitution.  Teach 
them  that  repentance  is  turning  around  and  doing  the 

lScc  chapter  on  Narcotics  in  Th*  Voict  of  I  fit,  Curtis*. 


The  Astral-Plane  127 

square  thing  by  those  whom  they  have  wronged ;  that 
no  amount  of  suffering  in  their  self-created  hell  can 
do  anything  but  retard  their  making  restitution,  and 
hence  their  upward  journey. 

Feb.  5th,  1908. 

"What,  if  anything,  of  comfort  can  you  offer 
for  the  losses  to  the  living  of  the  dead?  I  am 
so  weary  of  not  knowing  that  it  is  better  with 
those  who  are  gone  beyond.  What  can  you  say 
of  it?" 

This  short  period  of  limitation,  mis-called  life,  is 
but  a  veil  hiding  the  Real  Life  from  you.  It  is  as 
though  you  tied  a  bandage  over  your  eyes  during  a 
journey  and  then  denied  the  sunlight  and  the  beauti- 
ful landscape.  Life  is  continuous ;  the  consciousness 
only  recedes  within.  Periodically  the  outer  covering 
(the  physical  body)  is  slipped  off  just  as  you  would 
slip  off  an  old  garment.  The  Soul,  the  Immortal  Ego, 
is  the  Real  Self  which  clothes  itself  with  various  gar- 
ments suitable  to  contact  the  different  spheres  and 
states  of  consciousness.  It  does  this  just  as  you  would 
don  different  garments  for  different  occasions ;  a  fur 
coat'  for  winter,  a  thin  one  for  summer.  Slipping  off 
the  fur  coat  does  not  in  any  way  alter  your  individual- 
ity, even  though  it  does  reveal  your  true  appearance 
more  perfectly.  You  are  the  same  woman  whether 
dressed  in  a  single  garment  or  wrapped  in  many.  So 
it  is  with  the  Real  Self.  At  the  time  of  the  so-called 
death  the  grossest  and  most  hampering  garment,  com- 
parable to  the  fur  coat,  is  slipped  off  and  the  con- 
sciousness is  expanded  and  freer  just  as  you  are  freer 
with  your  fur  coat  off.  You,  when  wrapped  in  your 
fleshly  garments,  are  perhaps  blind  to  the  more  etheric 
and  radiant  garment,  because  of  the  thickness  of  the 
outer;  but  your  loved  ones  know  you  as  you  are. 


128  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

Every  effort  you  make  to  advance  spiritually  helps 
them  more  than  it  does  you,  and  they  in  turn  help 
you.  For  instance,  a  truth  that  might  be  very  hard 
for  you  to  grasp  would  be  quickly  grasped  by  one  who 
was  near  you  yet  unhampered  by  a  fleshly  body.  He 
in  turn  would  bring  all  his  loving  force  to  bear  to  help 
you  to  understand. 

When  persons  pass  from  the  earth  life  their  char- 
acter is  in  no  way  different.  They  know  just  as  much 
as  they  did  before  and  little  more.  The  chief  differ- 
ence is  that  they  are  in  a  different  environment  where 
their  faculties  of  perception  are  keener.  For  instance, 
they  can  sense  thought,  while  those  on  earth  have  to 
wait  for  words.  They  can  see  within  as  well  as  with- 
out, and  can  transport  themselves  from  place  to  place 
by  the  power  of  thought.  Therefore  you  can  well 
understand  that,  passing  into  this  new  phase  of  life 
with  all  the  love  of  their  hearts  concentrated  on  a 
loved  one  still  on  earth,  they  would  not  desire  to  pass 
farther  on  into  higher  spheres,  but  would  stay  close 
to  the  one  they  loved.  And  on  the  psychic-plane  there 
are  Masters  whose  pleasure  it  is  to  teach  all  who  de- 
sire to  learn,  just  as  They  teach  those  who  still  remain 
on  earth. 

April  llth,  1908. 

"I  used  to  have  explosions  in  my  brain,  some 
very  violent,  but  know  of  no  damage  from  them. 
Very  heavy  tremors  have,  and  still  occasionally 
run  through  my  body,  shaking  it  subjectively  just 
as  a  heavy  earthquake  would  shake  the  physical 
body.  Have  had  an  exudation  of  vapor  or  smoke 
from  a  point  at  the  end  of  my  spine,  that 
blackened  the  chairs  I  sat  on.  Vapor  or  mist 
exuded  from  my  eyes  so  much  as  to  moisten  a 
sheet  of  paper  held  an  inch  away.  At  times  the 
vapor  exuded  from  my  wrists.  Can  you  explain 
it?" 


The  Astral-Plane  129 

The  mist  proceeding  from  the  centers  of  your  body 
is  a  danger  signal,  quite  as  dangerous  as  smoke  com- 
ing from  a  rapidly  revolving  axle.  The  tremors  you 
mention  are  merely  contacts  with  the  denizens  of  the 
astral.  Always  challenge  them.  Ask  them  what  they 
want.  Say,  "If  you  come  for  help  I  wish  you  well, 
but  at  present  I  must  guard  and  protect  my  own  body, 
hence,  Begone !  Work  out  your  own  salvation."  If  a 
Master  should  come  to  you  you  will  at  once  know  it 
by  the  wave  of  love  and  joy  that  surrounds  you.  But 
remember  that  insanity  stands  very  close  to  undue  or 
abnormal  development,  and  that  it  is  the  Masters  who 
are  holding  you  back.  They  desire  that  you  should  go 
slow  until  you  can  gain  mastery  over  your  centers; 
for  it  is  just  such  tangled  ends  of  mis-applied  psych- 
ism  that  you  have  now  to  untangle.  It  means  victory 
or  death,  or  say  instead  of  death,  another  long,  long 
cycle  of  rehabiliment  extending  into  the  next  manvan- 
tara.  Your  Father-in-heaven  hath  need  of  you  now. 
The  time  of  times  is  at  hand,  and  you  are  chosen  to  be 
a  Light  Bearer.  Hold  high  your  light  and  be  diligent. 
Clear  away  the  rubbish  that  the  light  may  shine  un- 
impeded. 

March  4th,  1908. 
"I  rejoice  that  admission  and  instruction  in  the 

Order is  a  possibility  for  me 

It  is  a  matter  of  joy  to  me  to  come  in  touch  with 
an  organization  which  is  conducted  on  purely  im- 
personal lines.  The  necessity  for  this  has  been 
impressing  itself  upon  me  for  many  years. 

How  can  we  protect  ourselves  on  the 

astral  plane?" 

You  must  now  understand,  thoroughly  and  practi- 
cally, that  nothing  can  enter  your  aura,  either  asleep 
or  awake,  without  your  consent.  Therefore,  impress 
it  firmly  upon  your  subconscious  mind  that  whenever 


130  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

any  entity,  on  any  plane,  comes  to  you  you  are  always 
to  challenge  it.  Ask,  "Who  are  you?  Are  you  black 
or  white?  What  do  you  want  with  me?  If  you  are 
not  here  for  my  good  I  will  have  nothing  to  do  with 
you."  If  they  hesitate  or  do  not  reply  to  any  of  your 
questions  insist  that  they  do.  Demand  reply  "In  the 
name  of  The  Christ."  It  is  a  law  on  the  astral  that 
all  such  fearless  questions  must  be  answered  truthfully ; 
but  you  must  demand  the  truth.  Anyone  connected 
with  The  Great  White  Lodge  will  be  glad  to  respond 
to  such  challenges  and  you  will  feel  a  thrill  of  joy  and 
confidence  at  the  reply.  Any  others  must  show  their 
real  natures  or  disappear. 

April  llth,  1908. 

"It  appears  to  me  that  I  have  an  accumulated 
inheritance  of  secret  devils,  among  which  stand 
out  prominently  a  hasty  temper,  a  sharp  tongue, 
intellectual  pride,  and  last  but  not  least,  lascivi- 
ous thoughts." 

Hold  the  thought  persistently  in  mind  that  the 
d-evils  you  speak  of  are  the  children  of  your  own 
creation ;  not  mere  characteristics,  but  really  created 
entities  upon  the  mental  and  astral-planes,  entities 
which  you  through  many  lives  have  created.  Being 
your  very  own  you  must  master  them.  But  mastery 
does  not  mean  annihilation;  for  all  that  is  has  within 
it  a  germ  of  good  as  well  as  evil,  and  this  germ  is 
expressed  according  to  the  use  that  is  made  of  it.  In 
fact  evil  is  but  the  shadow  of  good.  It  is  the  work, 
and  the  first  step,  of  every  earnest  seeker  after  free- 
dom to  take  stock,  as  you  have  done,  of  just  what  he 
has  created  out  of  the  God-power  of  creative  force 
given  him  "in  the  beginning"  as  his  most  precious 
possession. 

When  you  have  taken  such  stock,  realize  that  these 
things  are  yours  to  use,  the  weapons  with  which  you 


The  Astral-Plane  131 

must  fight,  the  forces  and  materials  out  of  which  you 
must  build  up  your  immortal  habitation.  Realize 
that  nothing  once  created  can  ever  thereafter  cease  to 
be;  also  that  the  redemption  of  all  through  the  power 
of  The  Christ  must  be  accomplished.  It  is  this  that 
gives  true  individuality  to  each  one ;  for  while  all  are 
one,  yet  each  makes  an  individual  expression  of  the 
One  Life  by  creating  through  the  power  of  his  life- 
force.  Since  all  your  creations  must  be  redeemed 
by  their  creator  all  sorts  of  experiences  are  garnered 
and  stored  up  for  the  One  Life. 

A  hasty  temper  is  like  a  fire ;  put  it  in  a  furnace  and 
it  will  generate  steam  or  force  that  will  run  machinery 
and  accomplish  a  great  work  for  the  world.  A  sharp 
tongue,  controlled,  will  be  a  weapon  that  can  fearlessly 
cut  the  evil  from  the  good ;  its  ruler  is  love.  Intel- 
lectual pride  is  a  dangerous  master,  but  a  wonderfully 
efficient  servant.  Wed  it  to  humility  and  let  love  bless 
the  union.  Lascivious  thoughts  are  astral  lust-bodies 
created  by  the  mis-application  of  the  physical  creative 
fluid;  for  remember  that  that  fluid  always  creates,  if 
not  upon  the  physical-plane  (physical  bodies)  then  up- 
on the  astral,  following  out  the  desires  and  lusts  of  the 
creator.  (See  lesson  on  Purity.1}  Learn  the  holiness 
and  the  sacredness  of  the  sex-forces,  and  send  out 
thoughts  of  love  and  purity  that  will  conquer  and 
transmute  these  creatures  of  lust,  and  take  their  place 
as  helpers  rather  than  hinderers. 

Keep  on  praying ;  but  conciously  assert  your  power, 
through  your  divine  heritage,  to  hold  all  your  d-evils 
subject  to  you.  Chain  them  and  put  them  to  work 
under  the  lash  of  your  purified  Will  until  they  can  be 
transmuted  and  redeemed  by  you,  through  the  power 
of  The  Christ. 

Chapter  XVI,  in  The  Voicg  of  Isis,  Curtiss. 


132  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

May  15th,  1908. 

"My  psychic  experiences  lately  have  been  quite 
frequent.  My  father-in-law  who  has  been  called 
out  of  the  body  seems  to  come  back  and  he  and  I 
always  seem  to  have  a  lot  of  trouble.  He  seems 
bound  to  push  his  way  into  my  presence  causing 
trouble.  This  happens  at  night  and  my  brother- 
in-law  who  was  called  to  pass  on  in  February  last 
comes  and  plays  the  same  kind  of  pranks  to  scare 
children  that  he  did  when  on  earth.  What  shall  I 
do?" 

You  must  learn  to  protect  yourself  on  the  astral- 
plane.  This  is  quite  as  necessary,  or  more  so,  than 
on  the  earth-plane.  Think  of  yourself  as  one  with 
a  glorious  Father-in-heaven  who  is  constantly  shed- 
ding over  you  a  radiant  light.  This  light  is  a  force 
or  flame  coming  from  above,  or  rather  from  within 
your  own  heart  (the  lamp).  But  there  must  be  the 
oil  of  love  and  the  wick  of  truth  and  confidence  and 
trust,  so  the  light  may  shine  forth  in  the  darkness  and 
make  a  ring  of  light  and  force  around  you.  As  far  as 
the  light  can  send  forth  its  rays  you  are  surrounded 
by  a  protective  aura,  and  no  entity  can  penetrate 
within  this  ring  unless  you  open  a  door.  Keep  your 
doors  diligently ;  open  them  only  to  go  forth  carrying 
blessing  and  help  to  all  who  need,  but  shut  them  tight 
against  any  who  would  enter  to  desecrate  the  Holy 
Temple.  Hold  fast  to  the  idea  that  you  desire  nothing 
but  Divine  Wisdom  and  will  admit  nothing  but 
Spiritual  Light.  Study  carefully  the  lesson  on  Nar- 
cotics, Alcohol  and  Psychism.1 

April  llth,  1908. 
"Something   attacked    me    in     three     different 

houses,  here  and  in Would  feel  a  weight 

on  my  chest  as  of    a    large    animal.    With     a 
sense  of  distrust  I  tried  to  mentally  oppose  it, 

1  Chapter  VII  in  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss. 


The  Astral-Plane  133 

only  to  find  that  my  brain  power  was  clogged,  nor 
could  I  open  my  eyes.  After  a  struggle  lasting 
apparently  several  minutes  I  was  able  to  clearly 
formulate  my  thought.  Then  the  ill  presence 
would  disappear.  This  had  happened  a  number 

of  times,  when  one  morning I  had  barely 

closed  my  eyes  when  the  animal  pounced  upon  me. 
I  decided  instead  of  resisting  to  lie  still  and  see 
what  it  would  do.  According  to  its  feel  I  judged 
it  to  be  a  cross  between  a  Newfoundland  dog, 
a  bear  and  a  wolf.  It  wriggled  its  paws  under 
my  back  and  lifted  me  clear  off  the  bed.  I 
thought  it  was  then  time  to  resist,  and  a  ter- 
rific mental  encounter  followed.  Finally  it  ut- 
tered a  horrible  growl  of  disappointment,  using 
my  vocal  organs,  relaxed  its  hold  and  I  dropped 

to  the  bed  with  a  heavy  thud Before 

that  I  several  times  woke  to  find  my  body  and 
arms  covered  with  cuts  and  scratches  which 
would  soon  scab  over  and  scale  off.  What  is 
the  explanation  of  these  attacks?" 

The  beast  you  mention  is  directly  connected  with 
your  old  Atlantean  incarnation.  In  those  days  the 
members  of  that  Race,  having  their  psychic  faculties 
fully  developed  (these  faculties  came  first  and  only 
later,  through  misuse,  hardened  into  the  present  limited 
physical  faculties),  used  them  to  enslave  all  forms  of 
life  below  them.  They  had  beasts  larger  and  quite 
different  from  any  now  known  on  the  earth-plane. 
These  beasts  were  controlled  by  hypnotic  power  and 
were  forced  to  act  as  servants  and  slaves.  As  the 
mind  of  the  human  being  was  imposed  upon  the  ani- 
mal consciousness,  the  animal  became  an  anomaly, 
neither  beast  nor  man.  On  this  account  they  could 
not  proceed  normally  with  their  evolution  through 
the  animal  kingdom,  but  must  wait,  outside  as  it  were, 
attached  to  the  persons  who  were  responsible  for  their 
unnatural  state  until,  through  the  power  of  awakened 


134  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

Will  on  the  part  of  their  sponsors,  such  beasts  are  re- 
leased. 

Such  astral  beasts  from  time  to  time  send  out  emana- 
tions as  it  were,  which  incarnate  on  the  physical-plane 
as  animals.  These  animals  would,  of  course,  be  of  ex- 
traordinary sagacity,  for,  unlike  normal  animals,  they 
would  have  something  akin  to  a  Higher  Self  in  the 
astral  beast  from  which  they  emanated,  and  they  would 
naturally  attach  themselves  to  the  human  being  who 
was  responsible  for  the  astral  beast.  That  is,  through 
these  animal  expressions  the  astral  beast  is  able  to 
gain  the  evolution  of  its  purely  animal  instincts ;  but 
it  must  remain  in  the  astral  and  wait  for  the  man  to 
evolve  its  more  than  animal  wisdom.  Much  depends 
upon  the  treatment  you  give  such  animal  emanations. 
No  doubt  you  have  had  many  attach  themselves  closely 
to  you  on  earth. 

The  beasts  upon  the  astral  are  either  ferocious  and 
vindictive  or  loving  and  protecting  according  to  the 
manner  in  which  they  were  treated  in  the  past.  One 
of  the  sins  for  which  the  ancient  Atlantean  Race  was 
destroyed  was  cohabiting  with  beasts  and  denying  and 
preventing  their  normal  evolution. 

June  16th,   1908. 

"While  experiencing  no  'recoveries'  I  have  seen 
in  part  what  I  have  called  'I.'  And  O  the  horror 
of  it !  I  had  but  a  glimpse  or  two — for  although 
knowing  that  it  was  possible  to  see  all,  I  realized 
that  it  was  dangerous,  in  my  nervous  condition,  to 

try  to  bear  the  strain  of  a  full  revelation 

Since  that  awful  experience  my  whole  outlook 
and  inlook  have  changed.  I  see  mankind — myself 
included — through  different  eye-perceptions." 

The  experience  which  was  so  appalling  to  you  was 
a  momentary  glimpse  of  "The  Dweller  on  the  Thres- 
hold." This  is  the  condensed  essence  as  it  were  of  all 


The   Astral-Plane  135 

the  old  personalities  that  you  have  used  in  other  lives 
and  have  not  yet  conquered,  a  sort  of  a  composite  of  all 
the  left-overs  from  each  life.  At  the  time  of  laying 
aside  the  old  garment  (physical  body)  there  is  always 
a  great  deal  of  evil  that  has  not  been  spiritualized,  and 
this  is  entitized  and  remains  upon  the  kama-lokic  plane 
until  the  Ego  who  gave  it  birth  grows  strong  enough 
to  conquer  it  once  for  all.  It  attaches  itself  to  the 
Ego  at  each  new  incarnation  and  becomes  the  tempter 
of  the  personality — a  personal  devil  to  a  certain  ex- 
tent— but  only  because  it  is  something  that  you  have 
created  which  is  seeking  expression  through  you.  It 
is  a  personal  devil  just  as  the  Higher  Self  may  be 
said  to  be  a  personal  God. 

Before  final  liberation  this  monster  must  be  con- 
sciously met  and  conquered,  i.  e.,  the  evil  that  is  en- 
titized must  be  redeemed  and  spiritualized  by  seeing 
in  oneself  the  faults  that  live  in  this  Dweller  and  over- 
coming them  one  by  one.  It  is  called  "The  Dweller 
on  the  Threshold"  because  when  one  is  determined  to 
live  a  spiritual  life  this  thing  stands  at  the  threshold 
to  be  redeemed  before  the  neophyte  can  go  on.  Very 
often  just  before  taking  an  advanced  step  upward  and 
inward,  or  passing  an  inner  initiation,  this  Dweller 
becomes  visible  to  the  disciple.  It  is  dreadful  be- 
cause, being  created  by  yourself,  there  is  an  inner  con- 
viction that  you,  like  Frankenstein,  are  looking  into 
the  face  of  a  monster  of  your  own  creation  and  you 
are  appalled  at  the  sight  of  your  handiwork.  It  is 
only  the  brave  and  the  steadfast  who  can  look  in  the 
face  and  defy  this  Dweller  in  full  consciousness  of 
their  power  of  The  Christ  to  conquer  and  redeem  it. 
Until  redeemed  it  is  ever  with  you,  seen  or  unseen. 
If  you  have  ever  read  Bulwer  Lytton's  Zanoni  you 
will  remember  that  the  Dweller  was  more  dangerous 


136  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

when  not  seen.  It  is  a  good  thing  to  see  it,  for  then 
your  courage  is  stimulated  to  conquer  it. 

Do  not  be  discouraged;  for  not  only  have  you  a 
Dweller,  but  you  also  have  a  "Guardian  of  the  Thresh- 
old." This  is  built  up  or  created  by  you  out  of  all  your 
aspirations  and  struggles  to  overcome.  Every  time 
you  turn  your  thoughts  toward  spiritual  things  you 
strengthen  this  Guardian  and  withdraw  life  from  the 
Dweller.  This  is  why  it  rights  against  your  spiritual 
growth;  it  is  righting  for  its  life.  Every  fault  faced 
and  overcome  adds  an  arrow  to  the  quiver  of  your 
Guardian.  This  is  the  meaning  of  the  passage  in 
Light  on  the  Path  which  says :  "Stand  aside  in  the 
coming  battle,  and  though  thou  fightest  be  not  thou  the 
warrior.  Look  for  the  warrior  and  let  him  fight  in 
thee.  Obey  him  not  as  though  he  were  a  general,  but 
as  though  he  were  thyself,  and  his  spoken  words  were 
the  utterance  of  thy  secret  desires;  for  he  is  thyself, 
yet  infinitely  wiser  and  stronger  than  thyself."  The 
warrior  is  your  higher  principles  together  with  the 
sum  total  of  your  aspirations  etc.  which  fights  for 
you.  Recognize  that  the  evil  is  but  transitory ;  that 
it  lives  only  until  you  arise  in  your  might,  accept  it 
as  your  own  and  determine  to  redeem  and  transmute 
the  foul  dross  into  pure  gold.  Remember,  nothing  is 
to  be  killed.  "Thou  shalt  not  kill"1  means  more  than 
the  surface  interpretation  generally  given  to  it;  for 
within  every  evil  thing  there  is  the  germ  of  good. 
Find  then  that  germ,  and  water  it  with  love  and  pa- 
tience until  it  grows  and  transforms  the  evil  into  good. 

You  are  quite  right  not  to  expect  or  count  upon 
psychic  experiences ;  but  when  they  come  meet  them 
boldly  and  find  the  lesson  in  them.  Remember  al- 
ways that  you  have  the  power  of  The  Christ  to  con- 

1  See  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss,  Chapter  XXXII. 


The    Astral-Plane  137 

quer  everything  that  comes  to  you.     Use  that  power 
and  fear  not. 

March  3rd,  1908. 

"Mediums  claim  to  see  and  talk  with  those  who 
have  been  gone  as  long  as  40  years.    They  are  not 

happy claim  to  be  'learning.'    Why  do 

not  they  incarnate  again?" 

Those  whom  mediums  contact  who  say  they  have 
been  on  the  astral-plane  for  a  period  of  forty  earth 
years  (a  very  short  period  of  astral  existence)  are 
persons  who  passed  out  with  no  knowledge  of  the 
astral-plane  and  with  great  fear  or  intense  regret  at 
having  to  leave  the  earth-plane.  Moreover,  their 
earth  life  was  probably  such  that  there  is  now  nothing 
in  them  to  attract  them  to  the  Teachers  of  the  astral- 
plane,  hence,  like  so  many  on  the  earth-plane,  they  go 
on  and  on  in  ignorance,  in  spite  of  the  many  sources 
of  enlightenment  all  around  them,  just  as  they  passed 
by  similar  sources  while  on  the  earth-plane.  They 
are  generally  those  who  have  centered  all  their  interests 
on  the  petty  things  of  earth  and  who  had  no  realiza- 
tion of  a  future  life.  Hence  when  they  find  themselves 
minus  a  physical  body,  their  interests  being  wrapped 
up  in  earthly  concerns,  they  cannot  separate  them- 
selves from  earth  conditions  or  find  interest  in  any- 
thing higher.  They  hover  around  their  old  earth 
friends  and  interest  themselves  in  their  old  earth  pur- 
suits. Being  able  to  perceive  their  earth  friends,  they 
are  deeply  grieved  and  unhappy  because  their  earth 
friends  do  not  recognize  them,  and  because  their  place 
on  earth  seems  to  have  been  filled  and  themselves 
forgotten. 

They  do  not  reincarnate  because  ere  they  can  do  so 
they  have  a  considerable  period  to  pass  on  the  astral 
and  higher  planes  assimilating  the  results  of  the  last 


138  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

earth  life,  and  then  a  period  of  rest  analogous  to  sleep 
before  they  are  ready  to  reincarnate.  The  best  way 
to  help  such  persons  is  to  impress  them  with  the  reality 
of  the  plane  on  which  they  find  themselves  and  to 
urge  them  to  seek  out  those  Teachers  and  Guides  who 
can  teach  them  how  to  make  the  best  use  of  their 
time  while  there  and  thus  prepare  for  still  higher 
planes.  There  are  some  who  refuse  to  go  on  until 
they  die  to  that  plane  as  they  did  to  the  earth-plane, 
because  there  is  nothing  in  them  that  attracts  them 
toward  higher  things. 


PART  VI. 
PHENOMENA. 


"If  anyone  think  these  things  incredible,  let  him 
keep  his  opinions  to  himself,  and  not  contradict  those 
who,  by  such  events,  are  incited  to  the  study  of  virtue." 
Josephus. 


Phenomena  141 

PART  VI. 
PHENOMENA. 

June  7th,   1908. 

"One  evening  about  nine  o'clock  I  was  driving 
a  very  gentle  team  hitched  to  a  good  buggy  with 
a  good  harness.  Had  been  driving  most  of  the 
day  and  was  near  home  going  up  an  easy  grade 
in  the  road  at  a  slow  walk,  with  the  traces 
barely  stretched,  till  I  reached  the  top  of  the 
grade,  when  like  a  flash  of  lightning  all  four 
traces  dropped  to  the  ground,  frightened  the  team 
which  ran  away  and  left  me  sitting  in  the  buggy 
surprised.  I  got  the  team  and  found  nothing 
wrong  or  broken  about  the  harness  or  buggy.  I 
know  that  it  was  utterly  impossible  for  any  of 
the  traces  to  have  come  unhooked  of  their  own 
accord.  It  was  a  very  calm,  beautiful  moonlight 
night  with  not  a  breath  of  air  stirring.  It  has 
always  been  a  mystery  to  me  how  this  could  have 
occurred  without  the  intervention  of  some  mys- 
terious power  from  the  other  world.  Can  you 
explain  it?" 

Your  experience  with  the  falling  of  the  traces  is 
what  some  would  call  remarkable,  but  in  reality  it  was 
only  the  work  of  elementals — irresponsible  beings  in 
the  process  of  becoming.  They  can  be  very  mischievous 
at  times,  and  being  without  mind  of  their  own,  swarm 
around  anyone  who  gives  off  enough  psychic  force  for 
them  to  appropriate.  They  are  the  elements  from 
which  human  bodies  will  be  built.  They  have  human 
sub-consciousness,  but  not  self-consciousness,  and  they 
therefore  obey  the  thought  of  humanity  as  a  whole. 
In  the  case  of  their  attaching  themselves  to  a  human 
being  they  obey  his  thought,  even  when  unexpressed, 


142  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

and  are  a  strong  factor  in  thought  power.  In  your 
case  you  were,  no  doubt,  unconsciously  or  sub-con- 
sciously thinking  of  getting  home  and  unharnessing, 
and,  having  very  strong  mental  power,  the  elemental 
force  of  your  thought  took  physical  expression  and  un- 
harnessed then  and  there.  This  is  the  general  ex- 
planation in  most  such  cases ;  for  if  it  were  the  work 
of  any  self-conscious  entity  upon  the  higher  planes 
it  would  have  had  some  meaning  or  reason,  either  as 
a  warning  or  to  prevent  an  imminent  danger.  With 
you  this  was  not  the  case;  in  fact  it  created  danger, 
since  the  team  ran  away. 

It  is  well  to  be  acquainted  with  the  laws  of  the  un- 
seen universe,  for  man  should  be  the  master  of  all 
conditions.  One  capable  of  sending  out  this  force 
powerfully  enough  to  create  a  response  such  as  you 
experienced  would,  if  the  power  were  studied  and 
turned  to  good,  be  able  to  master  and  command  these 
elemental  forces  and  make  them  his  servants  to  help 
him  attain  betterment  for  the  human  race,  rather  than 
mischief  for  himself. 

July  21st,  1908. 

"On  a  number  of  occasions,  after  deep  medita- 
tion on  religious  subjects,  I  have  found  myself 
surrounded  by  a  luminous  ether  which  palpitates 
with  a  strange  energy  unlike  anything  I  have 
observed  in  any  manifestation  of  nature." 

The  luminous  ether  you  speak  of  is  often  the  astral 
light.  At  other  times  it  is  the  thought-force  from  the 
Teachers  who  are  sending  into  your  aura  the  Light 
of  Wisdom  in  an  effort  to  awaken  in  you  a  responsive 
vibration  that  shall  make  you  consciously  realize 

Their  presence  and  grasp  Their  teachings The 

Masters  know  what  lessons  They  have  been  trying  to 
impart,  but  They  cannot  tell  how  the  lesson  has  been 


Phenomena  143 

interpreted  by  your  physical  consciousness  unless  you 
report  what  conception  you  brought  back  on.  waking. 

March  18th,  1908. 

"Yesterday  in  meditation  I  challenged  a  per- 
sistent influence  within  my  consciousness,  when 
suddenly  with  my  eyes  closed,  I  saw  at  quite  a 
distance  a  figure  appear  wrapped  in  a  dark  mantle 
with  what  looked  like  rays  of  light  extending  in 
all  directions  around  his  head.  It  did  not  advance 
or  make  any  movement,  and  gradually  faded 

away ..What  you  write  of  the  'ring  of 

force,'  the  'Ring-Pass-Not,'  is  very  clear  and 
helpful  to  me.  I  have  studied  it  carefully  and 
feel  that  it  is  a  sure  protection  of  which  I  gladly 

avail  myself I  shall  faithfully  apply  your 

instructions  in  regard  to  it." 

One  thing  to  keep  in  mind  is  that  no  Master  will 
ever  enter  within  the  "Ring-Pass-Not"  unless  especi- 
ally invited.  He  may  send  force  to  help  you,  may 
knock  at  the  door,  but  He  will  not  enter  without  your 
express  desire.  The  law  is  much  like  that  of  the 
physical-plane;  for  no  right  minded  person  will  enter 
the  closed  door  of  a  private  apartment  without  in- 
vitation or  permission.  In  this  case  no  evilly  disposed 
entity  can  enter  the  "ring"  any  more  than  a  thief  can 
enter  a  securely  locked  apartment.  If  this  rule  were 
not  rigidly  followed  there  would  be  no  privacy  on  the 
higher  planes.  This  is  the  reason  for  the  saying  found 
in  the  Bible  that  no  busybodies  can  enter  the  Kingdom ; 
for  while  there  is  the  slightest  curiosity  or  desire  to 
pry  into  another's  business  one  is  debarred  from  func- 
tioning on  the  higher  planes.  The  entity  who  ap- 
proached you  was  not  invited  to  enter,  therefore  he 
retired. 


144  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

May  7th,  1908. 

"Why  should  I  be  sensitive  to  elemental  forces 
that  may  or  may  not  be  aware  of  my  existence? 
Why  should  I  fear  them  ?  I  am  always  most  un- 
comfortably sensitive  to  atmospheric  conditions 
before  a  storm,  but  when  snow  is  falling  I  have 
a  feeling  of  calmness.  Why?  Also  please  tell 
me  about  color  vision.  To  me  it  is  divided  into 
color  knowing  and  color  seeing,  the  first  being  a 
much  higher  faculty  than  the  second.  The  only 
colors  I  ever  see  are  those  that  come  in  the  night 
just  before  sleeping.  Great  soft  clouds  of  beauti- 
ful light,  mainly  blue.  Why  on  earth  blue? 
When  as  an  earth  color  it  does  not  attract  me 
much." 

Sensitive  persons  are  always  more  or  less  oppressed 
with  vague  fears  during  a  wind  storm  because  the 
elementals  of  the  air  (Sylphs),  of  all  the  elementals, 
act  with  the  greatest  malignity  toward  mankind. 
While  they  are  on  the  rampage  a  sensitive  feels  their 
malignant  force.  The  elementals  imprisoned  in  the 
snow  crystals,  on  the  contrary,  are  kind  and  benign. 

Blue  being  the  color  of  the  mental-plane,  naturally, 
when  functioning  on  that  plane  you  see  blue — a  very 
intense,  beautiful,  indigo  blue  unlike  any  shade  on  the 
physical-plane.  The  "color  knowing"  of  which  you 
speak  is  commonly  classed  as  the  "sixth  sense,"  but 
it  is  merely  the  functioning  of  one  of  the  five  senses 
on  the  higher  plane,  not  a  new  sense.  It  is  by  no 
means  spiritual,  but  simply  a  faculty  developed  a  little 
in  advance  of  the  general  run  of  human  senses.  It 
will  be  the  heritage  of  the  sixth  sub-race,  and  is  now 
beginning  to  make  itself  known.  That  is,  we  have 
now  reached  the  point  where  the  fifth  and  sixth  sub- 
races  blend  and  overlap;  for  you  know  there  are 
no  hard  and  fast  lines,  but,  like  the  colors  of  the 
rainbow,  one  blends  into  the  other. 


Phenomena  145 

As  to  your  various  psychic  sensations,  they  are  quite 
easily  understood.  If  you  could  enter  into  the  con- 
sciousness of  a  newly  born  babe  you  would  find  that 
its  physical  experiences  were  very  similar.  It  would 
be  conscious  of  a  bright  light,  but  would  not  be  able 
to  grasp  the  meaning  of  it.  Forms  would  come  and 
go  like  phantoms,  and  scraps  of  conversation,  prob- 
ably not  understood — altho  not  necessarily  so — would 
be  heard.  Colors  would  be  sensed  and  would  have 
a  decided  effect  upon  both  feeling  and  seeing.  A  babe 
spends  most  of  its  time  sleeping,  during  which  it  is  on 
the  astral-plane,  with  only  fleeting  periods  of  physical 
consciousness — its  waking  moments.  It  finds  its  brain 
quite  unable  to  grasp  the  meaning  of  what  goes  on 
around  it,  and  the  effort  to  fix  its  mind  upon  anything 
sends  it  off  to  sleep — back  to  the  astral  consciousness. 
You  are  a  babe  upon  the  astral,  that  is  all — quite  a 
precocious  one  in  fact.  If  you  wish  to  know  how  to 
grow  up,  follow  the  example  of  the  infant  in  its  various 
steps  toward  comprehension  of  earthly  objects. 

May  18th,  1908. 

"I  want  to  know  all  I  can  be  given  about  color. 
Color  has  always  played  a  most  vital  part  in  my 
conscious  thought  life.  From  earlier  childhood 
everything,  words,  persons,  days,  numbers  and 
events  have  all  had  their  corresponding  color  by 
which  I  knew  them  better  than  by  any  other 
way." 

The  innate  meaning  of  everything  is  expressed  in 
color,  tone  and  form.  The  form  we  observe  with 
our  physical  eyes,  the  color  with  the  psychic  senses. 
Tone  belongs  to  the  creative  hierarchy,  hence  a  strong 
reason  for  modulating  and  harmonizing  even  the  tones 
of  the  voice.  While  all  color  is  the  natural  result 
or  effect  of  tone ;  from  another  point  of  view  it  is  the 


146  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

result  or  effect  of  form.  Hence  nothing  can  have  a 
form  without  a  color,  nor  tone  without  color,  nor  either 
without  the  other.  If  you  would  follow  this  inspiring 
line  of  study,  one  for  which  your  natural  development 
fits  you,  you  would  find  all  creation  an  open  book.  Its 
alphabet  is  written  in  four  letters,  i.  e.,  form,  color, 
tone  and  number.  Not  a  herb  that  grows  but  pro- 
claims aloud,  in  unmistakable  language,  its  exact  use, 
power  and  potency.  This  is  as  true  of  the  stars  in 
heaven,  in  fact  of  everything  in  humanity  and  in  the 
cosmos.  Verily,  to  the  eye  that  can  behold  and  to  the 
ear  that  can  hear  there  is  nothing  hid  that  shall  not  be 
revealed. 

June  2nd,  1908. 

"In  my  visions  landscapes  always  look  perfectly 
natural ;  even  when  everything  is  in  the  lights 
and  shadows  of  flaming  yellow,  everything  is 
bathed  in  a  glow  of  yellow  light." 

Yellow  pertains  to  the  soul-plane,  and  a  vision  tinged 
with  this  color  should  be  interpreted  as  pertaining  to 
the  Soul  or  Ego.  Violet  is  the  plane  of  the  spiritual 
auric  envelope,  it  being  blue  on  the  physical-plane. 
Violet  is  also  the  color  of  the  astral  body.  It  is  the 
highest  color  and  means  suffering  only  when  de- 
graded and  debased  and  forced  to  reflect  itself  in 
physical  matter.  It  varies  all  the  way  from  deep  vio- 
let described  above  to  pure  white,  indicating  pure,  un- 
trammeled  Spirit.  Orange  is  the  color  of  the  life- 
force,  and  according  to  the  degree  of  its  lightening 
up  into  golden  radiance  does  it  indicate  spiritual  life, 
or  physical  life  if  there  is  an  interblending  of  colors. 

March  8th,  1908. 

"One  day  not  long  ago  I  was  walking  down 
Walnut  Street  when  I  appeared  to  be  preceded 
by  a  purple  patch  of  light.  I  thought  at  first  it 


Phenomena  147 

must  be  an  optical  illusion,  but  closing  and  open- 
ing my  eyes  at  intervals  and  still  seeing  the  light, 
even  with  my  eyes  shut,  it  made  me  think  it  might 
have  some  occult  significance,  hence  my  mention- 
ing it  to  you." 

The  light  which  you  saw  was  the  light  of  the  astral- 
plane,  violet  being  its  most  prominent  color.  If  it  was 
dark  in  hue  it  might  have  proceeded  from  a  passional 
element  in  your  own  aura ;  but  if  it  was  dark  and  clear 
and  rich,  and  a  true  shade,  it  would  probably  represent 
passion  made  as  holy  as  earth-love  could  make  it.  For 
you  know  purple  is  a  mixture  of  red  and  blue,  and  it 
is  only  by  a  perfect  blending  of  these  two,  in  purity 
and  love,  that  gives  the  highest  color  of  the  spectrum 
— violet,  at  which  point  the  highest  attainment  of  man 
is  reached.  Man  must  follow  the  path  of  the  pure 
spectrum  colors  and  create  a  pure,  rich,  perfect  purple 
before  he  can  enter  into  a  higher  state  where  violet — 
which  is  red  purified  and  enlightened — will  prevail. 

May  30th,  1908. 
"I  want  to  ask  for  the  explanation  of  much  of 

the  electricity  that  I  see It  shows  itself 

as  an  intense  brightness — or  even  sudden  contact 
with  a  physical  object  gives  me  a  flash  all  over." 

It  may  be  the  result  of  several  causes.  The  most 
probable  is  that  you  are  developing  the  sense  of  touch 
on  the  astral.  If  this  sense  were  understood  and 
trained  it  would  make  you  aware  of  forces  within  as 
well  as  without.  Contact  with  the  aura  of  an  object 
carelessly  touched  would  be  just  as  tangible  as  the 
striking  of  your  body  against  a  hard  physical  sub- 
stance is  to  your  physical  senses. 


PART  VII. 
DREAMS  AND  VISIONS. 

"And  they  said  unto  him,  we  have  dreamed  a  dream, 
and  there  is  no  interpreter  of  it.  And  Joseph  said 
unto  them,  Do  not  interpretations  belong  to  God?  tell 
me  them,  I  pray  you."  Genesis  XL,  8. 

"And  Pharaoh  said  unto  Joseph,  I  have  dreamed  a 

dream,  and  there  is  none  that  can  interpret  it 

And  Joseph  answered  Pharaoh,  saying,  It  is  not  in  me : 
God  shall  give  Pharaoh  an  answer  of  peace/'  Genesis 
XLI,  15-16. 


Dreams  and  Visions  151 

PART  VII. 
DREAMS  AND  VISIONS. 

May  30th,  1908. 

"Will  the  Teacher  of  the  Order  help  me  to  a 
fuller  understanding  of  the  very  definite  psychical 
experience  that  has  come  to  me  during  the  last 
few  years?" 

We  will  most  gladly  help  you  to  an  understand- 
ing of  the  psychic  experiences  you  mention,  but  in 
order  to  do  this  it  is  necessary  that  you  tell  us  just 
what  the  experiences  were.  The  Masters  know  just 
what  lessons  your  Higher  Self  has  been  making  an 
effort  to  impress  upon  your  brain  consciousness,  but, 
as  in  all  such  cases,  the  transmission  of  the  higher 
teaching  depends  upon  how  much  the  lower  brain- 
mind  is  capable  of  receiving  and  translating  into  physi- 
cal consciousness.  A  study  of  psychology  will  teach 
you  that  the  brain-mind  can  grasp  nothing  of  which 
the  picture,  or  at  least  some  idea,  has  not  been  reg- 
istered within  it  by  stimuli  reaching  it  through  some 
avenue  of  perception.  Hence,  since  the  language  of 
the  spiritual-plane  is  incomprehensible  to  the  mortal 
mind,  the  Higher  Self  has  to  make  use  of  symbology 
— in  other  words,  has  to  make  use  of  pictures  of  every- 
day events  with  which  the  brain-mind  is  stored — to  con- 
vey the  desired  lesson.  The  consciousness  of  each  Soul 
is  a  private  book  open  only  to  the  Higher  Self  who  is 
giving  the  instructions.  Therefore,  while  the  general 
character  of  the  lessons  may  be  known,  we  do  not 
know  the  particular  one  given  at  a  particular  time. 
Hence,  if  you  will  tell  us  exactly  what  you  were  able 


152  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

to  remember  of  any  lesson,  we  will  gladly  interpret  it 
for  you. 

This  is  the  explanation  of  all  coherent  dreams,  as 
well  as  signs  and  omens.  Simply  some  common  thing 
which  the  brain-mind  will  understand  is  pictured  to 
you  so  that,  by  analogy,  "as  above,  so  below,"  you 
may  grasp  the  underlying  divine  truth. 

Jan.  27th,  1908. 

"Sometimes  during  sleep  I  seem  to  comprehend 
that  a  message  is  sent  me  by  another,  and  at  times 
I  feel  that  I  am  sending  myself  a  message " 

It  would  seem  that  you  have  brought  back  with  you, 
in  a  fragmentary  way,  impressions  from  the  spiritual- 
plane  clothed  in  physical  symbology.  However,  your 
impression  of  having  received  messages  from  higher 
sources  is  quite  correct.  You  have  also  given  your- 
self messages,  for,  during  sleep  the  Higher  Self,  who 
is  one  with  the  Supreme,  is  the  Captain  in  Command 
as  it  were,  and  is  always  trying  to  impress  upon  you 
the  teachings  that  are  your  birthright.  The  best  way 
to  remember  these  lessons  is  to  try  to  identity  your 
lower  consciousness  with  the  Divine  in  you.  Deter- 
mine that  you  will  become  what  you  really  are  on  the 
higher  planes — a  Divine  Emanation,  of  which  your 
lower  self  is  but  the  instrument,  but  one  which  must 
be  tuned  up  to  the  key-note  of  the  Divine  in  order 
that  the  necessary  lessons  may  be  impressed  upon 
your  physical  brain.  It  is  very  much  like  wireless 
telegraphy.  The  force  is  sent  out,  but  unless  the  re- 
ceiver is  attuned  to  the  key-note  of  the  sender,  the 
vibrations  cannot  be  received.  The  physical  must 
register  the  Divine,  and  in  doing  so  it  has  to  make  use 
of  the  pictures  that  it  finds  in  the  physical  brain.  This 
is  why  you  can  come  into  conscious  touch  with  the 
Masters,  or  with  your  Higher  Self,  only  when  you 


Dreams  and  Visions  153 

have  attuned  your  mind  and  life  to  Their  plane  and 
can  understand  Their  language;  for  there  must  be 
something  upon  which  to  register  and  a  language  or 
means  of  communication  whose  meaning  you  can 
grasp. 

June  17th,  1908. 

"Two  dreams  made  a  great  impression  on  me. 
The  first  one,  when  I  was  in  my  native  country 

happened  when  I  was  about  18  years 

old.  I  dreamed  that  I  was  traveling  on  foot 
through  fields  and  solitary,  deserted  countries, 
through  snow  and  ice.  I  was  tired  and  footsore 
and  hungry.  At  each  step  I  stumbled  and  fell. 
I  was  discouraged  and  despondent,  yet  I  tried  to 
keep  on  moving,  going,  going  without  end. 

"The  second  dream  I  had  about  13  years  ago 
when  I  began  to  investigate  spiritualism.  I 
dreamed  that  I  was  introduced,  i.  e.,  brought  to, 
Jesus,  who  sat  in  a  small  room  bare  of  any  fur- 
niture except  a  plain  wooden  judge's  chair  with  a 
straight  back,  on  which  He  sat  all  clad  in  a  white 
robe  of  ancient  style.  He  was  there  alone.  A 
man  with  a  flowing  beard,  bareheaded,  clad  in 
ancient  apostolic  dress,  carrying  a  long  staff, 
brought  me  before  Jesus.  But  Jesus  looked  very 

sternly  and  would  not  accept  me The 

purpose  I  was  brought  to  Jesus  I  understood 
was  to  be  initiated  into  a  secret  lodge." 

Your  first  dream  was  an  out-picturing  of  the  very 
attitude  and  experiences  that  you  are  now  passing 
through.  The  cold,  ice-bound  country  over  which  you 
stumbled  so  foot-sore  and  weary,  yet  with  the  deter- 
mination to  keep  on  going,  is  your  present  condition. 
You  have  stuck  doggedly  to  it  in  spite  of  discourage- 
ment and  it  has  now  brought  you  to  a  House  of  Rest 
where  we  bid  you  stay  and  consider  the  way  you  have 
come,  and  henceforth  walk  without  stumbling  over  the 
hillocks  of  ice,  and  draw  near  to  the  streams  of  love 


154  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

that  will  manifest  to  you  the  moment  you  open  your 
heart  to  receive  them. 

Your  second  dream  was  also  most  significant,  and  in 
another  way  warned  you  of  the  stumbling  blocks 
which  you  should  avoid.  Once  more  are  you  brought, 
by  the  same  guide,  into  the  presence  of  The  Christ  for 
judgment.  But  this  time  it  is  not  a  mere  prefigur- 
ing, but  an  actual  working  out  of  the  dream.  You 
stand  today  in  that  empty  Hall  of  Initiation,  empty  of 
everything  but  your  own  Soul  and  your  Judge.  No 
failure  of  another  can  excuse  you.  The  Judge  asks, 
"Brother,  are  you  ready  to  stand  alone  and  naked  for 
judgment?  What  has  your  own  Soul  to  answer?" 
The  answer  is  breathlessly  awaited. 

This  Order  is  the  outward  manifestation  of  the 
secret  Lodge  into  whose  outer  courts  you  will  enter  if 
you  pass  your  initiation.  When  the  main  question 
is  answered  all  will  come  about  well.  You  are  not 
forgotten  or  lost  in  the  icy  world,  but  a  hand  strong 
and  warm  is  reaching  out  to  you.  Will  you  take  it? 

Feb.  27th,  1908. 

"I  was  shown  a  full  moon  in  the  heavens,  then 
three  sunrises  in  succession,  but  the  sun  did  not 
fully  rise." 

Your  vision  of  the  full  moon  and  the  sunrises  was 
very  significant  of  the  teachings  that  are  promulgated 
through  this  Order.  The  moon  symbolizes  intuition, 
also  the  feminine  principle.  To  enter  the  real  Order 
of  the  15,  up  to  which  these  lessons  lead,  you  will 
have  to  cultivate  those  principles,  for  this  Order  rep- 
resents the  full  status  of  true  womanhood.  The  sun, 
the  orb  of  day,  the  Prometheus  Fire,  was  rising  and 
filling  the  world  with  glory,  yet  the  moon  (Luna, 
Queen  of  Night,  the  occult  or  unmanifested  side  of 
life)  was  full  and  was  shining  undimmed.  The  three 


Dreams  and  Visions  155 

sunrises  while  Luna  still  shone  have  a  deep  meaning 
and  refer  to  a  period  of  time.  This,  however,  is  a 
purely  personal  matter  which  you  will,  no  doubt,  un- 
derstand. The  whole  dream  was  an  effort  of  your 
Higher  Self  to  impress  upon  your  brain  conscious- 
ness some  conception  of  the  important  era  that  is  now 
about  to  dawn  for  you. 

June  18th,  1908. 

"One  day  last  summer  while  resting  with  eyes 
closed  I  had  a  vision.  A  bunch  of  sunflowers 
encircled  by  beautiful  hands  was  held  out  to  me. 
This  picture  gradually  dissolved  and  violets  ap- 
peared, surrounded  with  green  leaves." 

Sunflowers  bring  to  you  the  force  of  the  sun.  They 
are  also  symbolic  of  faith  and  trust  and  steadfastness ; 
for  they  are  always  turning  a  smiling  face  to  the  burn- 
ing sun,  no  matter  how  fierce  its  rays.  They  ex- 
emplify the  words  of  Job,  "Though  he  slay  me,  yet 
will  I  trust  him."  Violets  bring  sweet  peace  and  rest 
and  modest  content  and  a  willingness  to  do  the  duty 
that  lies  nearest  at  hand  in  love  and  patience. 


PART  VIII. 
HEALTH  AND  DISEASE. 

"All  diseases,  except  such  as  come  from  mechani- 
cal causes  have  an  invisible  origin,  and  of  such  sources 

popular  medicine  knows  very  little There 

is  a  great  difference  between  the  power  that  removes 
the  invisible  causes  of  disease,  and  which  is  Magic, 
and  that  which  causes  merely  external  effects  to  dis- 
appear, and  which  is  Psychic,  Sorcery,  and  Quackery." 
Paracelsus. 


Health  and  Disease  159 

PART  VIII. 
HEALTH  AND  DISEASE. 

April  27th,  1908. 

"Have  arrived  at  a  stage  of  development  where 
I  need  the  guidance  and  help  of  one  who  knows, 
and  can  tell  me  what  to  do  to  correct  the  suffer- 
ing. Can  neither  sit,  stand  nor  lie  down,  but 
what  1  am  conscious  of  pain  along  the  whole 
length  of  the  spinal  cord." 

We  sympathize  with  you  in  your  suffering  and  de- 
sire to  help  you.  Take  the  Healing  Prayer1  as  your 
daily  companion.  That  is,  do  not  merely  repeat  it, 
but  take  it  with  you  in  your  heart  and  repeat  it  word 
by  word.  Meditate  upon  each  word  until  the  real 
meaning  and  the  strength  becomes  a  part  of  you. 
Dwell  upon  it  until  even  the  sub-consciousness  of  the 
cells  of  your  body  begin  to  take  up  the  wonderful 
vibrations  of  the  healing  force,  and  the  Divine  Power 
of  Omnipotent  Life  finds  a  channel  through  which  it 
can  flow  unimpeded  in  healing  streams  through  all 
your  bodies.  First,  picture  to  yourself  for  at  least  a 
day,  or  longer  if  you  cannot  make  it  a  reality  in  that 
time,  the  Master  Jesus.  Think  of  Him  as  a  man  who 
has  obtained  mastery  over  physical  forces  and  who 
especially  understands  the  manipulation  of  and  corre- 
lation with  the  One  Life.  Think  of  Him  as  standing 
at  the  head  of  the  great  Hierarchy  of  Healing,  all- 
powerful  and  full  of  Wisdom,  knowing  the  lessons  of 
suffering  and  the  necessity  of  having  the  body  adjust 
itself  to  the  higher  vibrations;  knowing  that  suffer- 
ing is  the  result  of  ignorance  as  to  just  how  to  bring 

1See  Appendix. 


160  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

about  the  readjustment.  This  readjustment  is  often 
learned  only  after  many  lives  of  suffering;  but  it  is  a 
lesson  that  all  must  learn.  Then  think  of  Him  as  a 
loving,  tender,  helpful  Master  whose  high  office  and 
loving  desire  it  is  to  help  His  children  in  making 
their  readjustment;  who  is  waiting  and  watching  in 
patience,  and  in  love  that  passeth  understanding,  to 
stretch  out  His  hands  to  all  who  cry  unto  Him  aright. 
The  mere  desire  for  physical  relief  is  not  enough. 
There  must  be  a  realization  of  what  pain  is  and  why 
you  suffer.  If  you  cannot  find  such  a  realization,  then 
a  cry  for  light  and  understanding  will  bring  it  to  you. 
The  cry  should  not  be  to  take  away  the  pain,  but  to 
teach  you  the  lessons  of  pain.  Ask  with  all  your 
heart  and  know  full  well  that  the  love  which  suffers 
with  you,  knowing  that  you  must  conquer  through 
knowledge,  is  only  too  eager  to  help  you.  Believe 
that  your  Father  sees  you  while  you  are  yet  a  great 
way  off,  and  goes  forth  to  meet  you.  The  new  robe 
of  health  and  purity  is  awaiting  you  and  the  feast  is 
spread. 

In  this  way,  sentence  by  sentence,  go  over  the 
Prayer  taking  a  new  sentence  each  day,  and  verily, 
verily,  when  you  have  grasped  the  meaning  of  it  all  the 
new  life  will  be  yours.  But  remember  that  all  spiritual 
force  must  enter  the  physical  body  from  the  spiritual 
body  and  after  thoroughly  refreshing  and  rejuvenat- 
ing the  astral  body  it  will  find  expression  in  the  phys- 
ical. Hence  no  real  healing  of  physical  ills  can  be 
effectual  until  a  correlation  is  made  with  the  One  Life. 
By  correlation  is  meant  free  and  unimpeded  communi- 
cation with  and  circulation  of  spiritual  life  through  all 
your  bodies,  so  that  the  Will  of  the  Father  is  done  on 
earth  even  as  it  is  in  heaven. 


Health  and  Disease  161 

May  llth,  1908. 

"I  am  now  entering  a  fast  which,  by  the  intui- 
tions at  its  finish,  brings  to  me  or  brings  me  into 
those  Christ-powers  to  attain  which  each  Neo- 
phyte enters  the  Path." 

We  would  warn  you  against  any  process  of  forcin;- 
your  psychic  development,  such  as  fasting  and  the  like, 
with  the  expectation  of  thus  securing  so-called 
"Christ-powers."  The  only  way  to  really  secure  The 
Christ-power  is  to  live  The  Christ-life  and  let  the 
powers  develop  themselves  in  a  natural  way  as  the  re- 
sult of  duty  well  done,  love  and  supreme  devotion 
and  attention  to  your  daily  duties.  Any  abnormal 
growth  which  would  apparently  result  from  fasting 
(except  under  very  exceptional  circumstances,  which 
are  not  present  in  your  case)  would  be  but  a  mush- 
room growth,  the  result  of  weakness  and  hysteria,  not 
strength.  Especially  would  this  be  true  if  at  such  a 
time  the  duties  of  your  life  called  for  all  your  physi- 
cal strength  to  fulfill  them  properly,  and  while  your 
husband  and  family  were  making  just  demands  upon 
your  physical  powers. 

The  real  Christ-power  comes  as  a  conqueror  of  all 
experiences.  It  is  a  perfect  atom  given  into  your 
keeping;  and  there  must  be  a  sound,  strong  body. 
The  physical  must  be  conquered  and  controlled,  not 
killed  out.  And  it  must  be  taught  through  the  power 
of  The  Christ  and  not  through  fasting.  Everything 
that  you  crush  out  and  weaken  must  be  taken  up  again 
and  again  until  you  do  your  full  duty  by  it.  If  you 
develop  your  mental  or  psychic  or  spiritual  faculties 
at  the  expense  of  the  physical,  you  must  incarnate 
again,  but  with  a  poor,  weak  physical  body  which 
will  tie  you  down  to  earth,  while  the  strong  mental, 
psychic  or  spiritual  powers  developed  prematurely 


162  Letters  From  the   Teacher 

long  to  be  free  to  follow  their  higher  dictates.  This 
is  the  Law,  my  child,  and  in  love  I  must  warn  you. 
There  is  no  step  too  common  to  take,  for  each  has  its 
lesson  or  it  would  not  be  given  you.  To  neglect  one 
step  means  to  come  back  later  and  take  it  up,  per- 
haps all  alone.  If  you  break  down  or  lessen  your 
physical  health  and  thus  fail  in  your  full  duty  to  your 
husband  and  child,  when  you  return  to  go  over  the 
lesson  again  you  may  have  not  only  a  weak,  miserable 
body,  but  you  may  be  deprived  of  a  husband's  love  and 
a  child's  care;  for  that  which  we  fail  to  fully  appre- 
ciate the  Great  Law  removes  from  us.  This  is  the 
kindest  way,  and  the  only  way,  to  teach  us.  The 
Great  Law  works  on,  and  it  matters  not  whether  you 
fail  because  you  believed  the  Christ-powers  could  be 
gained  by  fasting  or  not.  Your  duty  is  to  walk  side 
by  side  with  your  husband  in  strength  and  love;  to 
be  a  help-mate  to  him  on  all  planes,  physical  as  well 
as  mental  and  spiritual.  You  have  already  found 
The  Christ  within,  then  remember  that  The  Christ- 
follower  is  faithful  in  everything,  the  little  daily  tasks 
as  well  as  the  great  ones. 

At  all  times  live  and  eat  abstemiously,  but  so  that 
the  physical  body  is  properly  nourished,  and  give  as 
little  thought  to  it  as  possible.  By  this  means  you  will 
find  it  much  easier  to  dwell  in  the  higher  realms.  The 
animal  nature,  to  be  the  servant  of  the  Real  Self,  must 
be  well  taken  care  of,  well  fed,  well  groomed  and 
comfortable,  but  not  over-fed  or  indulged.  Thus 
taken  care  of  the  animal  will  do  far  better  work  and 
make  far  fewer  demands  than  one  that  is  starved  or 
ill-treated.  You  need  the  animal  for  your  servant, 
you  need  all  its  powers  in  their  best  possible  condition. 
Therefore,  treat  it  as  you  would  any  other  finely  bred 


Health  and  Disease  163 

animal  of  which  you  expected  great  intelligence  and 
great  service. 

Those  who  spend  much  thought  on  what  they  shall 
not  eat  are  dwelling  in  the  stable  with  the  animal 
just  as  surely  as  those  who  spend  great  thought  upon 
what  they  shall  eat.  The  Great  Master  Jesus  said: 
"Take  no  thought  what  ye  shall  eat,  nor  wherewithal 
ye  shall  be  clothed ;  for  your  heavenly  Father  knoweth 
ye  have  need  of  all  these  things."  This  means  literally 
to  get  along  with  as  little  thought  on  these  matters  as 
is  consistent  with  keeping  the  animal  in  good  working 
condition.  Make  yourself  pleasant  to  the  eye,  neat 
and  comfortable,  then  waste  no  more  time  about  it  or 
in  worrying  over  it.  One  who  dresses  in  sack-cloth 
and  ashes  and  lives  on  bread  and  water,  often  thinks 
more  of  that  dressing  and  eating  and  drinking  than  a 
comfortable  liver.  Such  things  engender  spiritual 
pride,  and  of  all  vices  spiritual  pride  is  the  worst. 
It  is  the  most  detrimental  to  the  Soul's  advance  be- 
cause the  hardest  to  cure. 

May  19th,  1908. 
"I  have  been  quite  ill  again,  and  I  should  like 

to  know  just  what  is  the  cause  of  it 

and    what   to    do    to   avoid   these    spells    in   the 

future." 

We  will  try  to  give  you  an  understanding  of  the 
conditions  in  your  case.  You  have  taken  a  decided 
step  upward  and  are  feeling  the  change  of  vibrations. 
All  life  is  due  to  vibrations  emanating  from  the  great, 
pulsating  Heart  of  the  Unmanifested.  Conceive  of 
the  pulsations  as  coming  from  the  center  of  a  circle 
and  radiating  outward  to  the  circumference.  Draw 
seven  concentric  circles  and  each  one  will  represent  a 
step  inward  toward  the  center.  In  each  the  vibrations 
will  become  faster  and  faster,  finer  and  finer,  for 


164  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

naturally  they  slow  down  as  they  get  farther  and  far- 
ther away  from  their  source,  being  slowest  on  the 
outer  rim — the  physical-plane.  Therefore,  a  body  at- 
tuned to  the  vibrations  of  the  physical-plane  would  be 
subjected  to  great  strain  when  indrawn  to  where  the 
vibrations  were  more  rapid.  This  is  so  true  that  if  a 
sudden  jump  were  possible  instant  disintegration 
would  result.  At  every  step  taken  by  the  Soul  there 
must  be  a  readjustment  of  the  particles  of  the  various 
bodies  until  they  all  harmonize  with  the  vibratory  unit 
of  the  step.  This  often  results  in  physical  illness  and. 
if  not  understood,  the  neophyte  is  apt  to  grow  dis- 
couraged and  think  he  is  growing  worse  rather  than 
better.  But  when  understood  it  is  no  more  alarming 
or  unreasonable  than  that  an  eruptive  disease  should 
first  have  to  reach  its  crisis  before  a  cure  could  be  ef- 
fected; it  is  all  a  part  of  the  cure.  You  have  asked 
that  the  Lord  of  Health  shall  lay  His  hands  upon  you, 
and  you  must  understand  that  your  request  is  being 
literally  fulfilled.  But  all  that  is  evil  must  be  cleansed  ; 
all  our  sins,  omissions  and  misapplications  of  the  Law 
of  Health  must  first  be  readjusted  ere  we  can  be  filled 
with  "Life  and  Love  and  Purity."  This  is  the  only 
rationale  of  healing  and  is  recognized  by  all  regular 
schools  of  medicine.  We  so  often  forget  that  there 
is  but  one  Law.,  "as  above,  so  below."  You  must 
recognize  and  realize  that  the  Divine  Healer,  rep- 
resented by  the  Master  Jesus,  is  present  with  you 
and  has,  at  your  request,  laid  His  hands  (powers) 
upon  you.  So  be  still,  and  patiently  trust  and  love  and 
believe  that  every  step  all  the  way  through  is  but  a 
step  toward  the  great,  pulsating  Heart  of  Love  which 
is  Life  and  Health  and  Immortality.  You  can  retard 
or  accelerate  this  readjustment  by  your  attitude  of 


Health  and  Disease  165 

mind  exactly  as  a  patient  can  help  or  hinder  a  physi- 
cian in  his  physical  cure. 

Jan.  23rd,  1908. 

"I  have  made  little  progress  in  occult  studies. 
In  one  sense  I  have  made  a  complete  failure;  am 
unable  to  concentrate;  am  physically  weak;  have 
never  had  the  power  of  concentration,  at  least  so 
far  back  as  my  remembrance  goes.  My  mind 
seems  to  be  going  to  pieces.  Sometimes  I  think 
that  I,  as  an  entity,  am  being  disintegrated.  Some- 
times I  think  I  have  acquired  all  there  is  for  me 
in  this  incarnation — that  I  must  pass  on,  rest  and 

assimilate  what  I  have  already  learned 

I  desire  the  help  you  offer,  if  so  you  can  help 
me,  for  I  realize  that  life  is  a  matter  of  the 
growth  of  the  soul." 

Your  cry  for  help  has  reached  our  ears  and  we  un- 
derstand your  difficulty.  While  your  Soul  is  learning 
its  various  lessons  the  one  great  lesson — the  key-note 
of  your  present  incarnation — is  only  slowly  impressing 
itself  upon  your  brain  consciousness,  namely,  the 
necessity  for  a  sound  mind  in  a  sound  body.  You 
lose  hold  of  the  steps  gained  because,  through  the 
weakness  of  the  body,  your  mind  grows  morbid  and 
the  continuity  of  the  three-fold  chain — spirit-mind- 
body — is  broken.  Bodily  weakness  should  not  be 
looked  upon  either  as  a  failure  or  as  a  karmic  debt, 
altho  in  some  cases  it  might  be  either  or  both.  How- 
ever, no  matter  what  its  immediate  cause,  it  is  a  lesson. 
Often  it  is  a  needed  lesson  in  patience  and  sympathy 
for  suffering  that  locks  the  Soul  in  such  a  body,  but 
more  often  it  is  a  lesson  that  only  a  great  Soul  is 
ready  to  learn.  But  it  is  one  that  all  Souls  must  mas- 
ter before  passing  on,  i.  e.,  to  so  dominate  the  body  of 
flesh  that  has  been  given  them  to  gain  experience 
through  that  the  Soul-impress  may  be  indelibly  fixed 
in  its  matter. 


166  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

The  first  step  in  this  direction  awakens  within  the 
physical  aura  an  extreme  sensitiveness,  even  physical 
weakness.  If  this  is  correctly  understood  and  lifted 
up  and  correlated  with  the  true  Source  of  Life  and 
Strength,  it  is  a  help  rather  than  a  hindrance.  If  it 
is  looked  upon  as  a  hindrance,  and  the  door  is 
flung  open  to  all  the  devils  of  dis-ease,  the  last  state 
of  that  man  or  woman  is  worse  than  the  first.  The 
thought  to  hold,  in  your  case,  is  that  your  very  physi- 
cal sensitiveness  brings  you  into  closer  touch  with  the 
Great  Souls  of  Compassion  (the  Masters  of  Wisdom) 
and  makes  the  physical  envelope  more  ethereal.  It 
thus  becomes  a  blessing  rather  than  a  curse. 

March  17th,  1908. 

"My  daughter  has  been  very  ill,  and  lately  from 
overwork  I  have  been  confined  to  my  room " 

We  sympathize  with  you  in  your  recent  illness  and 
are  sorry  that  The  Healing  Prayer  did  not  reach 
you  in  time  to  be  used.  While  we  do  not  take  the 
position  that  all  illness  can  be  cured  by  prayer,  yet, 
most  of  the  ills  from  which  humanity  suffers  are  not 
so  much  the  karmic  effects  of  the  past  as  of  inharmony 
in  the  present  life.  In  the  rush  and  scramble  for 
existence  you  get  out  of  harmony  with  Divine  Love 
and  at  dis-ease  with  yourself.  Hence  a  period  of 
forced,  and  generally  painful,  readjusting  and  quiet 
becomes  necessary.  In  all  such  cases  The  Healing 
Prayer,  if  repeated  either  mentally  or  aloud,  will  at 
once  change  the  vibrations  and  bring  rest  and  peace, 
and  ultimately  health — ease  instead  of  dis-ease. 

April  28th,  1908. 

"I  have  few  personal  sorrows,  but  the  world's 
sorrows  wear  my  heart  away  and  injure  my 
health,  yet  I  realize  that  sorrow  is  the  only  puri- 
fying fount  at  which  the  thirsting  soul  may  drink 
of  eternal  life  and  happiness." 


Health  and  Disease  167 

We  feel  that  you  need  a  tonic  which  will  clear  up 
the  morbid  sensitiveness  that  is  literally  sapping  your 
life-force.  It  is  a  mistake  that  is  often  made,  and  one 
that  is  fostered  by  the  teachings  of  all  the  orthodox 
churches,  as  well  as  by  many  other  organizations,  that 
sorrow  is  the  only  road  to  purification ;  that  to  be 
miserable  is  meritorious  and  that  only  through  scourg- 
ing and  suffering  can  we  hope  for  salvation.  The 
truth  is  that,  when  we  realize  how  much  sorrow  there 
is  in  the  world  and  know  of  a  certainty  that  thoughts 
are  things  and  that  either  joy  or  sadness  has  the 
power  to  spread  over  a  large  area,  it  becomes  our  duty 
to  be  joyful  and  happy.  In  fact  the  very  reason  for 
seeking  Wisdom  and  drawing  near  to  God  is  that  our 
finite  eyes  may  be  opened  to  some  of  the  glory  and 
love  "that  would  not  that  any  perish,  but  that  all  have 
everlasting  life."  Indeed,  all  must  and  shall  be  saved; 
and  joy  is  a  most  potent  factor  in  this  salvation. 

As  to  the  world's  sorrow,  while  we  must  sympathize 
with  it  and  do  all  in  our  power  to  help,  yet  Wisdom 
teaches  that  all  are  God's  children ;  that  they  work  out 
their  salvation  in  fear  and  trembling  and  sorrow  only 
because  they  refuse  to  learn  the  lesson  of  salvation  in 
any  other  way.  They  suffer  because  they  choose  to 
suffer,  yet  God  would  not  have  it  so.  If  the  world's 
sorrow  oppresses  you,  remember  that  the  very  best 
you  can  do  toward  lifting  that  heavy  load  is  to  make 
a  center  of  joy  and  gladness  in  your  own  heart.  "Re- 
joice in  the  Lord;  and  again  I  say  unto  you  rejoice." 
I  wish  I  could  impress  this  word  rejoice  upon  your 
mind  so  that  in  turn,  by  the  power  of  your  Will,  you 
could  impress  it  upon  the  consciousness  of  every  atom 
of  your  body,  which  consciousness  in  the  aggregate  is 
your  subconscious  mind.  If  you  could  register  this 
idea  of  rejoicing  within  your  subconscious  mind  you 


168  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

would  literally  breathe  health  into  your  body.  Try  to 
realize  what  health  really  means.  It  means  doing  the 
Will  of  the  Father  on  earth,  in  your  physical  body,  as 
it  is  done  in  Heaven  in  your  spiritual  body  by  your 
Higher  Self,  who  is  one  with  the  Father;  in  which 
body  there  is  no  sickness,  nor  sorrow,  nor  death.  Take 
up  this  thought  and  meditate  upon  it  while  constantly 
repeating  The  Healing  Prayer.  Also  repeat  the  Lord's 
Prayer  and  at  the  same  time  feel  that  you  are  creating 
a  circle  of  life  and  health  and  joy  that  is  filled  with  a 
bright  light  which  sends  its  beams  far  out  into  the 
darkness  to  lead  many  a  one  to  joy  and  peace. 

"I  have  been  ill.  I  went  to  Christian  Science 
for  relief.  Three  weeks  ago  I  felt  that  I  was 
well.  Today  the  outward  sign  of  ill-health  is  as 
conspicuous  as  ever.  The  healer  says  I  am  cured 
of  the  original  trouble.  If  so  why  should  the 

manifestation    reappear  ? Either    their 

teachings  in  many  cases  do  not  agree  with  this 
Order  or  I  am  unable  to  see  the  resemblance 
Can  you  help  me  to  see  my  way?" 

We  will  try  to  point  out  to  you  where  we  differ  from 
the  Christian  Scientist,  for,  while  we  know  that  they 
have  gotten  hold  of  a  mighty  truth,  we  also  know  that, 
like  all  experimenters  in  any  field,  they  have  not  yet 
had  time  to  grasp  all  its  workings. 

Christian  Science  is  a  new  and  modern  cult,  and  the 
results  of  their  supposed  discovery  have  not  been  ob- 
served long  enough  for  them  to  mark  the  ultimate  re- 
sults. Only  those  who  can  watch  through  the  ages 
and  can  follow  the  Soul  through  many  incarnations 
and  note  the  resulting  effect  of  such  experiments 
through  many  lives,  can  fully  understand  the  action 
of  the  great  Law  of  Healing. 


Health  and  Disease  169 

The  way  that  we  advise  you  to  help  toward  better- 
ing earth  conditions  such  as  health,  poverty,  etc.,  is  to 
hold  a  strong  thought  that  absolute  justice  shall  pre- 
vail, even  though  it  bring  suffering.  Hold  that  the 
patient  shall  be  spiritually  enlightened  so  that  what- 
ever the  lesson  which  the  sickness,  poverty  or  other 
unhappiness  is  intended  to  teach  will  be  quickly 
grasped.  Understand,  the  patient  must  cure  himself. 
No  one  can  do  more  than  aid  in  the  readjustment. 
The  most  that  a  true  healer  is  permitted  to  do,  aside 
from  the  use  of  physical  aids,  is  to  send  loving,  help- 
ful thoughts  of  an  uplifting  character, — never  to  use 
his  personal  magnetism  or  impress  his  Will  upon  the 
patient's  subconscious  mind. 

Often  by  pouring  his  personal  magnetism  (prana) 
into  the  aura  of  a  patient,  or  by  sheer  force  of  Will, 
one  may  so  influence  another  as  to  temporarily  drive 
away  sickness  or  trouble,  but  if  the  real  lesson  which 
the  sickness  or  trouble  was  meant  to  teach  has  not  been 
learned  by  the  patient  the  moment  the  will-power  is 
withdrawn  the  trouble  will  return.  Or,  if  the  will- 
power has  been  strong  enough,  the  trouble  may  be 
driven  back  from  off  the  physical-plane  to  appear  upon 
some  higher  plane,  perhaps  in  a  different  form  such  as 
some  form  of  nervous  disorder  or  mental  trouble.  If 
the  will-power  of  the  healer  is  exerted  to  accomplish 
this  then  the  healer  has  interfered  with  the  law,  and 
he  or  she  will  find  him  or  herself  drawn  into  the  next 
wave  of  inharmony  that  sweeps  over  the  one  he  or  she 
tried  to  help. 

Understand  clearly,  whatever  sicknesses,  troubles  or 
trials  come  to  a  person  are  either  the  result  of  broken 
law  or  are  conditions  given  by  the  Higher  Self  of  the 
patient  to  teach  certain  necessary  lessons  and  thus  gain 
the  experience  needed  to  take  the  Soul  a  step  onward. 


170  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

To  throw  the  troubles  off  or  to  push  them  back  by  the 
life- force  (prana)  or  by  the  will-power  of  another  and 
refuse  to  learn  the  lessons  intended  is  only  to  postpone 
them.  The  forces  of  Nature  give  unquestioning 
obedience  to  the  Law  and  the  Law  is  that  perfect 
harmony  shall  prevail  upon  all  planes.  All  broken  con- 
tracts and  all  disobedience  to  the  Law  produce  inhar- 
mony  on  all  planes  at  the  same  time.  And  the  per- 
sons bringing  into  action  the  particular  inharmonious 
note  must  themselves  readjust  every  wave  of  inhar- 
mony  that  has  been  produced  by  their  acts  before  har- 
mony can  be  restored  in  their  lives. 

It  is  not  denial  of  inharmony  that  settles  the  score, 
but  a  recognition  of  it  and  the  correction  of  its  cause. 
If  through  will-power  you  push  it  aside  and  apparently 
gain  either  health,  wealth  or  some  earthly  comfort  ere 
the  readjustment  is  made,  the  inharmony  will  gather 
force  by  the  very  pushing  back  and  will  sweep  over 
you  again  and  again  until  it  is  recognized  and  ad- 
justed. As  the  great  Master  Jesus  said:  "For  verily 
I  say  unto  you,  Till  heaven  and  earth  pass,  one  jot  or 
one  tittle  shall  in  no  wise  pass  from  the  law,  till  all  be 
fulfilled."  This  is  a  benign  and  beneficent  law ;  for  it 
is  only  by  reaping  what  we  have  sown,  and  eating  the 
fruits  thereof,  that  we  can  ever  learn  to  plant  wheat 
instead  of  tares. 

Therefore,  you  can  see  that  for  a  mental  healer  to 
control  the  forces  operating  against  a  patient  he  must 
first  be  fully  cognizant  of  (a)  just  what  the  forces  are, 

(b)  what  old  karmic  conditions  they  are  working  out, 

(c)  what  important  lesson  the  Higher  Self  is  trying 
to  teach  by  means  of  the  action  of  the  forces  and  (d) 
whether  or  not  the  patient  has  learned  the  lesson  and 
benefited  by  the  experience.    Thus  you  can  see  that  to 
fully   and   intelligently   understand   all   these    factors 


Health  and  Disease  171 

would  require  almost  super-human  wisdom  and  dis- 
cretion. And  to  undertake,  as  so  many  do,  to  con- 
trol or  to  interfere  with  those  forces  without  any  con- 
ception of  the  possibilities  in  which  they  may  be  in- 
volved, is  as  foolish  as  for  a  child  to  play  with  dyna- 
mite. You  can  do  it ;  but  only  at  a  terrible  risk. 

But  never  cease  to  help  those  in  distress  or  cease 
to  use  all  ordinary  means  to  benefit  them  for  fear  of 
interfering  with  their  Karma ;  for  this  you  cannot  do 
if  you  devote  your  energy  to  the  betterment  of  their 
spiritual  welfare  rather  than  to  their  physical  desires. 
It  is  right  to  do  all  in  your  power  at  all  times  to  help 
those  in  distress,  and  if  you  bear  in  mind  these  facts 
failure  will  not  discourage  you  nor  will  seeming  suc- 
cess unduly  elate  you,  for  you  will  understand  that  at 
most  you  have  been  but  a  channel  through  which  the 
Divine  Force  should  flow. 

Understand  that  it  is  not  that  we  disapprove  of  in- 
dividual Christian  Scientists,  for  there  are  many  beauti- 
ful Souls  among  them  who  are  devoting  their  lives  to 
serving  humanity  according  to  their  highest  conception 
of  right,  but  we  do  realize  that  the  cult  is  but  a  one- 
sided glimpse  of  Truth,  and  it  is  therefore  far  from 
complete.  We  do  not  object,  however,  to  any  path 
provided  you  remember  the  main  fact  that  to  be  whole 
you  must  find  out  why  you  are  sick,  and  what  lesson 
it  was  meant  to  teach.  The  moment  you  do  this  in  that 
moment  the  trouble  or  sickness  will  fall  from  you  like 
a  garment  cast  off. 

We  ask  you  to  repeat  The  Healing  Prayer  over  and 
over  again,  especially  morning  and  evening,  and  study 
the  lesson  and  try  to  grasp  the  meaning  of  Divine 
Healing.  Every  time  you  repeat  the  Prayer  let  your 
mind  turn  to  this  Center  with  a  full  knowledge  that 
here  is  a  Center  from  which  radiates  Love  and  the  heal- 


172  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

ing  Christ-force  to  all.  Each  one  who  puts  himself 
into  touch  with  this  force  must  be  helped.  It  is  like 
the  Brazen  Serpent  lifted  up  by  Moses  in  the  wilder- 
ness, all  who  look  or  come  mentally,  with  child-like 
love  and  faith,  will  be  healed  in  Soul  and  body. 

"I  am  suffering  from  an  old  wound  on  my  right 
leg  just  above  the  knee  joint.  Fifteen  years  ago  a 
surgeon  cut  a  hole  through  the  bone  and  it  does 
not  heal,  continually  discharges  pus.  I  dread  an- 
other operation  as  I  am  56  years  old,  otherwise 
healthy  and  do  not  use  tobacco  or  liquor.  Have 
been  advised  to  try  Christian  Science.  Can  you 
give  me  any  advice?" 

We  do  not  advise  Christian  Science  for  your  leg. 
Altho  the  only  real  help  and  cure  for  all  ills  is  what  we 
call  Divine  Healing  as  explained  in  the  lesson  on  The 
Healing  Prayer,  i.  e.,  the  subordinating  of  the  flesh  to 
the  Higher  or  Divine  Self  and  the  harmonizing  of  all 
atoms  to  the  key-note  of  Divinity,  still  this  is  an  ad- 
vanced step  and  there  are  many  intermediate  ones  be- 
fore it  can  be  made  practical  in  the  case  of  organic  dis- 
ease. Therefore,  when  there  is  a  physical,  anatom- 
ical lesion  it  should  be  corrected  upon  its  own  plane 
and  readjusted  by  physical  means  that  it  may  the 
quicker  be  in  a  condition  to  permit  the  Divine  "Life 
and  Love  and  Purity"  to  flow  through  it  unimpeded 
and  thus  complete  the  cure. 

We  differentiate  between  cure  and  mere  readjust- 
ment. That  which  has  gone  awry  from  purely  physi- 
cal causes  must  be  put  into  perfect  physical  condition 
ere  the  Divine  Life  can  fill  it  and  harmonize  it  with 
the  Divine.  It  is  useless  to  waste  force  of  Will  or  ex- 
pend mental  activity  in  endeavoring  to  readjust  what 
can  quite  as  well  be  corrected  and  put  in  condition  for 
Nature  to  finish,  by  physical  means,  thus  leaving  the 
Will  to  be  expended  upon  the  higher  planes  in  bring- 


Health  and  Disease  173 

ing  about  the  At-one-ment  with  the  Higher  Self,  which 
will  manifest  as  perfect  health  on  all  planes. 

Since  you  say  your  wound  has  been  discharging  pus 
for  years  we  would  judge  that  there  is  some  chronic 
necrotic  process  at  work  in  the  bone  and  that  this  has 
become  infected,  and  where  pus  is  present  we  can  only 
say,  get  it  out  as  quickly  as  possible.  Our  best  advice 
to  you  is  for  you  to  go  to  the  best  surgeon  or  to  the 
best  hospital  you  know  of  and  have  the  necrotic  tissue 
removed,  for  Nature  has  been  unable  to  slough  it  out 
after  years  of  her  best  endeavors  and  she  needs  a  little 
help. 

If,  as  you  say,  you  are  otherwise  healthy  and  do 
not  use  tobacco  or  liquor  you  should  not  dread  an  op- 
eration, for  if  you  had  a  bad  heart  or  other  vital  organs 
you  would  not  be  given  a  general  anesthetic.  Then, 
too,  the  danger  of  an  anesthetic  nowadays  is  very 
slight;  only  about  1  in  16,000  cases  taking  them  as 
they  come,  good  and  bad  condition  alike.  There  is 
a  vast  difference  in  the  ground  for  dread  of  a  surgical 
operation  between  the  conditions  under  which  opera- 
tions were  done  fifteen  years  ago  and  today;  more 
than  the  difference  between  travel  in  a  stage-coach 
and  in  a  modern  limited  express.  The  danger  from 
surgical  operations  is  largely  because  patients  wait 
until  they  are  about  to  die  and  have  given  up  hope 
of  recovery  before  having  the  operation  performed, 
even  tKe  surgeon  consenting  only  as  a  last  resort.  If 
taken  early  there  is  almost  no  danger,  certainly  nothing 
compared  to  allowing  the  condition  to  continue  un- 
relieved. 

"My  husband's  health  is  not  good,  and  I  have 

been  having  a  very  anxious  time He  has 

just  commenced  to  take  a  remedy  that  a  psychic 
healer  has  prescribed  and  we  hope  he  will  be  im- 
proved." 


174  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

As  to  trusting  your  husband's  health  to  a  psychic 
healer  we  would  say,  and  say  so  emphatically  that  you 
cannot  misunderstand  our  words,  that,  in  the  case  of 
physical  diseases,  all  psychic  treatment  must  be 
supplementary  to  the  best  physical  treatment  ob- 
tainable from  the  best  physician  you  know  of.  If 
a  psychic  gives  a  diagnosis,  before  acting  upon  that 
diagnosis  go  to  the  best  physician  or  hospital  you 
can  reach  and  have  a  thorough  physical  examina- 
tion. If  the  psychic's  diagnosis  agrees  in  the  main 
with  that  of  the  doctor  it  may  be  followed  under 
the  doctor's  direction.  In  case  the  psychic  gives 
more  subtle  symptoms  not  discovered  by  the  physi- 
cian, tell  him  frankly  what  you  suspect,  but  without 
letting  him  know  where  you  got  your  suspicion.  If 
he  fails  to  find  any  evidence  of  such  symptoms  after 
several  thorough  examinations  it  is  well  to  disregard 
them.  There  is  so  much  room  for  self-deception 
in  the  transmission  of  psychic  information  that  the 
only  safe  course  to  pursue  is  to  prove  it.  It  should 
always  be  verified  by  the  conditions  found  or  else 
should  commend  itself  to  your  good  judgment  and 
common-sense  and  be  judged  just  as  the  advice 
given  by  any  friend  who  was  not  a  trained  physi- 
cian would  be  judged. 

Above  all,  never  take  any  kind  of  drug  or  medi- 
cine except  upon  the  prescription  of  a  physician  in 
whose  professional  skill  and  moral  qualities  you 
have  confidence.  Magnetic  and  other  psychic  treat- 
ments and  massage  are  admirable  to  supplement 
the  other  forms  of  therapeutics,  but  we  warn  you 
against  trusting  the  case  in  the  hands  of  anyone  but 
a  first  class  physician. 

We  recommend  The  Healing  Prayer  to  our  pupils, 
not  to  take  the  place  of  proper  medical  treatment,  but 


Health  and  Disease  175 

to  bring  about  that  harmony  of  mind  and  body  which 
every  physician  now  recognizes  as  an  essential  element 
in  the  treatment  of  disease.  We  give  it  to  bring  our 
pupils  into,  touch  with  the  vibrations  of  the  One  Life 
which  are  health ;  for  only  when  a  patient  is  in  har- 
mony with  the  Well-spring  of  all  Life  (the  Divine) 
can  even  the  best  medical  treatment  be  more  than  pal- 
liative or  push  back  the  manifestation  of  the  disease 
for  the  time  being  or  into  another  channel.  Divine 
Healing  should  go  hand  in  hand  with  the  best  treat- 
ment science  can  offer.  For,  until  humanity  has  en- 
tered the  psychic  world  and  can  function  in  the  psychic 
body  and  use  the  psychic  faculties,  it  must  treat  physi- 
cal ills  with  physical  remedies  as  a  basis.  All  psychic 
treatment  can  be  depended  upon  to  do  is  to  harmonize 
the  psychic  currents  and  influence  the  circulation. 
Hence  diseased  conditions  arising  from  mental  or 
psychic  states  or  from  temporary  and  functional  dis- 
orders of  the  circulation  can  be  cured  by  psychic  means, 
and  psychic  treatment  can  even  be  an  important  factor 
in  the  cure  of  organic  disease. 

Divine  Healing  or  the  coming  into  harmony  with 
the  current  of  the  One  Life  can  and  will  cure  in  time, 
but  ere  it  can  bring  about  a  cure  it  must  first,  as  The 
Healing  Prayer  expresses  it,  "drive  out  the  atoms  of 
inharmony  and  disease."  To  do  this  they  must  first 
be  driven  from  the  mental  body,  the  astral  body  and 
then  out  of  the  physical  body,  and  during  this  proc- 
ess there  will  necessarily  be  a  manifestation  of  the 
conditions  in  the  physical  body  until  the  well  known 
"healing  crisis"  is  reached  and  the  elimination  is  ended. 
Psychic  currents  can  cure  psychic  diseases  and  greatly 
influence  physical  diseases,  but  the  physical  remedies 
should  by  no  means  be  overlooked  or  neglected;  for 
the  physical  states  react  upon  the  psychic  quite  as 


176  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

much  as  the  psychic  do  upon  the  physical.  Therefore, 
true  healing  combines  all  physical  agencies  with  the 
psychic  and  the  Divine,  for  these  three  are  one. 
Divine  Healing  applied  to  physical  diseases  will  work 
out  a  cure  in  time,  but  it  may  cause  a  worse  condition 
before  it  can  cause  a  better. 

Our  best  advice  is  that  your  husband  should  use  the 
same  common-sense  that  he  would  employ  if  one  of  his 
tools  was  out  of  order.  He  would  not  wait  until  it 
was  injured  beyond  repair  or  until  there  was  not 
enough  left  to  be  worth  repairing,  but  he  would  have 
the  first  break  remedied  before  it  got  beyond  control. 
Do  the  same  with  the  bodily  machine. 


PART  IX. 
THE  SEX   PROBLEM. 

"Have  ye  not  read,  that  he  which  made  them  at  the 

beginning  made  them  male  and  female, and 

they  twain  shall  be  one  flesh  ?     Wherefore  they  are  no 
more  twain,  but  one  flesh.     What  therefore  God  hath 

joined  together,  let  no  man  put  asunder All 

men  cannot  receive  this  saying,  save  they  to  whom 
it  is  given."    St.  Matthew  XIX,  4-11. 


The  Sex  Problem  179 

PART  IX. 
THE  SEX  PROBLEM. 

June  15th,  1908. 

"The  union  of  two  Souls  on  the  highest  plane 
will  uplift  humanity  as  little  else  can.  In  truth, 
until  we  love  another  absorbingly,  how  can  we 

know  the  Love  of  Loves  ? Tell  me  what 

you  think — is  it  true  that  there  is  for  each  of  us 
a  mate?    Or  is  celibacy  the  ideal? " 

You  ask  what  we  think  of  each  Soul  having  a  mate. 
This  doctrine,  if  it  can  be  called  such,  has  indeed  been 
misconstrued  and  used  as  an  excuse  for  all  sorts  of 
loose  and  perverted  conduct,  yet,  like  all  things  that 
are  good,  but  evil  when  perverted,  it  holds  a  divine 
germ  of  spiritual  truth.  This  truth  is  so  sacred,  and 
so  easily  misunderstood  and  perverted,  that  the  Mas- 
ters of  Wisdom  have  ever  drawn  a  veil  over  it.  Only 
the  few  who  evolve  to  the  point  where  their  own  hands 
can  draw  aside  the  veil  can  hope  to  understand  it. 
The  teachings  on  this  subject  are  generally  given  direct 
from  teacher  to  pupil  when  the  pupil  is  ready. 

The  great  trouble  about  celibacy  has  always  been 
that  those  who  were  able  to  perceive  something  of  the 
results  to  be  attained  are  apt  to  forget  or  overlook  all 
the  intermediate  steps.  It  is  like  standing  on  a  plain 
and  looking  up  at  a  mountain.  The  snow  upon  the 
peak  shines  out  white  and  clear  in  the  light  of  the 
sun  and  is  so  beautiful  that  the  gazer  feels  that  it  is 
only  a  little  beyond  his  grasp,  and  that  all  he  has  to 
do  is  to  keep  his  eye  upon  those  shining  heights  and 
travel  on  and  on.  But  in  reality  those  heights  kiss 
the  sky;  their  climatic  conditions  are  different;  their 


180  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

air  is  unfitted  for  the  lungs  of  the  dweller  of  the  plain, 
and  the  road  up  the  mountain  is  beset  with  dangers 
and  pitfalls.  The  path  that  seems  to  lead  straight  up 
to  the  highest  pinnacle  may  in  reality  skirt  a  number 
of  deep  crevasses,  and  to  safely  reach  the  heights  one 
must  make  long  detours  and  pass  through  many  dan- 
gerous defiles  and  be  subject  to  many  unknown  condi- 
tions. The  conditions  at  the  top  may  be  absolutely 
harmful  to  the  aspiring  climber  unless,  by  long  train- 
ing and  with  a  competent  guide,  he  learns  how  to  avoid 
the  dark  and  noisome  caverns  and  safely  tread  the 
Path  to  the  heights. 

Jan.  26th,  1908. 

"I  long  to  transmute  all  the  inner  forces,  'The 
animal-sensual/  and  all  that  holds  man  down  to 

the  lower  planes,  into  spiritual  energy 

All  sensual  desire  upon  my  wife's  part  has  dis- 
appeared, and  with  me  great  improvement.  I 
realize  all  things  of  that  nature  must  be  con- 
quered  " 

Your  difficulty  is  known  to  us  and  we  will  try  to 
impart  to  you  the  remedy.  The  trouble  is  that  your 
mind  and  heart  have  outrun  your  physical  development. 
You  are  trying  to  tear  open  the  bud  of  personality 
instead  of  allowing  it  to  unfold  in  the  sunlight  of  the 
God  of  Love.  A  most  important  lesson  to  remember 
is  that  the  sex  powers  are  the  expression  of  the 
Divine  Creative  Force  in  matter.  It  is  the  same  force 
which  created  the  world  and  all  that  is  therein.  Its 
misuse  and  debasement  is  the  cause  of  all  misery  and 
disease  and  death.  It  is  the  Serpent  of  Wisdom,1  the 
Old  Serpent,  which,  when  crawling  upon  the  ground 
fulfills  the  curse,  "Upon  thy  belly  shalt  thou  go,  and 
dust  shalt  thou  eat  all  the  days  of  thy  life;  and  I  will 
put  enmity  between  thee  and  the  woman,  and  between 

1  See  Chapter  XVIII  in  The  Voict  of  Isis,  Curtisg. 


The  Sex  Problem  181 

thy  seed  and  her  seed."  But  this  Serpent  is  not  evil 
in  itself,  only  when  allowed  to  crawl  upon  the  ground. 
Its  other  aspect  is  divine,  and  when  lifted  up  upon  the 
Tree  of  Life  it  will  literally  fulfill  the  other  prophecy 
of  the  Serpent,  "In  the  day  ye  eat  thereof,  then  your 
eyes  shall  be  opened,  and  ye  shall  be  as  gods,  know- 
ing good  and  evil."  Through  the  power  of  the  Ser- 
pent man  has  eaten  of  this  Tree  of  Knowledge,  but 
only  from  its  lower  branches.  So  the  "Flaming  Sword 
(the  Divine  Creative  Fire)  which  turned  every  way" 
has  barred  him  from  Eden.  What  he  has  eaten  has 
given  him  the  power  of  the  gods  to  know  the  evil, 
sinking  lower  than  the  beasts,  and  it  is  only  when 
he  turns  and  looks  at  the  same  Fiery  Serpent,  and  lifts 
it  up  upon  the  cross  in  the  wilderness  of  life,  that  he 
shall  once  more  become  whole  and  find  the  power  of 
the  gods  to  know  the  good,  even  as  he  has  had  to  know 
the  evil. 

Remember  that  every  act  which  evokes  the  creative 
power  of  the  Serpent  in  the  flesh  creates  after  the 
manner  of  the  thoughts  held  at  the  time.  From  the 
abuse  of  this  power  mankind  has  peopled  the  astral 
with  sensual  monsters  which  are  ever  waiting  to  in- 
carnate and  express  themselves  through  man,  and 
which  have  the  power  to  create  after  their  kind.  It 
is  the  thought  that  determines  what  you  create. 

May  10th,  1908. 

"My  opinion  emphatically  is  that  the  functions 
of  bodily  life,  nutritive  and  reproductive,  must  be 
held  sacred  to  the  purposes  for  which  they  are 
intended." 

Your  idea  of  the  sacredness  of  the  sex-forces  is 
quite  right.  The  sex-force  is  the  greatest  force  that 
is  sent  into  manifestation.  In  fact,  it  is  the  force  of 
manifestation.  It  is  the  Great  Creative  Force  by 


182  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

which  everything  that  is  is  created.  But  we  go  still 
farther  and  teach  that  this  force  can  create  and  does 
create,  when  directed  by  the  will-power,  just  what  the 
desires  have  formulated.  If  this  were  understood 
there  would  be  fewer  temptations  to  pervert  this  force 
during  youth.  It  should  be  used  to  carry  out  mental 
creations  instead  of  being  wasted,  to  the  great  detri- 
ment of  both  body  and  Soul. 

If  the  desire  is  to  create  a  physical  body  into  which 
a  Soul  may  come  into  manifestation,  then  all  the  power 
of  the  Will  should  be  used  to  produce  just  the  kind  of 
body  wanted.  On  the  other  hand,  should  the  desire 
be  to  re-create  your  own  physical,  astral  or  mental 
bodies  the  same  force  is  used,  for  it  creates  after  the 
pattern  formed  by  the  desires.  And,  alas!  it  is  this 
same  force  which,  under  the  direction  of  lascivious 
thoughts  and  impure  and  vile  imagination,  has  been 
expended  in  creating  the  entities  that  prey  upon  man 
in  the  form  of  sickness,  deformity,  disease  and  death. 
Then,  too,  when  this  force  is  denied  a  normal  physical 
embodiment  it  must  create  upon  the  mental  and  astral- 
planes,  and  there  it  has  created  monsters  of  unspeak- 
able horror  (corresponding  to,  or  rather  being  the  em- 
bodiment of  man's  lust)  which  must,  of  necessity,  at- 
tach themselves  to  their  creator  and  look  to  him  for 
their  redemption ;  true  Frankenstein  monsters  that 
cannot  be  mastered  except  through  a  strong,  deter- 
mined effort  to  withhold  the  life-force  from  them  and 
to  create  their  opposites. 

As  you  must  clearly  understand,  since  every  expendi- 
ture of  this  force,  for  whatever  purpose,  creates  some- 
thing somewhere,  can  you  wonder  at  the  misery  of 
the  world  ?  Or  can  you  fail  to  see  where  the  entering 
wedge  must  be  placed  for  the  redemption  of  the 
world?  In  reality  this  is  the  work  which  this  Move- 


The  Sex  Problem  183 

ment  was  established  to  perform,  namely,  to  go  down 
into  the  mire  of  the  sex-question  and  rescue  the  pre- 
cious pearls  that  have  been  cast  before  the  swine,  i.  e., 
to  teach  the  right  use  of  the  sex-function  throughout 
all  creation.  The  mineral,  the  vegetable,  the  animal 
all  have  the  power,  through  the  use  of  the  creative 
force  of  the  One  Life,  to  create  after  their  kind ; 
but  man  has  an  added  power — and  the  consequent 
added  responsibility — to  create  not  merely  after  his 
kind — to  which  creation  the  lower  kingdoms  are 
limited — but,  through  the  power  of  his  Will,  to  create 
anything  he  desires.  Thus  far  the  will  has  been  to 
create  for  himself,  and  for  the  Race,  only  evil  01 
d-evils,  for  "By  man  came  death  into  the  world  and  by 
man  must  also  come  the  resurrection  from  the  dead." 
He  has  eaten  of  the  Tree  of  Knowledge  and  has  be- 
come "as  the  gods"  to  know  the  evil  and  now  he 
must  become  "as  the  gods"  to  know  the  good.  These 
are  the  truths  concerning  the  sex-functions  for  which 
this  Order  stands. 

March  4th,  1908. 

"Why  is  it  that  we  find  such  a  dearth  of  chil- 
dren in  the  so-called  'well  bred  people'  or  good 
class  families?  About  40  per  cent  perhaps  are 
without  children,  the  rest  with  one  or  two.  The 
ordinary  answer  is,  of  course,  that  it  is  due  to  the 

use  of  preventives,  etc In  the  vegetable 

world,  where  my  real  question  lies,  some  types 
and  forms  are  already  in  trouble — giving  but  few 
seeds,  the  sweet  pea  for  instance.  The  largest 
and  best  in  every  way  gives  but  few  seeds 
Is  it  because  ordinary  methods  of  cross- 
ing are  like  human  intermarriage  between  rela- 
tives?" 

The  reason  that  fewer  monads  are  incarnating  in 
the  so-called  cultured  class  is  chiefly  because  the  cul- 
ture of  the  world  is  in  no  way  an  advantage  to  the 


184  Le tiers  From  the  Teacher 

perfection  of  vigor  of  the  body,  nor  its  environments 
such  as  to  materially  help  the  Soul  onward  in  its  ap- 
pointed task.  The  Soul  chooses  its  own  environments 
in  accordance  with  the  conditions  best  suited  to  help  it 
along  in  its  chosen  path.  Physical  obstacles  such  as 
poverty,  the  necessity  for  mingling  with  humanity  en 
masse  and  in  the  pushing  and  crowding  generally 
found  in  the  so-called  lower  ranks  of  society,  are  not 
only  great  helps  to  the  attainment  of  perfection  if 
conquered,  but  if  the  incarnating  Soul  is  at  all  ad- 
vanced and  has  a  realizing  sense  of  the  great  love  of 
Brotherhood,  its  most  overwhelming  desire  is  to  in- 
carnate where  it  can  help  on  in  the  work  of  the  re- 
demption of  the  Race.  This  can  be  done  more  effec- 
tively by  one  who  has  mingled  with  the  lower  strata 
and  has  felt  its  deep  heart-throbs  of  misery,  and  even 
of  crime.  Such  an  one  grows  nearer  to  his  brother 
man,  and  by  his  very  struggle  to  get  above  the  condi- 
tions is  capable  of  a  deeper  realization,  through  his 
own  suffering,  of  the  suffering  of  humanity  and  gains 
more  sympathy  with  its  needs. 

Those  born  into  affluence  have  no  such  chance.  The 
temptations  of  idleness  and  the  deadening  effects  of 
selfishness  are  harder  to  conquer,  hence  only  such 
Souls,  as  have  either  not  advanced  to  the  point  of  at- 
one-ment  with  humanity  and  desire  only  personal  ease, 
or  advanced  Souls  who  know  the  danger  yet,  having 
conquered  the  temptations  of  the  lower  levels  in 
former  lives,  deliberately  choose  such  an  incarnation 
that  they  may  have  the  means  to  help  humanity  on  a 
large  scale.  Necessarily  these  are  few,  one  here  and 
there. 

As  to  the  same  thing  taking  place  in  plant  life,  the 
cause  there  is  more  apt  to  be  that,  this  being  an  ex- 
perimental age  in  that  line,  man  has  not  yet  learned 


The  Sex  Problem  185 

how  to  increase  vigor  in  the  plant.  That  is  to  say,  a 
plant  has  only  a  certain  amount  of  life-force  and  this, 
man,  by  his  Will,  has  directed  we  will  say  into  the  line 
of  a  perfect  blossom,  but  at  the  expense  of  the  power 
of  propagation.  The  lesson  to  learn  is  how  to  draw 
more  life  into  the  plant  and  balance  it  so  that  there 
will  be  enough  for  both  activities. 

March  3rd,  1908. 

"Can  you  explain  why  my  wife  and  I  seem  to 
be  gradually  growing  apart  ?  There  is  no  quarrel 
between  us  at  all,  only  distress  that  we  cannot 
have  more  than  a  friendly,  chummy  relation " 

As  to  the  general  proposition,  the  mere  fact  that  a 
man  and  woman  do  not  belong  together  is  all-sufficient. 
The  Law  back  of  this  is  the  fact  that  the  general  plan 
of  all  humanity  was  laid  down  at  the  beginning  of  this 
manvantara  according  to  strict  geometrical  lines. 
Since  the  time  of  the  separation  of  the  sexes  (at  the 
end  of  the  Third  Root-Race)  these  lines  have  been 
mixed  up  more  and  more,  until  now  they  are  in  the 
greatest  confusion.  But  the  time  has  come  when  the 
straightening  out  process  has  begun  in  earnest.  The 
real  meaning  of  redemption  is  that  The  Christ  (the 
living  force  of  the  Divine  Creative  Fire — the  Law  of 
God)  must  redeem  from  this  intricate  confusion  all  the 
various  geometrical  lines  (Souls)  and  put  each  in  its 
proper  place  again  in  the  Grand  Plan.  Sin  is  inhar- 
mony,  the  separation  of  the  positive  and  negative  parts 
of  a  line,  or  a  snarling  of  the  strands  like  that  seen 
in  a  tangled  skein  of  yarn.  Redemption  means  re- 
deeming, a  bringing  back  to  the  original  condition, 
for  you  cannot  redeem  a  thing  that  you  have  not 
once  had  and  lost.  Therefore  the  very  first  step  to- 
ward growth  is  to  work  toward  the  straightening  out 
of  the  tangled  lines.  But  in  accomplishing  this  you 


186  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

must  place  yourself  unresentfully  in  the  hands  of  the 
Lords  of  Karma,  which  means  holding  the  attitude 
of  "Thy  will  be  done."  When  this  is  done  you  at 
once  find  that  in  exact  accord  with  your  sincerity  the 
Law  will  begin  to  work  out.  At  first  it  will  precipitate 
upon  you  all  your  old  Karma.  That  must  be  accepted 
and  worked  out  cheerfully 

March  3rd,  1908. 

"You  must  decide  for  me  if  I  am  ready  for  the 
probationer's  course,  and  if  my  husband  is  ready 
also;  for  I  will  not  begin  till  he,  too,  is  ready. 
We  have  come  thus  far  together  and  I  will  wait 
many  years  if  need  be  until  he  is  ready." 

Your  attitude  of  desiring  to  go  hand  in  hand  with 
your  husband  is  the  right  one,  for  no  other  way  is  pos- 
sible. When  two  persons  are  really  joined  in  a  true 
marriage  of  the  Soul,  as  in  your  case,  it  is  impossible 
for  one  to  advance  without  the  other.  Sometimes  the 
forward  impulse  seems  to  come  from  one  and  some- 
times from  the  other,  but  in  reality  all  true  spiritual 
growth  is  flowing  to  them  jointly.  They  have  reached 
a  point  where,  from  the  soul-plane  or  plane  of  causes, 
from  which  the  Masters  see  them  and  on  which  they 
come  into  contact  with  the  Great  White  Lodge,  they 
are  really  one,  and  all  spiritual  impulses  are  given  to 
them  as  one.  This  is  the  universal  but  sadly  neglected 
meaning  of  the  words  of  the  marriage  ceremony, 
"Whom  God  hath  joined  let  no  man  put  asunder." 
Alas,  it  is  but  very  few  couples  whom  God  hath  joined. 
When  man  only  hath  joined  them  it  is  only  the  bodies 
that  are  joined,  not  the  Souls.  In  such  cases  all  real 
spiritual  advance  must  necessarily  push  them  asunder, 
because  their  Souls,  not  being  one,  cannot  follow  the 
same  upward  Path ;  each  must  ultimately  find  its  own. 


The  Sex  Problem  187 

"In  an  occult  pamphlet  I  note  the  statement  that 
for  the  birth  of  an  advanced  Soul,  an  Avatar  for 
instance,  it  is  not  essential  that  he  be  born  of 
what  the  world  calls  a  sexually  pure  woman.  Is 
this  correct?"  Inquirer,  Spokane,  Wash. 

Most  emphatically,  no.  The  conception  of  such  a 
Divine  emanation  in  human  form  can  only  take  place 
between  specially  prepared  and  absolutely  pure  par- 
ents.1 Moreover,  they  must  be  perfectly  affinitized  or 
harmonized  upon  all  planes,  physical,  mental  and  spirit- 
ual. They  must  be  set  apart  and  sanctified  long  ere 
such  a  conception  could  be  a  possibility.  They  must 
be  lawfully  wedded  in  the  sight  of  men,  according  to 
the  laws  of  the  land,  and  must  be  blameless  in  the  sight 
of  God  and  man.  This,  however,  does  not  mean  that 
they  must  never  have  sinned  in  the  past,  but  it  does 
mean  that  long  before  such  a  conception  could  take 
place  they  must  have  washed  their  garments  (bodies) 
pure  and  white  in  the  blood2  of  the  Lamb,  i.  e.,  the 
spiritual  life-force  poured  out  for  humanity  by  the  sac- 
rificial Lamb  or  The  Christ-power  —  the  Word  made 
flesh  and  sacrificed  that  humanity  might  be  redeemed. 
Through  this  force  such  parents  must  have  gained  pur- 
ity of  body,  purity  of  mind  and  purity  of  heart,  the 
attainment  of  which  will  necessarily  express  itself  in 
purity  of  life.  Any  exception  to  this  is  unthinkable. 

"Wrote  you  a  day  or  so  ago,  a  large  portion 
of  my  letter  being  devoted  to  the  sex-question; 
and  yesterday  had   a   discussion   with  .......... 

trying  to  find  out  what  the  position  of  the  Fifteen 
is  on  that  subject  ..........  It  is  rather  curious 

that  ..........  are    morbidly    inclined    to    regard 

the  union  of  the  sexes  as  improper  under  all  con- 


This  reply  refers  to  the  birth  of  an  Avesha  Avatar.  A  direct 
Avatar  is  not  a  mortal,  hence  has  no  physical  parents.  See  Chapter  X, 
in  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss. 

2  See  Chapter  XIII,  in  The   Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss. 


188  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

ditions — even    within    marriage — except    for    the 

sake  of  procreation They  then  brought 

up  the  charges  against as  published  in 

the ,    and    his    admission   of   the    facts 

charged.  I  quite  agreed  with  them  in  their  ob- 
jection to I  think  that  was  the  sub- 
stance of  that  line  of  discussion." 

We  would  warn  you  that  it  is  not  well  to  allow  your 
mind  to  dwell  upon  the  sex-problem  or  to  talk  of  it 
unnecessarily,  not  because  it  is  evil  to  do  so,  but  be- 
cause it  is  one  of  the  most  sacred  of  mysteries,  and  is 
not  to  be  handled  with  unclean  or  profane  hands.  Like 
many  other  precious  things,  it  changes  its  whole  aspect 
when  ruthlessly  dragged  forth  for  inspection.  Then 
it  becomes  dead  and  putrid.  It  should  be  guarded 
most  sacredly.  Remember  that  which  everyone  con- 
demns generally  has  some  inherent  reason  in  it  for 
such  condemnation,  and  this  question  as  a  topic  for 
conversation  is  no  exception.  Many  cannot  allow 
their  mortal  minds  to  dwell  upon  it  for  any  length  of 
time  without  arousing  lust,  and  to  make  it  the  subject 
of  social  conversation  awakens  lustful  thoughts  in 
others.  Therefore  we  ask  you,  as  a  member  of  the 
Order,  to  use  all  your  influence  toward  avoiding  any 
such  discussions  and  to  communicate  this  request  to 
others  of  the  Order  with  whom  you  come  in  touch. 

It  is  neither  necessary  nor  advisable  to  analyze  this 
force.  Just  hold  to  the  idea  of  purity.  Think  how 
to  be  pure  in  mind  and  body,  and  leave  the  rest.  But, 
once  for  all,  if  it  will  help  you  to  turn  your  mind  away 
from  this  subject,  we  will  say  that  we  approve  of  sex- 
relations  only  between  those  who  are  united  in  true 
spiritual  love,  and  in  the  legitimate,  legal  marriage 
relation 

It  should  be  used  for  purposes  of  creation,  but  the 
creation  need  not  be  a  physical  body ;  for  they  can  con- 


The  Sex  Problem  189 

sciously  create  an  immortal  body  for  themselves  or  can 
create  any  other  great  work.  If  one  should  be  so  sit- 
uated that  he  finds  the  one  to  whom  he  feels  he  be- 
longs outside  the  legitimate  marriage  relation,  let  him 
understand  that  this  is  the  result  of  Karma  and  shows 
that  for  some  reason  they  have  been  separated  to  learn 
certain  lessons  independently.  Any  attempt  to  break 
through  or  over-leap  the  barriers  that  separate  them 
would  but  build  up  fresh  karmic  suffering.  Under- 
stand this  point  clearly,  they  cannot  belong  to  each 
other  sexually  until  the  barriers  have  been  removed 
so  that  they  can  be  united  by  the  laws  of  the  land  and 
stand  before  the  world  in  perfect  purity.  There  is  no 
exception.  Those  who  belong  together  will  always 
be  together  on  the  higher  planes,  and  between  incarna- 
tions, but  if  separated  upon  the  earth-plane  they  must 
patiently  learn  their  lessons  and  work  out  the  Karma 
that  holds  them  apart.  If  they  do  not  do  so  it  entails 
another  life  under  similar  conditions.  They  will  be 
sure  to  incarnate  together  when  each  is  ready  to  learn 
the  lessons  which  they  can  only  learn  together. 

If  your  spiritual  Will  is  not  strong  enough  to 
create  the  qualities  you  need  in  your  character,  then 
create  upon  the  mental-plane.  When  you  feel  the 
force  moving  within  you  say,  "I  must  create,  what 
shall  it  be  ?"  Then  look  around  you  and  see  what  new 
thing  you  can  turn  your  attention  to.  If  you  can  write, 
start  some  little  article,  and  if  it  is  not  worth  publish- 
ing at  least  you  can  make  a  start  and  go  over  and  over 
it  improving  it  each  time.  Take  up  some  new  task 
or  duty.  Do  some  kind,  unselfish  act  that  will  require 
some  time  and  thought  and  effort  to  accomplish.  In 
this  way  you  will  divert  the  current  of  the  Divine 
Creative  Force  into  a  normal  channel  of  expression. 
So-called  "physical  relief  is  never  necessary,  and  to 


190  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

teach  that  it  is  permissible  is  but  to  cloak  animal  desire 
in  words  that  make  it  seem  respectable. 

Do  not  say  that  you  cannot  thus  divert  your  creative 
force  into  accomplishments  for  good,  for  it  has  been 
successfully  done  by  hundreds  of  pupils  and  has 
brought  peace  and  joy  and  happiness  and  purity  of 
mind  and  spiritual  advancement  to  all  who  have 
learned  it.  The  teachings  of  this  Order  are  not  for 
some  superhuman  life,  but  for  the  average,  decent, 
clean-minded  person  on  the  physical-plane.  They 
are  not  vague  theories,  but  practical  instructions 
for  daily  life.  They  are  not  impossible  specula- 
tions as  to  what  we  can  do  in  some  future  ntan- 
vcmtara,  but  plain  statements  of  what  hundreds 
have  proved  and  are  showing  forth  in  their  lives 
right  here  and  now.  Furthermore,  we  teach  that  un- 
der no  circumstances  can  an  evil  or  impure  thing  upon 
the  earth-plane  ever  become  anything  but  evil  and  im- 
pure on  the  higher  planes,  for  all  planes  are  one,  and 
what  is  impure  on  one  is  impure  on  all.  Under  no 
circumstances  can  evil  or  impure  acts  on  the  phys- 
ical-plane cause  spiritual  growth,  for  the  acts  them- 
selves are  creating  exactly  the  opposite  conditions. 
Those  who  are  teaching  such  abominable  doctrines  un- 
der the  name  of  Esoteric  Theosophy  or  under  the 
311  ise  of  obtaining  some  sort  of  spiritual  development, 
will  have  a  terrible  Karma  to  answer  for  in  the  future. 
We  cannot  emphasize  too  strongly  the  fact  that  there 
can  be  no  spiritual  teachings,  either  esoteric  or  exoteric, 
that  are  not  spotless  in  their  purity  on  all  planes,  for 
The  Christ  can  dwell  only  with  the  pure  in  heart. 

We  not  only  denounce  such  vile  doctrines,  but  we 
are  trying  to  lead  humanity  back  into  paths  of  natural 
purity.  Hence,  as  our  lesson  on  Celibacy  plainly 
states,  we  believe  that  all  teachings  that  prohibit  true 


The  Sex  Problem  191 

and  legal  marriage  under  any  pretext,  and  which  foster 
unnatural  suppression  of  the  life-forces  ere  humanity, 
even  in  a  small  degree,  has  learned  the  lessons  of  pure 
love  and  the  possibility  of  real  spiritual  marriage,  any 
such  teachings,  we  repeat,  are  a  menace  to  society  and 
but  cause  abnormal  expression  of  the  forces  thus  re- 
pressed. As  we  say  in  Purity:  "When  confined  to 
the  physical-plane  man  is  apt  to  lose  control  of  it"  etc., 
and  all  forms  of  abnormality  and  all  efforts  to  separate 
this  force  from  the  spiritual-plane  is  confining  it  to  the 
animal.  And  if  we  give  it  over  to  the  animal  and  then 
deny  that  animal  a  normal  way  of  expressing  it,  just 
so  sure  will  some  vile  and  abnormal  way  of  gratifica- 
tion be  imagined.  This  alone  should  be  proof  to  a 
thinking  mind  that  such  teachings  are  abnormal.  Our 
students  must  learn  that  this  force  does  not  belong  to 
the  animal-plane  alone.  And  they  must  grasp  the 
higher  and  deeper  truth  that  marriage  does  not  be- 
long merely  to  the  animal-plane,  but  has  its  correspond- 
ence on  all  planes.  Hence  the  great  and  crying  need 
of  love  and  purity  in  the  marriage  relation. 

While  we  know  that  the  sinner  is  in  reality  but  an 
outward  expression  of  the  combined  thought  of  the 
whole  community,  and  that  not  one  is  without  sin  or 
capable  of  casting  the  first  stone,  still  it  is  our  duty 
to  set  our  faces,  in  no  uncertain  manner,  against  all 
such  crimes  against  the  Holy  Temple  of  The  Living 
Christ  as  those  to  which  you  refer.  This  is  the  atti- 
tude of  The  Order  of  the  15.  We  have  come  into 
manifestation  as  a  protest  against  the  befouling  of  all 
mankind  and  of  everything  sacred  with  the  slime  of 
the  serpent,  and  above  all  in  the  name  of  Theosophy ! 
and  for  "spiritual  advancement" !  We  must  and  shall 
use  all  our  influence  unceasingly  against  such  teach- 
ings and  proclaim  Purity.  But  we  also  go  deeper  and 


192  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

show  some  of  the  causes  that  have  produced  this 
abomination  that  is  paraded  boldly  before  the  chil- 
dren of  men,  being  defended  even  by  the  chosen  ones 

of  the Society  in  their  official  publications  ! 

The  teaching  that  all  sex-relations  are  inherently 
impure  and  evil,  and  that  they  should  be  killed  out 
and  marriage  discouraged  and  discountenanced,  is  a 
wrong  and  pernicious  doctrine.  And  as  long  as  such 
teachings  find  credence,  human  nature,  like  a  flowing 
river  which  is  dammed  up,  will  find  an  outlet  in  some 
abnormal  manner.  And  if  the  barriers  of  false  teach- 
ings are  not  speedily  removed  and  the  true  and  nor- 
mal channel  purified  and  cleared  from  obstructions  it 
will  inundate  the  entire  Race. 

"I  note  that  you  emphasize  'legal  marriage' 
as  the  sole  condition  of  intimate  relationship  be- 
tween lovers.  This  seems  to  me  an  arbitrary 
dictum.  Social  and  economic  conditions  are  such 
that  many  legally  married  couples  who  do  not 
love  each  other  in  purity,  who  in  fact  repel  each 
other,  cannot  separate  without  pain  and  distress 
to  those  dependent  upon  them  and  to  whom 
they  owe  conformity  to  public  standards.  Should 
one  in  this  legal  situation  refuse  to  express  love 
through  that  divine  and  ineffable  relation,  even 
though  that  love  is  pure?  In  other  words: 
Does  the  legal  contract  entered  into  during  years 
of  ignorance  bar  one  from  what  would  other- 
wise be  a  sacred,  beautiful,  vital  love?" 

Legal  marriage  by  no  means  insures  purity,  but 
even  if  it  fails  in  this  respect  that  failure  does  not 
mean  that  marriage  was  not  intended  to  fulfill  the 
Law  of  Opposites  in  perfect  purity.  Impurity  arises 
because  the  contracting  parties  have  broken  the  Law, 
and  the  Master  Jesus  said:  "Till  heaven  and  earth 
pass,  one  jot  or  one  tittle  shall  in  no  wise  pass  from 
the  law,  until  all  be  fulfilled/'  While  there  is  but 


The  Sex  Problem  193 

one  Great  Law  governing  the  universe,  yet  it  has 
seven  manifestations,  and  the  words  "jot  and  tittle," 
altho  now  obsolete,  were  used  to  indicate  these  seven 
manifestations. 

The  Great  Law  first  manifests  as  (a)  Order.  This 
means  that  everything  is  tending  toward  perfection 
in  its  proper  place.  The  only  reason  why  one  par- 
ticular jot  or  tittle  is  not  fulfilled  is  that  there  are 
six  other  related  jots  or  tittles  which  must  also  be 
fulfilled. 

The  second  manifestation  is  as  (b)  -Compensation. 
In  every  event  there  is  a  compensation.  You  can 
learn  it  by  comparison,  "as  above,  so  below." 

The  Great  Law  works  as  (c)  Cause  and  Effect  or 
Karma.  "Whatsoever  a  man  soweth,  that  shall  he 
also  reap." 

The  Law  also  expresses  as  (d)  Vibration,  (e)  as 
Polarity,  in  (f)  Cycles  and  (g)  as  Balance.  It  thus 
begins  with  Orderly  Sequence  and  ends  or  is  com- 
pleted by  Balance.  Karma  is  by  no  means  all  the 
Law;  it  is  but  one  of  its  phases. 

The  above,  when  applied  to  the  marriage  relation, 
means  that  only  true  marriage — that  which  is  made  in 
Heaven — can  fulfill  the  Law  in  all  its  manifestations. 
If  the  union  does  not  fulfill  the  laws  of  man  it  is  not 
fulfilling  the  Law  as  Order.  If  it  is  not  a  marriage 
of  love  and  purity  then  it  is  not  fulfilling  the  Law  as 
Vibration  and  as  Polarity  (opposites).  It  may,  how- 
ever, be  fulfilling  other  manifestations  of  the  Law. 
An  unhappy  marriage  may  be  fulfilling  the  Law  as 
Karma.  That  is,  it  may  be  the  result  of  causes  set 
up  and  not  worked  out  in  a  past  life.  This  result 
must  be  worked  out  through  fulfillment  ere  the  Law 
can  work  in  its  fulness  in  the  other  manifestations 
and  bring  you  to  your  true  polar  center  to  be  one 


194  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

with  your  true  complement,  who  alone  can  fulfill  the 
whole  Law  with  you. 

Such  an  unhappy  marriage,  be  it  ever  so  irksome, 
must  be  in  accord  with  some  manifestation  of  the 
Law,  and  hence  is  not  to  be  set  aside  or  terminated 
except  through  fulfillment.  Were  it  not  in  accord 
with  the  Law  there  would  be  nothing  to  hold  you 
to  it  and  it  would  pass  out  of  your  life  and  release 
you  with  scarcely  a  ripple.  If  no  other  manifesta- 
tion can  be  found  the  Law  works  as  Compensation, 
i.  e.,  the  situation  will  bring  you  something  to  be 
gained  either  as  experience,  as  duty  to  perform  or  as 
the  joy  of  parenthood,  etc.  Indeed,  many  marriages 
are  brought  about  and  consummated  by  the  Law 
working  as  Compensation  alone. 

From  the  above  you  will  see  that  marriage,  even 
if  only  an  earthly  bond,  is,  nevertheless,  a  part  of  the 
Law  and  is  not  to  be  set  aside  until  "all  be  fulfilled." 
If  another  love  obtrudes  itself  upon  you,  which  it  is 
pretty  sure  to  do  if  you  are  not  married  to  your  true 
polar  opposite,  the  marriage  becomes  your  great  test. 
Your  new  love  may  be  pure,  in  fact,  if  it  is  love  it 
will  be  pure,  but  you  have  no  right  to  it  until  you 
have  fulfilled  the  manifestation  of  the  Law  under 
which  you  find  yourself.  And  it  cannot  be  consum- 
mated upon  the  physical-plane  without  breaking  the 
law  and  defiling  its  purity.  To  seize  it  before  you 
have  fulfilled  the  old  bond  necessitates  another  long 
experience  of  separateness  until  the  old  bond  is  ful- 
filled and  the  two  can  become  one  on  earth  in  per- 
fect purity,  even  as  they  are  one  in  heaven. 

If  you  believed  in  only  one  life-period  your  atti- 
tude would,  perhaps,  be  reasonable,  but  you  know 
that  each  earth  life  is  but  one  day  at  school,  and  that 
you  can  never  graduate  until  you  have  completed  and 


The   Sex  Problem  195 

mastered  the  course  of  training  laid  down.  Under- 
standing this,  however,  you  grow  patient,  for,  like 
the  boy  at  school,  if  you  play  truant  and  run  away 
to  go  fishing  with  the  girl  of  your  heart,  you  know 
that  the  few  stolen  hours  of  joy  in  her  company  have 
robbed  you  of  the  opportunity  of  enjoying  her  society 
in  much  greater  completeness  after  school  is  over. 

Know,  absolutely,  that  the  Law  is  and  that  it  must 
work  out.  If  one  jot  or  tittle  of  the  Law  could  go 
wrong  in  your  personal  affairs,  all  creation  would  be 
thrown  out  of  harmony.  Hence,  sooner  or  later,  you 
must  fulfill  the  Law  in  love.  And  to  repudiate  any 
present  duty  or  obligation  to  apparently  hasten  that 
fulfillment  is  but  to  stay  the  longer  after  school  and 
put  the  time  of  fulfillment  farther  away.  You  can- 
not fulfill  the  Law  unless  you  are  pure,  and  you  can- 
not be  pure  while  you  violate  any  manifestation  of 
the  Law. 

If  you  are  only  held  by  the  law  of  man  you  must 
fulfill  that  law  in  purity  and  learn  its  lessons  until 
the  end.  If  you  have  made  the  vow  to  "love  her, 
comfort  her,  honor,  and  keep  her  in  sickness  and  in 
health;  and,  forsaking  all  others,  keep  thee  only  unto 
her,  so  long  as  ye  both  shall  live,"  rest  assured  that 
the  Law  will  require  that  vow  of  you  unto  the  last 
jot  and  tittle.  But  that  vow  once  fulfilled,  you  will 
not  be  bound  in  a  future  day  at  school. 

However,  if  all  parties  to  the  vow  agree  to  dissolve 
it,  and  if  there  are  no  circumstances  or  duties  that 
prevent  its  dissolution,  the  vow  no  longer  holds,  or 
rather  it  has  been  fulfilled.  But  as  long  as  one  of 
the  parties  to  the  vow,  either  the  man,  the  woman 
or  the  law  of  man,  holds  to  it  the  vow  is  binding  until 
fulfilled.  Understand  this  point  clearly,  only  by  the 
consent  of  all  the  parties,  the  man,  the  woman  and 


196  Letters  From   the    Teacher 

the  law  of  the  land,  can  the  vow  be  fulfilled  and  the 
bond  dissolved.  But  in  the  event  of  either  party  will- 
fully breaking  the  vow,  and  if  because  of  this  the  in- 
jured party  is  willing  to  waive  his  or  her  claims  to 
the  fulfillment  of  the  vow,  then  he  or  she  is  free  in 
the  eyes  of  the  law  of  God ;  for  a  vow  that  is  broken 
is  annulled,  and  the  law  of  the  land  will  grant  the 
injured  one  legal  freedom. 

July  llth,  1908. 
"I  must  tell  you  frankly  that  I  cannot  agree 

with     some     of     your     teachings The 

celibacy,  for  instance,  of  the  Brahmins  in  the 
east  and  those  desiring  spiritual  development, 
after  fulfilling  all  the  requirements  of  the  mar- 
riage states  by  mutual  consent,  in  a  spiritual 
sense,  as  Jesus  said  'making  themselves  eunuchs 
for  the  kingdom  of  heaven's  sake.  He  that  is 

able  to   receive  it,  let   him  receive  it' 

Jesus,  John,  Paul,  the  Adepts,  the  Masters  and 
Mystics  of  all  ages  have  neither  married  nor  ad- 
vocated it." 

You  make  very  sweeping  statements  as  to  Jesus, 
John,  Paul,  the  Adepts,  etc.,  for  which  you  have  no 
authentic  data.  In  fact,  if  you  were  able  to  read  be- 
tween the  lines  and  within  the  letter  of  all  authentic 
teachings  handed  down  from  the  Great  Teachers,  you 
would  soon  change  your  mind.  In  seeking  for  these 
truths  it  is  necessary  to  take  the  teachings  of  the 
Great  Ones  direct  as  they  fall  from  Their  lips,  or  as 
little  adulterated  by  human  explanations  as  it  is  pos- 
sible to  obtain  them.  The  ones  you  mention  may  or 
may  not  have  married  on  the  physical-plane.  History 
cannot  always  be  relied  upon  in  such  cases,  as  it  is 
generally  made  to  conform  to  the  ideas  of  the  fol- 
lowers several  hundred  years  afterward  as  to  what 
the  Teacher  should  have  done. 


The  Sex  Problem  197 

As  society  is  now  constituted  and  with  so  many 
crass  failures  and  quarrels  and  vile  slanders  among 
so-called  leaders,  all  of  which  are  so  many  stumbling- 
blocks  in  the  way  of  God's  children,  it  is  most  neces- 
sary that  all  things  are  done  so  that  even  the  children 
of  this  world  may  have  no  excuse  for  misunderstand- 
ing, and  so  that  no  moral  law  be  violated,  but  that 
"Ye  shall  render  unto  Caesar  the  things  that  be 
Caesar's  and  unto  God  the  things  that  be  God's." 
The  time  has  come,  and  this  is  primarily  the  Move- 
ment, for  uplifting  the  masses  and  preparing  the  whole 
Race  to  take  a  higher  step  in  evolution.  The  Lodge 
of  Masters,  who  always  work  with  the  cosmic  cur- 
rents, understand  this.  This  is  not  a  period  of  in- 
dividual advance  or  of  the  helping  of  all  by  picking 
out  the  few  and  leading  them  on  to  perfection.  That 
was  a  necessary  way  to  work  in  other  periods  of  the 
world's  history  and  that  was  the  way  chosen,  the  rea- 
son being  that  when  the  period  now  at  hand  should 
come  there  would  be  those  who  would  be  ready  to 
take  up  the  work  for  the  masses.  Now  all  work  is 
along  entirely  different  lines.  The  disciples  chosen 
to  prepare  for  the  coming  Avatar  must  be  able  and 
willing  to  give  up  self,  even  self-advancement,  and 
live  among  men  exemplifying  in  all  things  purity, 
honesty  and  all  the  virtues  approved  of  by  the  world, 
that  the  world  may  see  and  understand.  They  must 
be  careful  to  make  no  wide  separation,  no  gulf,  over 
which  the  flocks  (the  sheep)  cannot  easily  leap,  for 
the  whole  flock  must  be  led  into  green  pastures  and 
beside  still  waters. 

If  you  teach  the  masses  that  to  gain  Heaven  they 
must  give  up  normal  living  and  become  celibates,  the 
result  must  inevitably  be,  as  it  has  always  proved  in 
the  past,  absolutely  abortive  in  so  far  as  the  masses 


198  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

are  concerned.  Cast  your  eye  backward  over  history 
and  honestly  ask  yourself  if  celibacy  has  proved  an 
effective  way  of  saving  or  helping  the  world?  Has 
it  not  rather  made  a  wide  gulf  or  separation?  The 
monks  and  celibates  on  the  one  hand,  swollen  with 
spiritual  pride,  "I  am  holier  than  thou"  written  all 
over  them,  or  at  the  best,  hidden  in  caves,  forgotten 
of  mankind,  their  very  lives  unlived  through  austerity, 
making  very  little  impression  upon  the  community  in 
which  they  lived.  On  the  other  hand  the  masses, 
God's  little  ones,  the  sheep  of  His  fold,  hopelessly 
wallowing  in  the  mire  of  sensuality,  a  prey  to  the 
wolves  of  desire  and  passion,  relegating,  in  a  sort  of 
hopeless  despair,  all  personal  salvation  and  religious 
observances  to  those  who,  in  the  eyes  of  the  masses, 
are  set  apart  to  attend  to  it. 

Under  all  the  seeming  perversity  and  evil  of  human- 
ity there  runs  a  strong  current  of  common-sense  and 
justice.  A  close  student  of  sociology  must  admit  that 
underlying  all  the  rules  of  conventionality  and  so- 
called  worldly  wisdom,  in  fact  the  root  from  which 
these  have  sprung,  there  exists  some  vital  truth  that 
cannot  safely  be  ignored.  The  world  knows  that  the 
instincts  implanted  in  the  human  heart  are  of  God  and 
are  necessary  for  the  development  and  advancement 
of  the  race ;  that  the  married  state  is  holy  and  that 
it  embraces  and  brings  forth  and  makes  possible  all 
that  is  most  uplifting  and  sacred  in  human  life.  There- 
fore, when  taught  that  the  normal  functioning  of  these 
natural  instincts  are  of  the  Devil,  their  sense  of  jus- 
tice is  outraged  and  they  choose  the  Devil  for  a  mas- 
ter. Since  they  are  taught  that  there  is  no  hope  of 
reaching  perfection  in  a  natural  way,  they  turn  their 
backs  upon  an  unjust  God,  leaving  that  conception  of 
God  to  those  who,  either  from  spiritual  pride  or  be- 


The   Sex  Problem  199 

cause  all  normal  instincts  are  burned  out  owing  to 
abuse  in  past  lives,  or  who  have  never  cultivated  the 
heart-center,  are  self-elected  to  stand  as  the  advocates 
of  those  whom  they  consider  lost  sheep. 

This  whole  plan  must  now  be  changed.  The  first 
ones  to  walk  the  new  path  must  expect  stones,  mud 
and  gibes  from  those  of  the  old  regime.  Many  will 
say  of  them,  as  was  said  of  the  Master  Jesus,  that  they 
consort  with  sinners  and  eat  bread  (symbolic  of  spirit- 
ual food)  with  them.  In  fact,  this  taunt  alone,  if 
rightly  taken  and  understood  in  its  real  meaning, 
would  be  a  positive  refutation  of  the  assertion  you 
make  about  Jesus.  But  there  are  many  more  refuta- 
tions. We  will  take  the  chapter  from  which  you  quote, 
remembering  always  that  the  Bible,  instead  of  being 
a  history  of  necessarily  physical  events,  is  a  gathering 
together  of  parables  and  allegories.  Taking  this  view 
one  of  the  greatest  objections  to  it  is  removed,  namely 
that  the  events  following  consecutively  have  no  bear- 
ing on  each  other ;  for  it  has  been  proved  that  they 
occurred  at  widely  separated  times  and  places.  They 
follow  each  other  consecutively  because  that  order  is 
necessary  to  bear  out  the  lesson  being  taught.  In 
other  words,  a  series  of  narratives  is  related  which 
may  or  may  not  have  happened ;  but  it  does  not  matter, 
as  they  are  merely  tales  to  illustrate  the  point  at  issue. 
They  are  placed  together  because  they  emphasize  dif- 
fering phases  of  the  one  lesson.  Let  us  take  the  chap- 
ter from  which  you  quote. 

First  it  is  recorded  that :  "The  Pharisees  came  unto 
him,  tempting  him,  and  saying  unto  him,  Is  it  lawful 
for  a  man  to  put  away  his  wife  for  every  cause  ?  And 
he  answered  and  said  unto  them,  Have  ye  not  read, 
that  he  which  made  them  at  the  beginning  made  them 
male  and  female? Wherefore  they  are  no 


200  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

more  twain,  but  one  flesh.  What  therefore  God  hath 
joined  together,  let  not  man  put  asunder."  The"  Phari- 
sees then  went  on  to  ask  about  divorce.  Jesus  an- 
swered: "Moses  because  of  the  hardness  of  your 
hearts  suffered  you  to  put  away  your  wives :  but  from 
the  beginning  it  was  not  so."  This  plainly  means 
that  it  is  possible,  because  of  dense  physical  vibra- 
tions of  passion  alone,  to  be  joined  by  man  with  no 
spiritual  marriage  by  God.  In  such  a  case  it  is  not 
only  lawful,  but  necessary  for  the  advancement  of  each 
for  them  to  separate.  Then  His  disciples,  who  evi- 
dently were  imbued  with  the  same  teachings  that  are 
now  puzzling  you,  said,  "If  the  case  of  the  man  be 
so  with  his  wife,  it  is  not  good  to  marry."  But  the 
significant  answer  of  Jesus  plainly  shows  that  He  was 
not,  as  generally  interpreted,  apologizing  for  saying 
so  positively  that  God  did  join  the  twain  into  one 
flesh,  for  this  would  put  Him  in  a  most  vacillating 
position.  His  answer  was  to  show  why  there  were 
instances  when  the  exception  proved  the  rule.  This  is 
so  plain  that  it  is  remarkable  that  people  of  common- 
sense  can  so  twist  it  as  to  make  it  apparently  mean 
exactly  the  opposite,  following  as  it  does  the  reasons 
for  separation  and  being  a  direct  answer  to  the  state- 
ment, "It  is  not  good  to  marry."  "All  men  cannot 
receive  this  saying,  save  they  to  whom  it  is  given." 
"This  saying"  was  manifestly  "Wherefore  they  are  no 
more  twain,  but  one  flesh.  What  therefore  God  hath 
joined  together,  let  no  man  put  asunder."  Then  He 
goes  on  to  say  what  you  quote  above  about  eunuchs. 
This,  if  read  as  a  continuation  of  the  same  remark, 
shows  plainly  that  Jesus  did  not  mean  to  commend 
or  approve  of  eunuchs — for  in  another  place  the  mak- 
ing of  eunuchs  is  expressly  forbidden — but  meant  to 
show  why  man  could  not  understand  "this  saying." 


The   Sex  Problem  201 

It  was  in  substance  the  same  teaching  that  I  am  now 
giving  you. 

Immediately  a  new  parable  is  introduced,  namely, 
"Suffer  little  children,  and  forbid  them  not,  to  come 
unto  me."  This  is  a  strong  confirmation  that  those 
who  will  enter  the  Kingdom  are  not  those  who  have 
made  eunuchs  of  themselves  for  the  kingdom  of 
heaven's  sake  (a  eunuch  being  a  mutilation  of  the 
divine  form,  an  abnormal  and  imperfect  man),  but 
those  who  have  become  as  little  children.  This  is  then 
followed  by  the  story  of  the  rich  young  man,  rich  in 
psychic  gifts,  an  earnest  follower  of  yogi  practices, 
etc.  "All  these  things  have  I  kept  from  my  youth 
up/'  i.  e.,  the  commandments,  the  austerities  and  prac- 
tices and  observances  of  the  law.  But  Jesus  told  him, 
"Sell  that  thou  hast  and  give  to  the  poor,  and  thou 
shalt  have  treasure  in  heaven :  and  come  and  follow 
me,"  i.  e.,  The  Christ.  After  this  follows  the  so  much 
misunderstood  saying,  "It  is  easier  for  a  camel  to  go 
through  the  eye  of  a  needle,  than  for  a  rich  man  to 
enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God."  This  means  that  there 
is  a  wider  separation  between  a  mere  animal's  de- 
veloping its  psychic  faculties — for  only  by  functioning 
in  the  fourth  dimension  could  a  camel  pass  through 
the  eye  of  a  needle — than  for  a  man  rich  in  psychic 
development,  who  at  the  same  time  set  himself  apart 
from  others  and  was  puffed  up  with  spiritual  pride 
and  in  danger  of  resting  on  his  own  superior  knowl- 
edge, to  enter  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  The  last  par- 
agraph of  that  chapter  positively  confirms  the  idea  that 
all  these  parables  were  dealing  with  one  and  the  same 
lesson.  "But  many  that  are  first  shall  be  last;  and 
the  last  shall  be  first." 

Another  passage  so  frequently  quoted  in  this  con- 
nection is,  "But  they  which  shall  be  accounted  worthy 


202  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

to  obtain  that  world,  and  the  resurrection  from  the 
dead,  neither  marry,  nor  are  given  in  marriage ;  neither 

can  they  die  any  more being  the  children  of 

the  resurrection."  The  explanation  is  that  spiritual 
marriage  once  made  can  never  be  unmade — the  one 
flesh  can  never  again  become  twain.  Naturally  those 
who  attain  the  resurrection  will  neither  marry  nor  be 
given  in  marriage  because  they  are  married  for  all 
eternity ;  they  have  learned  their  earthly  lesson.  We 
might  as  well  say  that  it  is  wrong  to  die  because  per- 
fected Souls  will  die  no  more.  "Whoso  hath  ears  to 
hear  and  heart  to  comprehend,  let  him  hear." 

May  23rd,    1908. 

"What  is  your  advice  to  one  who  is  troubled 
with  impure  thoughts  and  dreams  on  the  sex- 
question?" 

Recognize  that  the  sex-force  is  the  Great  Creative 
Force ;  that  it  is  given  to  man  as  his  crowning  glory. 
It  is  also  man's  greatest  test,  the  test  being  not  that 
he  must  kill  it  out,  as  so  many  teach,  but  that  he  use 
it  aright.  As  soon  as  you  recognize  this  grand  truth 
you  at  once  ask,  What  am  I  expected  to  create?  You 
know  that  it  can  only  occasionally  be  used  to  create  a 
tabernacle  in  which  an  immortal  Soul  can  dwell,  and 
this  of  course  only  in  the  legitimate  marriage  relation. 
And  even  on  these  occasions  it  must  be  taken  up 
seriously,  earnestly,  in  perfect  purity  and  with  spiritual 
aspirations,  and  then  only  under  the  most  favorable 
circumstances.  But,  you  ask,  what  about  its  use  at  all 
other  times?  Bear  in  mind  that  procreation  is  not  the 
only  use  of  this  power,  for  when  guided  by  the  Will 
it  creates  whatever  man  desires.  In  the  lower  animals 
it  is  but  a  function  for  perpetuating  the  species,  hence 
its  call  ceases  to  be  persistent  when  the  proper  season 
is  past,  unless,  through  association  with  mankind,  the 


The   Sex  Problem  203 

animal  has  become  abnormal  in  this  respect;  but  with 
man  there  are  no  seasons  or  times  when  it  is  more 
persistent  than  at  others.  This  shows  that  man  is  ex- 
pected to  use  his  faculty  of  creative  thought  to  harness 
this  great  river  of  creative  force  and  make  it  create 
for  him  according  to  his  Will. 

Our  advice  then  is  to  give  this  matter  no  more  at- 
tention than  any  other  normal  function  receives.  That 
is,  see  that  it  is  put  to  its  proper  use;  see  that  it  does 
not  become  your  master  and  take  up  an  undue  amount 
of  your  thought,  but  that  it  is  kept  an  obedient  servant 
ready  to  do  your  will  when  called  upon. 

If  you  feel  its  call  persistently,  or  if  you  find  your- 
self growing  irritable  with  no  apparent  reason,  say  to 
yourself,  "I  am  a  creator,  what  shall  I  create?"  Then 
turn  your  mind  at  once  to  something  you  desire  to 
accomplish,  knowing  that  this  force  is  the  power  that 
will  create  for  you  the  objects  of  your  desires.  It  will 
create  within  you  such  desirable  qualities  as  you  find 
you  lack.  If  you  have  a  fault  you  wish  to  correct, 
create  its  opposite.  Think  no  more  about  the  fault, 
but  put  all  your  thought  on  its  opposite.  For  in- 
stance, if  you  are  given  to  evil  imaginings  on  this  sub- 
ject, when  you  feel  the  creative  power  coming  upon 
you  at  once  begin  to  create  lofty  ideals  and  thoughts 
of  purity.  Understand  that  nothing  can  come  to  you 
that  you  yourself  do  not  admit  within  your  aura.  The 
impure  thought-forms  are  your  own  creations,  created 
by  the  impure  use  of  the  creative  force.  Strive,  then, 
with  all  your  might  to  send  out  thought-forms  of  pur- 
ity in  such  numbers  and  with  such  power  that  they 
will  transmute  and  redeem  the  impure  ones. 

Remember  that  thoughts  are  things  and  must  ex- 
press through  their  creator.  Man  is  under  absolute 
bondage  to  thought.  Thought-forms  surround  him 


204  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

and  draw  their  life  from  him.  If  evil,  they  tempt  him 
to  pour  out  fresh  force  in  evil  channels  that  they  may 
gain  more  life,  for  thoughts  similar  to  themselves  sup- 
ply them  with  energy,  while  thoughts  of  purity  with- 
hold life  from  them.  The  Voi-ce  of  the  Silence  says, 
"If  thou  wouldst  not  be  slain  by  them,  then  must  thou 
harmless  make  thy  own  creations,  the  children  of  thy 
thoughts,  unseen,  impalpable,  that  swarm  round  hu- 
mankind, the  progeny  and  heirs  to  man  and  his  ter- 
restrial spoils."  Create  thoughts  of  purity,  chastity, 
control,  etc.,  and  divert  the  physical  force  by  at  once 
beginning  some  definite  line  of  work;  if  not  in  build- 
ing up  your  character,  then  in  some  kind  of  mental 
work,  realizing  that  you  are  consciously  using  your 
creative  force.  Sit  down  and  write  an  article  embody- 
ing just  what  you  desire  to  create  within  yourself  or 
your  idea  of  what  perfect  purity  means.  If  this  is 
not  convenient,  begin  some  task  with  your  hands, 
something  that  will  involve  manual  labor  and  require 
thought  and  energy  for  its  execution.  Do  some  kind, 
unselfish  act  for  another  that  will  necessitate  thought 
and  careful  planning  not  to  wound;  something  that 
would  remain  undone  but  for  your  efforts.  Take  a 
tramp  out  in  the  open  to  some  objective  point,  observ- 
ing the  harmony  and  beauty  of  Nature,  and  realize 
how  everything  in  Nature  has  its  normal  place  and  its 
normal  and  natural  use  until  perverted  by  man.  Real- 
ize that  you  are  asserting  your  prerogative  as  a  creator 
and  that  the  sex-force  is  the  motive  power  which  you 
are  using. 

If  you  do  any  of  these  things  you  will  not  have  to 
puzzle  yourself  about  how  the  force  is  transmuted  into 
mental  energy  or  with  finding  out  the  particular  path 
by  which  it  reaches  the  brain,  and  yet  you  will  divert 
its  expression  from  the  physical  organs  to  the  mental- 


The   Sex  Problem  205 

plane  in  a  perfectly  normal  way.  If  you  furnish  the 
thought-forms  and  the  Will  to  create  purity,  the  forces 
will  follow  out  your  directions  without  your  having  to 
go  into  particulars.  Above  all,  you  will  divert  your 
attention  from  the  physical  expression  of  this  force. 

If  you  should  have  a  failure  in  following  this  plan, 
waste  no  thought  upon  it,  but  pick  yourself  up  and 
with  more  determination  than  ever  strive  to  create 
around  you  thought-forms  of  purity,  and  of  helpful- 
ness to  others,  for  these  must  express  through  you  and 
will  strengthen  you  for  the  future. 

Each  night  before  retiring  repeat  The  Healing 
Prayer  and  say  repeatedly,  until  you  have  impressed 
it  upon  your  subconscious  mind,  "I  refuse  to  create ! 
I  refuse  to  create  this  night !"  Then  when  impure 
dreams  come  to  you  you  will  be  able  to  conquer  even 
before  you  awake  and  realize  what  has  happened.  Put 
your  failures  behind  you.  Give  them  no  more  force 
by  thinking  of  them  or  worrying  about  them.  Live 
each  day  and  each  night  for  itself,  for  if  you  can  con- 
quer one  day  at  a  time  you  conquer  all. 

Hundreds  of  students  have  followed  this  plan  and 
have  found  it  practical.  You  can  do  the  same.  But 
do  not  expect  to  master  this  question  in  a  day.  This 
force  is  like  any  other,  it  sweeps  you  off  your  feet  only 
when  you  place  yourself  under  it.  Harness  it  by  your 
will-power  and  you  are  its  master  and  it  a  most  won- 
derful servant. 


PART  X. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

"Never  utter  these  words:  'I  do  not  know  this — 
therefore  it  is  false.'  One  must  study  to  know,  know 
to  understand,  understand  to  judge."  Narada. 


Miscellaneous  209 

PART  X. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

April  27th,  1908. 

"I  have  regarded  the  human  beings  of  today  as 
the  descendants  of  a  species  of  human  animals, 
if  one  may  call  them  so Am  I  cor- 
rect?" 

Your  query  as  to  the  descent  of  man  from  a  human 
animal  can  only  be  touched  upon  here.  For  fuller  in- 
formation on  this  point  we  refer  you  to  The  Secret 
Doctrine,  Vol.  i\  where  you  will  find  all  about  the 
different  stages  of  man  and  about  the  apes.  etc.  If 
you  do  not  have  access  to  the  unabridged  work  in  your 
public  library,  we  would  advise  you  to  get  the  abridged 
edition. 

The  subject  is  too  long  for  a  letter,  but,  briefly 
stated,  man  descended  from  the  gods  who  breathed2 
into  evolved  animal  forms  the  Divine  Breath  of  Life 
that  through  these  animal  bodies  he  might  gain  experi- 
ence on  the  lowest  or  earth-plane.  The  task  given  to 
each  Soul  therefore,  is  to  redeem  the  physical  atoms 
with  which  it  clothes  itself  and,  through  the  experience 
thus  gained,  evolve  back  to  the  starting  point  plus  the 
experience  and  knowledge  gained.  Redemption  means 
the  redemption  of  all  the  atoms  of  all  the  various 
bodies  that  the  Fathers  (Pitris — the  "gods")  have 
given  in  your  keeping.  By  redeeming  your  own  body 
that  much  of  the  earth  is  uplifted  and  spiritualized. 
And  that  is  the  only  way  the  earth  can  be  redeemed ; 
for,  every  vibration  of  spiritual  force  to  which  the 

1  Also  see  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss,  Chapters  III  and  XVII. 

2  Genesis  II,  7. 


210  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

human  monad  responds,  sends  an  answering  wave  of 
force  through  the  whole  cosmos.  Thus,  by  man  and 
through  man,  shall  the  earth  be  redeemed. 

Therefore  you  are  quite  right  in  saying  that  circum- 
stances neither  make  nor  mar  the  spiritual  growth  of 
man.  For  the  moment  he  identifies  himself,  even  im- 
perfectly, with  his  Father-in-heaven — his  very  personal 
and  individual  god — he  becomes  master  of  his  condi- 
tions, ruler  over  circumstance  and  Savior  of  his  bodies 
and  his  animal  nature — in  a  word,  is  Lord  of  his  King- 
dom. Then  he  literally  sits  down  at  the  right  hand 
of  his  Father,  and  his  enemies  (his  desires  and  animal 
appetites)  are  his  foot-stool  and  are  the  servants  of 
his  will. 

Reincarnation  is  the  only  logical  unraveling  of  the 
mystery  of  life,  and  a  person  is  blind  and  wandering  in 
the  dark  until  he  finds  this  life-line.  Then  at  once  all  be- 
gins to  shape  itself,  and  in  the  fulness  of  time  all  the 
crooked  places  are  made  straight  and  life  unfolds  like 
the  pages  of  a  beautiful  book.  We  never  mind  bear- 
ing trials  when  we  know  that  they  are  merely  correct- 
ing mistakes  made  in  a  past  life,  or  else  learning 
needed  lessons  in  this.  Trials  are  not  given  as  pun- 
ishments, but  as  the  only  means  of  making  us  learn 
the  lessons  that  will  fit  us  to  take  our  real  places  at 
the  right  hand  of  God-the-Father,  and  to  gain  a 
greater  realization  of  His  nearness  and  help  while  here 
below.  You  have  the  correct  attitude  of  waiting  for 
more  light  instead  of  denouncing  wha.,  for  the  time, 
is  beyond  your  comprehension. 

June  17th,  1908. 
"I  was  delighted  with  some  of  the  teachings 

of and  was  therefore  very  glad  that  I 

was  going  to  meet  her  personally.  But  no  sooner 
did  I  lay  my  eyes  upon  her  and  hear  her  speak, 
than  I  felt  sorely  disappointed Finally 


Miscellaneous  211 

she  repelled  me  to  such  an  extent  that  I  actually 

felt  aversion  to  her Her  lectures  about 

appear     to     me      simply     ridiculous, 

it   simply   seems   absurd,  nay,   childish 

nonsense.    Some  of  the  articles  in  the 

for  June,  especially  one  by  Mr seem  to  me 

ridiculous  and  rather  sad.  Owing  to  these  cir- 
cumstances I  am  sometimes  beset  with  doubts  as 
to  the  truthfulness  of  the teachings." 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  on  your  part,  which  it 
will  be  well  for  you  to  look  in  the  face  and  recognize 
for  what  it  is,  to  judge  with  human  judgment  the  acts 
and  teachings  of  others.  The  Christ,  through  Jesus, 
the  man,  said:  "Judge  not  that  ye  be  not  judged. 
For  with  what  judgment  ye  judge,  ye  shall  be  judged," 
meaning  that  if  you  bring  your  sister  or  brother  up 
before  the  judgment-seat  of  the  wisdom  of  the  mere 
worldly  conception  of  what  is  "nonsense,  ridiculous," 
etc.,  you  yourself  must  be  content  with  and  must  ex- 
pect to  be  judged  from  no  higher  standpoint.  You 
must  make  your  life,  your  physical  appearance  and 
your  words  conform  absolutely  to  the  outer  letter  of 
the  law — failure  must  mean  condemnation  to  you.  Try 
to  realize  that  you  have  nothing  to  do  with  the  failure 
or  success  of  anyone  but  your  own  personality,  and 
that  one  lesson  alone  stands  out  plainly  and  distinctly 
so  that  "He  who  runs  may  read,"  i.  e.,  "Be  ye  not  con- 
formed to  this  world,  but  be  ye  transformed  by  the 
renewal  of  your  minds."  This  means  that  we  must 
renew  our  minds  by  changing  our  ways  of  thinking. 
Instead  of  looking  for  the  mote  in  the  eye  of  your 
sister  or  brother,  seek  diligently  for  the  beam  that  is 
in  your  own  eye. 

You  will  never  find  Truth  in  any  teachings  if  Truth, 
to  you,  depends  upon  the  perfection  of  the  instrument 
through  which  that  Truth  is  expressed.  Truth  con- 


212  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

fronts  you  on  every  side.  Therefore,  dear  brother, 
learn  to  seek  Truth  for  Truth's  sake.  Look  for  it 
among  the  stubble  and  muck  of  life  and  in  the  dark 
places  where  humanity  crawls  in  filth;  look  for  it  hid- 
den under  the  mountains  of  selfishness  and  self-suffi- 
ciency of  teachers ;  seek  for  it  as  a  Jewel  of  Great 
Price  that  has  been  lost;  for  you  may  find  the  Jewel 
where  you  least  expect  it.  But  first  rise  up  and  sweep 
your  own  house  diligently. 

No  Master,  or  even  a  Savior,  can  dispel  your  doubts ; 
for  they  are  the  natural  result  of  your  attitude.  Until 
you  learn  the  lesson  of  separating  Truth  from  person- 
ality your  doubts  will  never  be  set  at  rest.  Consider 
carefully  the  saying  found  in  I  Corinthians,  II,  14: 
"But  the  natural  receiveth  not  the  things  of  the  Spirit 
of  God :  for  they  are  foolishness  unto  him :  neither  can 
he  know  them,  because  they  are  spiritually  discerned." 
All  this  means,  dear  brother,  that  you  must  cultivate 
the  power  of  spiritual  discernment  and  not  allow  any- 
thing to  turn  you  aside  from  Truth.  Truth  often 
comes  in  most  repulsive  disguises,  and  it  is  a  test  to 
the  Soul  to  recognize  it  and  separate  the  grain  from 
the  husks,  not  swallowing  them  to  get  the  grain.  You 
might  as  well  swallow  a  walnut  whole  because  the 
kernel  is  sweet  and  wholesome.  Do  as  you  would  with 
any  material  thing  presented  to  you :  crack  the  nut,  no 
matter  how  black  and  repellant  the  shell,  and  extract 
the  kernel. 

April  2nd,  1908. 

"Where  does  imagination  spring  from?  Does 
it  entirely  belong  to  the  subconscious,  or  to  a  sort 
of  central  point  between  the  soul  and  the  sub- 
conscious? Why  does  it  attack  me  and  carry  me 
away  into  the  future  tense,  offering  pessimism? 
Is  the  reason  why  it  affects  me  so  strongly  due  to 
my  being  under  a  deep  earthy  sign?  it  belonging 
to  the  moon?" 


Miscellaneous  213 

Imagination  is  a  function  of  the  Soul.  It  is  the 
power  derived  from  the  Higher  Self  for  the  purpose, 
through  deliberately  willing  it,  of  creating  upon  the 
mental-plane.  Pessimism  has  nothing  in  common  with 
it,  nor  does  the  subconscious  control  it.  But  happy  is 
the  man  who  has  the  subconscious  under  the  control 
of  the  imagination,  for  it  is  by  this  power  that  the  true 
image  of  the  Real  Self  is  created,  and  by  it  is  the  link 
between  the  personality  and  the  individuality  made 
strong. 

Beware  of  confusing  imagination  with  fancy  or  idle 
dreaming.  Fancy  is  born  of  the  rhythm  of  the  vibra- 
tions of  the  subconscious,  and  is  either  pessimistic, 
fearful  or  egotistical  or  any  other  thing  which,  by 
being  long  indulged  in,  has  been  able  to  set  up  a  vibra- 
tory center  in  the  subconscious.  Such  a  center  will 
continue  to  vibrate  in  the  same  key  until  the  Higher 
Will  comes  in  and,  through  the  power  of  imagination, 
changes  the  rate  of  its  vibration.  The  sign  of  your 
nativity  cannot  affect  this  power,  but  the  tendency  to 
pessimism  is  no  doubt  strengthened  by  the  planetary 
influence.  Do  not  get  confused — it  is  fancy  that  tends 
to  pessimism.  By  proper  use  of  imagination  you  must 
impart  a  new  vibration  to  the  subconscious.  Deter- 
mine to  create  new  images  of  happiness  and  success; 
and  with  all  the  power  of  Will,  make  the  subconscious 
respond.  Never  give  in  to  the  old  vibrations.  This  is 
one  of  the  most  important  lessons  for  you  to  learn  in 
this  incarnation. 

April  20th,  1908. 

"Without  being  impatient  for  advanced  work 
or  intellectual  diversions  I  should  be  greatly  in- 
terested to  learn  the  occult  significance  and  place 
of  music  and  geometry.  'God  geometrizes'  has 
always  been  a  dark  saying  to  me, — the  only  sense 
in  which  I  can  comprehend  it  being  that  certain 


214  Letters  From  the  Teath-er 

numbers  play  an  important  part  in  the  manifested 
universe, — like  3  in  the  fundamental  constituents 
of  the  universe,  and  in  the  modes  of  intellect, 
the  dimensions  of  space,  etc.  Or  like  the  number 
7  in  the  tones  of  the  octave,  or  in  the  colors  of  the 
spectrum,  etc." 

You  have  a  correct  idea  of  the  saying,  "God  geomet- 
rizes,"  and  study  along  that  line  will  open  vistas  of 
unexpected  interest.  Take  geometry  to  include  not 
only  form  but  number,  color  and  sound  as  well.  This 
makes  the  square — the  symbol  of  all  manifestation  that 
pertains  to  earth.  Man  is  composed  of  seven  prin- 
ciples, four  lower — the  square — and  three  higher — the 
triangle.  (See  The  Secret  Doctrine,  Vol.  //,  p.  625 
et  seq.  Also  The  Voice  of  I  sis,  Chapter  xxviii.)  Study 
the  formation  of  crystals,  even  snow  or  frost  crystals, 
and  you  will  at  once  see  the  geometrical  forms  that 
vapor  takes  upon  crystallizing.  Also  look  up  the  com- 
mon experiment  in  physics  in  covering  a  metal  plate 
with  fine  sand  and  then  vibrating  the  plate  with  a  bow, 
and  note  how  every  different  note  or  tone  produces  a 
characteristic  geometrical  figure  in  the  sand  on  the 
plate.  All  forces  (vibrations)  when  expressing  in  (i. 
e.,  condensed  into)  matter  act  along  geometrical  lines. 
The  designs  produced  are  not  haphazard  formations 
but  are  the  mathematical  expressions  of  certain 
thought- forms  (vibrations)  from  the  higher  planes. 
Every  material  form,  from  crystal  to  man,  is  the  math- 
ematical, and  indeed  the  only  possible,  expression  of 
certain  combinations  of  vibrations  (ideas)  upon  the 
higher  planes,  the  universe  as  a  whole  being  an  ex- 
pressed thought-form  of  the  Absolute.  Thoughts,  be- 
ing forces,  must  express  along  geometrical  lines  that 
are  mathematically  exact. 

A  deep  study  of  plant  life  will  convince  you  that  the 
form,  number  or  color  of  every  leaf  and  flower  ex- 


Miscellaneous  215 

presses  itself  also  in  sound,  and,  were  your  ears  at- 
tuned to  Nature's  voice,  you  will  find  each  perfect 
flower  a  symphony  expressing  the  characteristics  of 
the  particular  plant  to  which  it  belonged.  Moreover, 
for  those  who  can  read,  Nature  is  an  open  book  and 
there  are  "Tongues  in  trees,  books  in  running  brooks, 
sermons  in  stones,"  for  the  form,  color  and  number 
of  every  thing  that  grows  teil  man  the  inner  meaning 
of  the  plant  together  with  its  uses  for  man.  For  those 
who  study  her  Nature  speaks  with  no  uncertain  voice. 
"Who  hath  ears  to  hear  let  him  hear." 

June  21st,  1908. 

"I  will  say  that  by  studying  the  papers  you 
have  sent  me  I  find  myself  comprehending  truths 
that  I  did  not  realize  before.  I  find  myself  get- 
ting nearer,  and  realize  enough  to  feel  confi- 
dence in  the  teachings  given  and  'to  have  no 
doubts  as  to  their  source.  They  attract  me  as 
a  magnet,  and  are  drawing  me  nearer  all  the 
while.  In  connection  with  this  I  wish  to  ask  if 
it  is  right  and  proper  to  look  forward  to,  and 
bend  my  efforts  in  that  direction,  and  try  to  attain 
to,  the  conditions  that  will  make  an  immediate 
return  possible  after  passing  out  of  this  body?" 

We  are  happy  to  hear  that  your  brain  consciousness 
is  registering  the  nearness  of  your  Teachers,  for  it  is 
a  living  reality.  But,  until  you  could  sense  it,  it  would 
be  mere  words  to  you.  If  you  were  stone  blind  and 
deaf  you  might  be  in  the  midst  of  ravishing  beauty 
and  close  to  strains  of  heavenly  music,  but  until  your 
eyes  were  opened  and  your  ears  unstopped  you  could 
not  well  perceive  the  beauty  and  harmony  that  sur- 
rounded you. 

As  to  your  question  about  immediate  reincarnation, 
that  is  a  matter  which  is  under  your  own  control  if 
there  is  a  reason  great  enough  to  make  the  sacrifice 
necessary.  It  may  be  that  your  Higher  Self  is  im- 


216  Letters  From  the  Teacher 

pressing  upon  you  the  fact  that  such  a  return  will  take 
place,  as  a  warning  to  you  to  make  every  preparation. 
Remember  that  there  is  always  a  Karma  that  must, 
of  necessity,  be  worked  out  on  the  physical-plane,  but 
as  the  time  of  ex-carnation  is  a  time  of  assimilation 
and  growth — a  time  for  digesting  the  experience 
gained — the  preparation  for  the  loss  of  this  period  by 
immediate  reincarnation  should  be  a  careful  assimila- 
tion while  here.  That  is,  make  a  great  effort  to  go 
slow  and  digest  and  assimilate  all  experiences.  Learn 
to  seek  in  every  event  its  inner  meaning  and  bearing 
on  life.  Seek  its  why  and  wherefore.  Try  to  chew 
slowly  and  digest  as  you  go  along. 

The  danger  in  an  immediate  reincarnation  (which 
is  by  no  means  as  rare  as  some  suppose)  is  that  the 
astral  body  does  not  have  time  to  separate  from  the 
body  of  desire,  and,  being  full  of  vigor,  it  attaches 
itself  to  the  newly  formed  astral  body  and  becomes 
a  "Dweller  on  the  Threshold"  much  more  tangible, 
that  is,  more  dense  and  earthly,  than  the  ordinary 
"Dweller"  which  all  must  face.  In  such  exceptional 
cases  this  dense  "Dweller"  is  so  close  to  the  reincar- 
nating Ego  that  it  becomes  a  haunting  presence 
throughout  life,  and  through  it  any  old,  uncorrected 
faults  and  tendencies  of  the  past  are  apt  to  be  inten- 
sified rather  than  corrected  in  the  new  incarnation. 
Unless  all  this  is  understood  in  a  practical  way  and 
prepared  for,  very  little  advance  can  be  made  in  such 
an  incarnation,  the  two  life-periods  becoming  like  one 
physical  expression  without  time  for  rest  and  assimi- 
lation between.  It  would  be  much  like  eating  your 
breakfast  and  immediately  eating  your  dinner  to  save 
time  at  noon. 

There  is  a  way,  however,  for  those  who  know — a 
way  which  the  wise  and  determined  can  find — that  will 


Miscellaneous  217 

prolong  one-life  period  over  the  period  usually  occu- 
pied by  two  or  more,  if  there  is  work  of  such  import- 
ance that  it  demands  continued  presence  on  the  physi- 
cal-plane. Eugene  Sue's  fictitious  tale  of  The  Wan- 
dering Jew,  and  many  other  tales  of  similar  character, 
are  founded  upon  a  physiological  and  psychological  pos- 
sibility that  has  been  demonstrated  more  than  once. 
But  it  is  well  to  consider  the  suffering  and  loneliness 
entailed,  unless  you  have  gained  Wisdom  and  Mastery 
ere  experimenting.  It  might  be  of  advantage  to  your 
spiritual  growth  if  the  effort  made  you  more  diligent 
and  better  prepared  to  gain  such  mastery  over  the 
desire-body  while  in  the  flesh  as  to  leave  it  with  very 
little  strength  to  haunt  a  new  life,  or  to  gain  Mastery 
now  so  that  even  passing  out  would  be  unnecessary. 
As  you  say,  you  are  no  coward  and  no  drone.  There- 
fore, we  say,  if  you  are  strongly  impressed  to  take  this 
path,  go  forward  in  the  power  and  might  of  the  Spirit. 
Dare — do — keep  silent. 

June  22nd,   1908. 
"I  cannot  report  much  progress,  I  am  disgusted 

with     myself I     have     sold    hares     to 

the medical  school !  and  pets  at  that ! !    I 

always  keep  them  on  my  place  for  eating,  but 
to  sell  them  to  be  tortured!  for  a  very  little 
money!  I  simply  feel  degraded  in  my  own  eyes. 
And  you  see  I  am  almost  a  hopeless  case,  for 
anyone  who  would  do  that  surely  is  not  fit  for 
the  Kingdom.  They  tell  me  they  are  etherized 
but  I  do  not  believe  it,  as  that  would  defeat 
their  own  ends.  They  tell  me  it  is  for  'the  bene- 
fit of  science,'  but  that  is  not  what  I  sell  them 
for!" 

We  have  received  your  letter  of  self-depreciation 
and  we  must  tell  you,  dear  sister,  that  self-deprecia- 
tion, without  a  determined  effort  to  overcome  the  faults 
you  depreciate,  will  soon  degenerate  into  morbid  self- 


218  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

pity  rather  than  self-respect  and  proper  assertiveness. 
When  you  know  a  thing  is  wrong  never  give  yourself 
a  chance  to  make  an  excuse,  but  hold  the  whip-hand 
and  keep  the  reins  steady  until  the  obstreperous  self 
goes  along  the  path  marked  out. 

The  Master  Jesus  said:  "It  must  be  that  these 
things  come  into  the  world,  but  woe  unto  him  by  whom 
they  come/'  and  this  is  true  of  all  suffering.  The  poor 
animals  which  suffer  that  humanity  may  be  benefited 
are  not  given  a  chance  to  make  the  suffering  a  vica- 
rious atonement  altho  the  suffering  pushes  them  for- 
ward in  their  evolution.  Yet,  since  it  is  forced  upon 
them  and,  from  their  point  of  view,  is  the  result 
cruelty,  it  leaves  its  imprint  upon  the  matter  of  their 
subconsciousness.  As  this  matter  is  taken  up  again 
and  again  until  it  is  finally  redeemed  at  the  end  of  its 
evolution  by  coming  under  the  self-conscious  dominion 
of  a  human  Ego,  this  cruelty  will  manifest  after  its 
kind  all  along  the  path  of  evolution.  No  matter  what 
sort  of  a  body  such  atoms  may  be  incorporated  in,  the 
sense  of  cruelty  and  suffering  unjustly  caused  will 
endeavor  to  work  out  in  an  effort  to  adjust  the  balance, 
and  will  prey  upon  humanity  in  some  way  and  give 
back  suffering  for  suffering.  This  is  one  of  the  chief 
ways  in  which  the  Law  of  Karma  works.  There  must 
be  an  adjustment.  If  the  pendulum  swings  too  vio- 
lently to  the  left  it  must  swing  correspondingly  to  the 
right  until  from  the  very  force  of  extremes,  a  balance 
is  attained.  It  makes  little  difference  as  far  as  the 
Law  of  Retribution  works  out,  if  the  doctors  do  think 
they  are  justified  and  that  a  corresponding  good  will 
result  to  the  human  race.  There  is  but  one  law, 
namely,  all  things  reproduce  after  their  kind. 

There  are  always  two  effects  to  every  cause  or  im- 
pulse set  up ;  the  out-going  vibration  of  the  initial  im- 


Miscellan  eons  219 

pulse  and  the  return  wave  which  comes  back  to  the 
point  of  departure.  You  can  easily  prove  this  by  cast- 
ing a  small  stone  into  a  still,  smooth  pond ;  for  there 
is  but  one  Law  of  Vibration.  The  vibrations  (rip- 
ples) will  go  out  from  the  point  where  the  stone  was 
cast  in  ever  widening  circles,  but  when  they  reach  the 
boundary  of  the  pond  they  will  return  to  the  exact 
spot  from  which  they  started.  This  is  an  illustration 
of  the  absolute  and  impersonal  action  of  the  Law  of 
Karma.  Through  the  suffering  of  the  animals  the 
doctors  may  find  certain  apparently  successful  ways 
of  helping  humanity,  but  the  return  wave  will  bring 
to  humanity  more  widespread  suffering,  cruelty  and 
inhumanity,  and  will  react  especially  upon  those  who 
had  anything,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  to  do  with 
the  initial  cruelty.  In  the  epidemics  of  disease  that 
sweep  over  the  country  some  escape,  some  recover  and 
some  succumb,  but  all  must  bear  the  Karma  of  the 
diseased  conditions  in  the  earth's  aura.  It  is  the  world's 
Karma.  The  ones  who  succumb  are  the  ones  who 
have  brought  to  themselves  a  personal  Karma  by  be- 
ing instrumental  in  sowing,  in  past  lives,  conditions 
that  result  in  disease ;  those  who  escape  probably  did 
nothing  toward  creating  such  conditions.  Some  have 
the  disease  in  a  mild  form  and  some  have  it  severely, 
but  all  in  exact  proportion  to  the  sowing.  "Whatso- 
ever a  man  soweth,  that  shall  he  also  reap."  The  har- 
vest may  not  ripen  for  ages,  but  it  will  be  exact  and 
just  when  it  comes. 

Animals,  altho  drugged  motionless,  suffer  far  more 
than  human  beings  under  the  same  conditions,  because 
a  human  being  when  under  an  anesthetic  at  once 
leaves  the  earth-plane  and,  necessarily,  the  suffering, 
and,  unless  exceedingly  earthly,  is  taken  care  of  on 
the  higher  planes,  often  receiving  most  wonderful  les- 


220  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

sons  and  experiencing  the  greatest  happiness.  But  the 
poor  animal,  not  having  a  Higher  Self  and  working 
out  its  evolution  entirely  on  the  physical  and  lower 
astral  planes,  has  nothing  to  compensate  it  for  the  cruel 
loss  of  its  birthright,  i.  e.,  a  normal,  healthy  existence 
on  the  earth-plane.  Hence  its  whole  evolution  is  re- 
tarded. As  the  animal  can  go  no  higher,  the  anesthetic 
merely  removes  its  consciousness  from  the  physical  to 
the  lower  astral — the  astral  body  as  you  know  being 
the  seat  of  sensation — where  it  is  fully  conscious  of  all 
that  is  going  on  and  where  it  experiences  all  the  suf- 
fering altho  unable  to  express  it  through  its  paralyzed 
body.  The  doctors  are  no  doubt  sincere  in  thinking 
that  the  anesthetized  animals  do  not  suffer,  but  it  is 
only  because  they  are  ignorant  of 'what  is  taking  place 
upon  the  astral-plane. 

July  13th,  1908. 

"Your  kind  letter  concerning  hares  was  read 
eagerly.  Am  following  your  advice  and  have 

tonight    written    the laboratory    that    I 

cannot  supply  them  any  more.  My  husband 
takes  it  easier  than  I  thought  he  would.  I  am 
very  much  happier.  Thank  you  many,  many 
times  for  telling  me  the  Truth." 

"I  am  not  at  all  conversant  with  Theosophy, 
and  am  puzzled  by  the  reference  to  'the  incoming 
Sixth  Sub-race.'  Perhaps  you  will  kindly  ex- 
plain." 

The  subject  is  too  vast  to  be  more  than  hinted  at 
in  this  column,  but,  briefly.  The  Secret  Doctrine  teaches 
that  the  humanity  of  this  globe  manifests  in  seven 
Great  Races  called  Root-Races.1  Each  Root-Race  is 
composed  of  seven  successive  sub-races,  and  the  sub- 
races  of  nations,  tribes,  etc.  All  white  and  red  peoples 

^ec  Chapter  XVII,  in  The  Voice  of  Isis,  Curtiss. 


Miscellaneous  221 

belong  to  the  Aryan  or  Fifth  Root-Race,  and  most  of 
the  Western  peoples  belong  to  the  fifth  sub-race  of  the 
Aryan.  The  yellow  races  of  the  East  are  the  remnants 
of  the  last  sub-races  of  the  Atlantean  or  Fourth  Root- 
Race  which  perished  as  a  Race  with  the  sinking  of  the 
continent  of  Atlantis.  The  sixth  sub-race  of  the  Ar- 
yan will  evolve  upon  the  American  continent,  and  even 
now  has  begun.  (See  lesson  on  The  Sixth  Angel.  ) 

March  3rd,  1908. 
"If  people  choose  their  next  environment  why 

do   they    dislike    it    so? What    can    one 

do  to  prevent  having  to  come  back  again?" 

The  Soul  does  not  choose  incarnation  from  the 
standpoint  of  what  will  give  the  most  pleasure,  but 
from  the  standpoint  of  what  environment  will  give  the 
Soul  the  best  discipline  and  what  will  best  teach  it  the 
lessons  most  needed  to  bring  it  into  at-one-ment  with 
its  Father-in-heaven.  Generally  the  discipline  the  Soul 
most  needs  is  that  which  is  irksome  to  the  personality, 
and  it  is  difficult  for  the  Soul  to  make  the  personality 
understand  that  the  incarnation  is  for  the  purpose  of 
overcoming  some  particular  trait  and  conquering  the 
conditions  in  which  it  was  made. 

The  only  way  to  prevent  coming  back  again  is  to 
learn  all  the  lessons,  gain  all  the  experience  of  the 
earth  life,  so  that  when  the  Soul  has  completed  its 
earthly  evolution  there  is  nothing  left  for  it  to  ex- 
perience. Even  then  one  would  have  to  be  very  sure 
that  having  gained  all  experience  he  had  also  stilled  all 
compassion  for  humanity  so  that  he  would  not  be 
tempted  to  come  back  to  help  those  who  were  still 
struggling  with  sin  and  ignorance. 


222  Letters  -Prom    th*    Teacher 

April    14th, 

"In  your  lesson  on  Purity  you  say,  'The  lower 
animals  having  no  spark  of  the  Divine  dwelling 
within  them,'  etc.  As  I  hold  that  they  are  in  every 
way  as  Divine  as  myself,  I  am  somewhat  in  a 
quandary." 

The  exception  you  take  to  our  statement  that  "the 
lower  animals  having  no  Spark  of  the  Divine  dwelling 
in  them"  can  be  readily  understood  by  a  knowledge 
of  the  Law.  While  this  subject  is  too  great  to  be 
properly  treated  in  a  letter  we  will  try  to  give  you  an 
outline,  altho  some  of  the  statements  are  more  in  the 
nature  of  hints  and  without  further  explanation  are 
bound  to  be  more  or  less  misleading. 

In  brief,  the  Spark  of  Divinity  or  the  reincarnating 
Ego  clothes  itself  in  atoms  belonging  to  each  kingdom 
successively,  mineral,  vegetable  and  animal.  It  is  al- 
ways the  same  Divine  Spark,  but  when  manifesting  in 
the  lower  kingdoms  it  is  so  disseminated  through  them 
that  it  is  not  individualized  in  any  one  expression,  for 
no  one  vehicle  is  capable  of  expressing  it.  In  passing 
through  the  degrees  of  the  animal  kingdom  from  the 
lowest  forms  to  the  highest,  say  from  an  earth-worm 
(you  could,  of  course,  go  much  lower)  to  a  horse  or 
dog,  its  manifestation  gradually  condenses  or  tends  to 
become  individualized.  That  is,  while  the  One  Life 
animates  the  earth-worm  it  takes  a  great  mass  of  such 
worms  to  express  even  rudimentary  animal  conscious- 
ness, and  no  one  worm  can  be  said  to  have  even  an 
animal  soul.  The  lower  animal  kingdom  is  animated 
by  an  animal  soul,  of  course,  but  it  would  take  about 
all  the  earth-worms  there  are  to  express  an  animal 
soul. 

As  animal  life  advances  in  the  scale  the  animal  soul 
expresses  itself  more  and  more  completely,  because  it 
has  better  instruments  for  its  use  and  thus  requires 


Miscellaneous  223 

fewer  individuals  to  express  it.  Thus  the  functions 
and  attributes  of  the  animal  soul  are  expressed  in  an 
ascending  scale  until  instinct  is  reached.  When  in- 
stinct in  its  fullness  is  expressed — instinct  being  the 
highest  vibration  the  animal  soul  is  capable  of  ex- 
pressing— the  Divine  Spark  begins  to  overshadow  the 
animal.  In  this  way  instinct  gradually  melts  into  and 
is  overlapped  by  intelligence  and  reason  which,  in  turn, 
reach  their  highest  note  in  intuition.  Animals  which 
function  in  the  higher  animal  kingdoms  have  the  ani- 
mal soul  expressed  in  its  fullness  and  in  addition  have 
the  overshadowing  of  the  Divine  Spark.  This  over- 
shadowing, however,  is  not  individualized,  many  ani- 
mals being  overshadowed  by  the  one  Ego  or  Group 
Soul.  For  this  reason  they  may,  and  often  do,  exhibit 
traits  that  make  them  more  lovable  than  many  human 
beings.  This  is  because  they  are  perfect  animals,  over- 
shadowed and  willingly  led  and  guided  by  a  Divine 
Ego,  still  they  have  not  as  yet  been  given  the  portion 
of  goods  that  will  come  to  them  from  their  Father. 
In  short,  animals  are  our  younger  brothers.  They  are 
in  the  kindergarten  of  life,  acting  in  accordance  with 
the  overshadowing  Law  of  Evolution  without  free- 
will to  disobey.  If  they  develop  vicious  traits,  as  some 
few  do,  still  they  are  not  responsible,  for  such  traits 
are  imparted  to  or  taught  them  by  man  through  cruel 
treatment  or  through  man's  evil  thought  emanations. 
Of  themselves  they  cannot  sin,  for  they  are  but  fol- 
lowing the  Law  of  Evolution  and,  like  the  flowers, 
are  expressing  the  fullness  of  their  being. 

At  the  time  of  death  the  overshadowing  Ego  gathers 
together  all  the  animal  atoms  composing  all  the  in- 
dividuals that  came  under  its  particular  ray  and  builds 
a  more  perfect  animal  structure  which  will  possess,  as 
inherent  faculties,  all  the  experience  which  it  has 


224  Letters  From    the   Teacher 

gained  in  previous  animal  lives.  This  has  been  dem- 
onstrated by  the  experiments  of  certain  scientific  bot- 
anists who  have  found  that  new  species  do  not  develop 
or  evolve  gradually  from  already  existing  types,  but 
spring  into  being  suddenly  and  without  warning  in  one 
generation.  This  phenomenon  is  called  "mutation." 
This  assimilation  and  advanced  expression  goes  on 
until  the  Ego  has  built  up  an  organism  capable  of  ex- 
pressing the  Divine,  i.  e.,  is  made  in  the  image  of  God 
and  capable  of  containing  a  Spark  of  the  Divine — the 
Human.  At  this  point  the  guiding  reins  are  given 
into  the  hands  of  the  animal-man.  He  now  has  free- 
will and  a  mind  capable  of  reasoning  and  thinking  as 
an  individual.  He  can  choose  to  walk  in  the  light, 
guided  by  his  Father-in-heaven,  or  he  can  refuse  and 
pay  the  penalty.  The  choice  is  his  and  he  is  also  re- 
sponsible for  his  choice.  He  has  become  a  creator  and 
henceforth  he  is  Lord  over  the  lower  kingdoms;  by 
his  thoughts  he  can  lift  them  up  or  debase  them.  Be- 
cause of  this  power  and  the  fact  that  all  evil  is  the 
result  of  man's  disobedience — not  disobedience  to  the 
commands  of  any  higher  Being,  but  to  the  Law — he 
must  suffer  from  evil  conditions  until  he  has  learned 
consciously  to  follow  and  obey  the  Law  of  his  being 
just  as,  while  an  animal,  he  obeyed  it  blindly  and  in- 
stinctively. But  it  is  well  to  remember  that  there  are 
no  sudden  jumps  from  one  kingdom  to  another.  The 
individualization  of  the  animal-man  takes  place  grad- 
ually, many  of  the  lower  types  of  savages  having  not 
yet  reached  complete  individualization — they  are  more 
individualized  than  the  higher  animals,  but  are  not 
entirely  personalized.  Since  the  animals  take  their 
savagery  from  man,  when  he  is  just  entering  the  hu- 
man kingdom  animal-man  must  express  that  savagery 
in  human  form  and  work  through  it  to  higher  things. 


Miscellaneous  225 

As  to  the  immortality  of  animals,  nothing  that  lives 
can  die.  The  higher  animal,  such  as  the  horse,  dog 
and  elephant  is  gradually  merged  into  a  human  ani- 
mal (does  not  become  one).  All  perfected  conscious- 
ness, with  its  overshadowing  Divinity,  must  go  on 
evolving  until  a  better  vehicle  of  expression  is  ob- 
tained. All  life  is  immortal,  but  conscious  immortality 
can  only  be  obtained  by  merging  the  human  into  the 
Divine  as  the  animal  is  merged  into  the  human.  As 
man  is  animal,  but  more  than  animal,  so  is  the  Divine 
man,  but  more  than  man. 

A  good  illustration  of  this  law  of  individualization 
is  found  in  the  rose.  In  its  wild  state  a  rose  has  but 
a  single  row  of  petals,  five  in  number.  It  grows  and 
blossoms  in  great  profusion,  often  covering  a  whole 
hill-side,  yet,  while  the  whole  mass  will  perfume  the 
air  all  around,  a  single  rose,  when  plucked,  will  seem- 
ingly be  devoid  of  perfume  and  have  little  beauty,  its 
few  petals  dropping  almost  immediately.  As  the  rose 
is  cultivated,  however,  it  gains  more  petals,  gives  out 
more  perfume  and  requires  fewer  bushes  to  grow  on 
until,  in  the  American  Beauty  rose,  the  perfection  of 
its  culture  is  reached,  it  requiring  a  whole  bush  to  pro- 
duce one  perfect  flower.  But  this  one  flower  can  give 
out  as  much  perfume  as  the  whole  hill-side  of  wild 
roses  gave  out.  It  has  as  many  petals,  all  securely 
fastened  together,  and  will  last  many  times  longer 
than  its  wi4d  sisters  after  being  plucked.  In  short,  it 
has  evolved  the  Soul  of  the  Rose — the  Rose  being  the 
highest  type  of  flower.  You  will  find  this  law  illus- 
trated in  all  Nature,  from  grass,  which  grows  in  many 
blades,  up  to  the  oak.  Also  from  the  baser  metals  up 
to  gold. 

Understanding  this  Law  of  Evolution  you  can  learn 
many  lessons  from  the  animals,  especially  those  of  love, 


226  Letters  From   the   Teacher 

fidelity,  faithfulness  and  forgiveness  of  injury  and  ill- 
treatment.  Bear  in  mind  that  they  are  doing  instinc- 
tively what  man  must  learn  to  do  consciously  and  of 
his  own  free-will.  They  are  really  examples  for  man 
to  follow,  for  Nature  has  already  worked  out  and 
placed  before  man's  eyes  every  problem  that  confronts 
him. 

A  horse  or  dog  may  have  many  incarnations  as  a 
horse  or  dog  so  you  may  have  been  associated  with 
them  as  horses  or  dogs  in  past  lives.  This  is  fre- 
quently illustrated  by  a  dog  suddenly  seeing  a  man  and 
persistently  following  him  thereafter;  he  has  simply 
recognized  a  former  master  and  refuses  to  be  driven 
away  by  the  fact  that  the  recognition  is  not  mutual. 
A  look  into  the  speaking  eyes  of  such  a  dog  will  con- 
vince you  that  he  really  does  recognize  you  and  cannot 
understand  why  you  fail  to  give  him  the  accustomed 
welcome.  The  sorrow  expressed  is  most  pathetic  if 
you  persist  in  driving  such  a  dog  away. 

One  more  point.  It  is  possible  for  such  animals  to 
be  overshadowed  by  the  same  Divine  Spark  that  over- 
shadows you,  and  in  such  cases  you  will  never  lose 
your  animal  companions,  for  when  they  are  more  than 
animal  you  will  be  more  than  man. 

Your  difficulty  arises  from  the  fact  that  what  you 
refer  to  as  the  Divine  Spark  is  in  reality  but  Divine 
Essence  or  Divine  Creative  Force  evolving  through  the 
kingdoms.  The  Divine  Spark  is  this  force  not  uni- 
versally disseminated  throughout  the  universe,  but  in- 
dividualized. 


June  ,st 

"Why  is  it  that  in  the  Teachings  of  The  Order 
of  the  15  we  hear  nothing  about  loyalty  to  lead- 
ers' when  that  is  such  a  prominent  feature  of 
many  occult  societies  ?  Is  it  not  true  that  loyalty 
to  leaders  is  the  first  and  most  important  duty 
of  the  Neophyte?" 


Miscellaneous  227 

You  are  quite  right  in  your  idea  that  loyalty  is  the 
first  step  and,  we  might  say,  the  most  important  to 
your  own  Soul  were  there  any  degrees  of  importance 
when  every  step  must  be  faithfully  taken. 

Loyalty,  however,  must  not  be  a  blind  following,  but 
must  be  tempered  with  Wisdom  and  must  be  the  result 
of  an  intuitive  understanding  of  the  guidance  given  by 
the  Higher  Self.  Many  a  leader  has  passed  out  of 
the  physical  body  leaving  his  or  her  work  to  be 
wrecked  in  the  quicksands  of  mistaken  zeal  by  a  mis- 
understanding of  this  law. 

A  leader  is  one  who  goes  ahead.  Necessarily  such 
a  one  is  subjected  to  dangers  and  pitfalls  which  those 
who  follow  may  have  the  power  to  see.  We  think  a 
little  thought  will  convince  you  that  loyalty  demands 
that  the  followers,  at  least  the  more  intuitional,  must 
guard  the  leader  by  watching  out  for  ambushed  ene- 
mies and  warn  the  leader  of  danger  when  signs  of 
ambition,  selfishness,  self-righteousness,  or  any  com- 
promise with  truth  or  purity  begin  to  show  themselves. 
And  thus,  by  the  power  of  their  developed  intuition 
and  by  their  true  love  and  sympathy,  prove  a  body- 
guard in  the  real  sense  of  the  word,  while  the  main 
body  of  followers  should  have  the  personality  of  the 
leader  thrust  upon  them  as  little  as  possible. 

Followers  should  be  faithful  and  loyal  to  the  teach- 
ings rather  than  to  the  personality  of  the  leader;  for 
the  Great  Law  will  take  care  of  all,  and  no  matter  how 
much  loyalty  is  demanded  by  a  leader,  he  or  she  will 
receive  just  as  much  as  he  or  she  deserves.  The  Law 
says,  "Give  and  it  shall  be  given  unto  you,"  and  this 
will  be  in  exact  justice,  not  only  in  what  measure,  but 
also  in  what  kind.  If  a  leader  gives  his  or  her  fol- 
lowers love,  sympathy  and  devotion,  forgetting  self 
and  striving  only  to  lead  the  way  and  make  straight 


228 


Letters  From   the   Teacher 


the  Path  for  those  who  follow,  he  or  she  will  receive 
back  again  from  the  main  body  of  followers  true  loy- 
alty and  love,  and  the  few  who  repay  with  selfishness 
and  criticism  the  love-force  will  drop  from  the  ranks 
with  scarcely  a  ripple. 


Appendix 


Appendix  231 

APPENDIX 


THE  MORNING  PRAYER. 

I  have  within  me  the  power  of  The  Christ. 

I  can  conquer  all  that  comes  to  me  today. 

I  am  strong  enough  to  bear  every  trial  and  accept 

every  joy,  and  say, 
"Thy  will  be  done." 


THE  PRAYER  OF  DEVOTION. 

We,  Thy  chosen  servants,  to  whom  Thou  hast  given 
the  great  privilege  of  becoming  co-workers  with  the 
Masters  of  Wisdom,  ask  that  we  may  have  Wisdom 
and  Power  and  Courage  and  Humility  to  carry  us 
through  the  work  of  this  day. 

We  open  our  hearts  that  the  Divine  Love  of  the 
Master  may  fill  us;  that  all  irritation,  inharmony  and 
slothfulness  may  be  transmuted  into  Love  that  shall 
draw  us  closer  in  unity  to  all  our  fellow  workers,  both 
seen  and  unseen;  that  we  may  grow  absolutely  one 
with  the  force  of  Wisdom  and  Compassion  that  is  sent 
forth  to  accomplish  the  great  work  for  humanity. 

Give  us  all  things  necessary,  that  there  may  be  no 
hampering  conditions. 

Lead  us  through  this  day  in  the  name  of  the  Divine, 
Ever-living  Christ,  that  the  will  of  the  Father  may  be 
done  in  us  and  through  us  forevermore.  AMEN. 


Appendix 

THE  HEALING  PRAYER. 

O  Thou  loving  and  helpful  Master  Jesus !  Thou 
who  gavest  to  Thy  disciples  power  to  heal  the  sick ! 

We,  recognizing  Thee,  and  realizing  Thy  divine 
presence  within  us,  ask  Thee  to  lay  Thy  hands  upon 
us  in  healing  love. 

Qeanse  us  from  all  our  sins,  and  by  the  divine  power 
of  Omnipotent  Life,  drive  out  the  atoms  of  inharmony 
and  disease,  and  fill  our  bodies  full  to  overflowing  with 
Life,  and  Love,  and  Purity. 

HOW  TO  FORM  A  STUDY  CLASS. 

In  the  study  of  mysticism  and  occultism,  in  addition 
to  the  careful  reading  and  meditation  upon  the  ideals 
presented,  it  is  helpful  to  have  a  number  who  are  in- 
terested in  the  same  teachings  organize  a  class  and 
study  together.  The  union  of  the  auras  of  a  number  of 
harmonized  students  creates  a  vortex  into  which  a 
strong  force  of  enlightenment  on  the  subject  studied 
is  naturally  drawn. 

Arrange  to  meet  regularly  at  some  convenient  place, 
such  as  a  member's  home,  in  the  evening  if  possible, 
as  this  permits  both  men  and  women  to  attend,  and 
choose  one  of  your  number  to  read  the  lesson.  Select 
a  few  pages  of  the  book  a  week  in  advance  of  the 
meeting  and  have  each  member  carefully  study  and 
meditate  upon  them  during  the  week,  making  notes  of 
the  ideas  that  seem  most  important. 

Begin  promptly  at  the  hour  designated.  Open  the 
meeting  with  a  period  of  Silence  in  which  you  still 
your  mind,  turn  the  current  of  your  thoughts  from 
the  affairs  of  daily  life  and  concentrate  them  upon 
some  harmonizing  topic  announced  beforehand,  such 


Appendix  233 

as  harmony,  peace,  light,  love,  understanding,  etc. 
Have  the  leader  read  a  few  lines  from  the  lesson 
selected  and  all  who  feel  so  prompted  comment 
thereon,  especially  giving  the  new  ideas  that  may  have 
come  to  them  during  their  study.  Invite  interruptions 
and  discussion.  Any  questions  you  cannot  answer 
send  to  the  Superintendent  of  Local  Centers,  who  will 
submit  them  to  the  Teacher  and  explanations  will  be 
returned  as  soon  as  possible.  Keep  a  kindly  but  firm 
rein  over  all  discussions,  allowing  plenty  of  latitude,  so 
long  as  it  does  not  stray  too  far  away  from  the  subject. 
Studiously  avoid  arguments.  One  should  state  one's 
interpretation  of  the  passage  under  discussion  and  let 
it  rest  there.  It  will  be  excellent  training  in  clear 
thinking  to  formulate  your  opinion  as  definitely  as 
possible.  Do  not  try  to  convince  others  or  impose  your 
views  upon  them.  Simply  state  your  views  and  grant 
to  others  the  same  freedom  of  thought  and  expression 
which  you  desire  for  yourself.  Above  all  be  cheerful 
and  goodnatured  and  let  peace,  harmony  and  love 
abound,  for  without  these  conditions  the  study  will 
degenerate  into  mere  intellectual  discussions  and  the 
Voice  of  Intuition  which  you  are  seeking  to  cultivate 
will  be  drowned  out. 

In  this  way  meetings  become  intensely  interesting 
and  helpful,  for  the  different  view  points  brought  out 
serve  to  make  clear  phases  of  the  subject  not  always 
in  the  printed  lesson.  Thus  one  lesson  will  often 
extend  over  three  or  four  meetings.  Strive  ever  to 
bring  out  the  heart  or  Christ  side  in  all  your  discus- 
sions of  the  lesson,  not  permitting  the  intellectual  to 
predominate.  Seek  for  the  loving  help  that  is  con- 
tained in  each  lesson  and  always  conclude  by  pointing 
it  out  plainly  so  that  all  can  see  and  carry  it  home 
with  them. 


234  Appendix 

Let  all  the  students  strive  continually  to  spread  the 
Teachings  wherever  and  whenever  Wisdom  inspires 
them,  but  do  not  seek  to  force  them  upon  anyone. 
Have  them  invite  their  friends  to  the  meetings,  those 
to  whom  they  are  led  to  talk  and  who  become  inter- 
ested, but  not  to  be  anxious  about  their  coming,  leaving 
them  free  to  follow  the  leadings  of  their  own  hearts. 

Try  to  send  in  monthly  reports  of  the  progress  of 
your  meetings  and  of  the  different  members,  always 
encouraging,  however,  personal  correspondence  direct 
with  the  Order  when  a  student  is  confronted  with  a 
vital  Soul  problem. 

If  a  name  is  chosen  for  the  class  remember  that 
names  have  occult  powers  and  the  class  will  have  to 
demonstrate  that  it  can  live  up  to  the  name  chosen. 

After  the  class  has  been  working  harmoniously  for 
some  time,  if  it  is  desired  to  expand  it  into  a  Local 
Center  of  the  Order  to  carry  on  a  more  organized  line 
of  work,  write  to  the  Superintendent  of  Local  Centers 
for  further  information. 

ANNOUNCEMENT. 
"Behold,  I  bring  unto  you  good  tidings  of  great  joy.'' 

To  all  students  of  the  higher  life  who  truly  desire 
to  progress,  and  who  wish  the  opportunity  of  coining 
into  closer  personal  touch  with  those  Masters  of  Wis- 
dom, who,  through  all  ages,  have  been  the  Teachers, 
Guides  and  Elder  Brothers  of  humanity,  there  comes 
the  following  message: 

In  accordance  with  the  geometrical  design  of  the 
universe,  a  point  in  evolution  is  now  reached  when  an 
advanced  Order  has  been  established  upon  the  earth 
plane.  This  Order  is  not  an  organization  in  the  gen- 
eral acceptation  of  the  term,  nor  is  it  connected  either 


Appendix  235 

with  the  outer  or  inner  work  of  any  other  occult  organ- 
isation now  in  existence  on  the  physical- plane.  It  is  a 
new  unifying,  Spiritual  Movement  put  forth  by  those 
Great  Intelligences  who  are  the  Guides  and  Teachers 
of  humanity.  According  to  its  fundamental  principles, 
only  such  earnest  students  can  be  admitted  to  full 
membership  as  have  proven  their  devotion  to  human- 
ity, and  have  sent  out  their  cry  for  further  enlighten- 
ment and  help.  All  such  persons  are  welcomed  into 
this  Order,  and  such  probationary  lessons  will  be  sent 
them,  from  time  to  time,  as  will  afford  them  an  oppor- 
tunity of  coming  into  close  fellowship  and  conscious 
communion  with  the  Masters  of  Wisdom.  Under- 
stand this  point  clearly:  It  will  be  only  through  your 
own  individual  effort,  your  attitude  of  Soul  and  the 
character  of  your  subsequent  life  that  will  enable  you 
to  place  yourself  in  personal,  conscious  touch  with  the 
Masters.  //  depends  upon  no  personality  but  your 
own. 

No  vows  or  pledges  are  asked  of  Associate  Students, 
for  only  those  are  eligible  to  full  membership  in  this 
Order  who  have  voluntarily  given  up  their  lives  to 
the  higher  law,  and  have  already  vowed  allegiance  to 
their  own  Higher  Self.  But  all  who  sincerely  desire 
the  help  this  Order  offers  are  welcomed  as  Associate 
Students. 

The  teachings  of  this  Order  will  not  conflict  with 
any  duties  of  life,  or  with  membership  in  other  organ- 
izations, or  membership  in  any  religious  denomina- 
tion. 

SPECIAL  INFORMATION. 

The  Order  of  the  15  is  but  one  name  for  a  great 
Cosmic  Order  which  has  always  existed  and  through 
which  all  Souls  who  have  reached  Mastery  have  passed 


236  Appendix 

on  some  plane  at  a  certain  stage  of  their  evolution. 
It  has  been  represented  upon  the  earth-plane  at  cer- 
tain cyclic  intervals  in  all  ages  and  it  has  been  known 
under  various  names.  Its  manifestation  upon  the 
earth-plane  during  the  present  cycle  began  on  January 
1st,  1908,  in  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and  in  less  than  three 
years  it  encircled  the  globe,  having  pupils — including 
Christian  and  Buddhistic  missionaries — in  China, 
Japan,  India  and  the  heart  of  Africa,  as  well  as  in 
almost  every  civilized  country  of  the  globe. 

THE  ORDER  OF  THE  15. 

The  Order  of  the  15  is  a  non-sectarian  move- 
ment for  the  promulgation  of  Christian  Mysticism.  It 
is  a  response  to  the  heart-hunger  of  humanity  for  a 
clearer  understanding  of  the  laws  of  The  Christ-life. 
It  is  not  put  forth  to  form  a  new  sect  or  cult,  to  further 
divide  up  and  separate  humanity,  or  to  form  another 
pigeonhole  in  which  to  isolate  a  few  followers,  nor 
does  it  come  to  secure  a  following  for  any  human 
leader  or  personality.  It  is  an  impersonal  and  uni- 
versal unifying,  Spiritual  Movement,  without  creed, 
dogma,  rules  or  pledges.  Instead  of  emphasizing 
the  differences  between  its  teachings  and  all  others,  it 
strives  to  establish  a  platform  so  universal  that  its 
pupils  can  find  in  it  some  one  thing  to  which  they 
can  agree,  even  though  that  one  thing  be  not  the  same 
for  all — and  thus  become  a  link  to  join  the  best  efforts 
of  all  into  one  great  universal  effort  to  make  Brother- 
hood manifest  on  earth.  For  true  Brotherhood  does 
not  mean  all  thinking  alike,  but  each  recognizing 
Truth  wherever  found  and  demonstrating  love  and 
tolerance  toward  those  who  find  a  different  aspect  of 
Truth  more  helpful. 


Appendix  237 

This  Order  does  not  ask  its  pupils  to  leave  any 
church,  society  or  organization  in  which  they  feel  they 
can  do  their  best  work  for  humanity.  It  but  seeks 
to  help  all  to  understand  the  workings  of  the  great 
fundamental  Law  of  Love,  and  thus  enable  them  to 
do  their  own  work  the  better,  in  their  own  way  and 
place.  It  asks  no  one  to  subordinate  his  individuality 
or  to  follow  any  leader,  but  leaves  all  free  to  follow 
the  Truth  as  revealed  to  them.  It  does  not  require 
that  any  of  its  teachings  be  accepted  by  its  students 
because  some  authority  says  they  are  true,  for  unless 
a  teaching  appeals  to  the  heart  and  rings  true  to  a  Soul 
it  is  not  true  to  that  Soul.  Truth  is  not  an  abstract 
principle.  It  is  that  which  remains  as  pure  gold  after 
passing  through  the  fires  of  daily  living  and  testing. 
Hence,  no  authority  is  enforced,  except  the  authority 
of  that  Voice  within  each  heart  which  recognizes  and 
witnesses  to  Truth  wherever  found. 

ORGANIZATIONS. 

All  organizations  and  movements  which  receive  help 
from  the  Masters  of  Wisdom  have  their  own  particular 
work  to  do.  Whether  they  have  succeeded  in  the 
task  set  before  them,  or  whether  they  have  failed,  is 
clearly  shown  by  their  results,  and  the  same  rule  must 
be  applied  to  the  work  of  this  Order.  But  many  stu- 
dents have  outgrown  organizations,  having  found 
them  too  narrow  and  their  necessary  limitations  too 
binding.  This  is  but  a  natural  feature  of  growth  and 
again  proves  the  Great  law,  "As  above,  so  below;" 
just  as  the  seed,  when  first  planted,  is  confined  in  a 
protective  sheath  from  which,  in  the  process  of 
growth,  it  will  burst  forth.  Hence,  an  avenue  of  in- 
struction and  help  has  been  put  forth  that  is  not  an 
organization  and  which  is  not  limited  in  its  activities. 


238  Appendix 

This  movement  is  not  an  organization  because  it 
has  no  constitution  or  by-laws,  no  officers  (except  the 
Secretary),  requires  no  pledges  and  no  dues  and  does 
not  restrict  a  student's  activity  in  any  society  or  or- 
ganization. Therefore  it  is  not  antagonistic  to,  or  a 
rival  of,  any  existing  organization  that  is  helping  hu- 
manity, but  permits  perfect  freedom.  It  holds  out  the 
hand  of  Brotherhood  to  each  and  gives  to  all 
an  opportunity  to  prove  the  ideals  of  Brotherhood 
and  tolerance  which  they  profess. 

AS  TO  OTHER   MOVEMENTS. 

Although  we  emphasized  our  relation  to  organiza- 
tions in  the  beginning  by  placing  the  statement  in 
italics,  yet  it  is  overlooked  by  many.  Therefore  we 
will  restate  our  position  more  fully  herewith,  so  that 
in  the  future  there  may  be  no  question  as  to  the  sig- 
nificance of  this  Movement  and  its  relation  to  all 
others. 

We  can  but  reiterate  that  while  ive  are  not  con- 
nected, in  any  way,  with  the  outer  or  inner  workings 
of  any  other  organisation  now  on  the  earth-plane, 
nevertheless  we  stand  for  Truth  wherever  found,  our 
motto  being,  "By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know  them." 

Under  no  circumstances  do  we  criticise  any.  If  an 
organization,  society  or  movement  has  helped  one 
Soul  to  take  one  step  upon  the  Path  to  Mastery  it  has 
not  wrought  in  vain. 

"Whosoever  shall  give  to  drink  unto  one  of  these 
little  ones  a  cup  of  cold  water  only  in  the  name  of  a 
disciple,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  he  shall  in  no  wise  lose 
his  reward!  .  .  .  Inasmuch  as  ye  have  done  it 
unto  one  of  the  least  of  these,  my  brethren,  ye  have 
done  it  unto  me." 


Appendix  239 

The  fact  that  a  teaching  attracts  and  helps  you  is 
evidence  that  it  contains  the  lessons  needed  by  you 
for  the  step  you  are  taking.  The  fact  that  a  move- 
ment no  longer  appeals  to  you,  no  matter  how  helpful 
it  may  be  to  others,  is  evidence  either  that  your  Soul 
has  learned  the  lessons  that  movement  had  for  you — 
even  though  not  mastered  intellectually — -or  that  the 
movement,  no  matter  how  beautifully  conceived  and 
launched,  has  become  tainted  with  something  that  is 
not  helpful,  or  is  perhaps  distinctly  injurious  to  your 
physical,  mental,  moral  or  spiritual  growth.  Hence, 
to  remain  connected  with  an  organization  to  which 
you  no  longer  feel  drawn,  or  which  you  have  out- 
grown, is  as  detrimental  to  your  Soul-growth  as  it 
would  be  for  a  flower  to  remain  in  a  pot  which  had 
become  too  small  for  it  or  whose  soil  had  become  ex- 
hausted or  contaminated.  No  vows  given  to  any 
earthly  organization  can  bind  a  Soul  which,  through 
natural  growth,  has  evolved  beyond  them. 

Each  movement  that  aims  to  help  humanity  has  its 
own  place  and  its  own  work.  Colored  blocks  are 
necessary  in  the  kindergarten,  primers  for  children, 
text-books  for  the  training  of  the  mind  in  school  and 
college;  but  when  the  mind  has  been  trained  it  must 
then  put  that  training  to  use  in  a  practical  way :  in 
business,  under  the  head  of  the  firm  or  manager;  in 
art,  under  a  great  teacher;  in  spiritual  things,  under 
a  Master  of  Wisdom.  But  remember  that,  because 
you  are  no  longer  interested  in  the  colored  blocks  or 
primers  you  once  thought  so  beautiful,  you  are  not  to 
despise  the  children  who  still  cling  to  them,  or  find 
fault  with  the  teachers  of  the  a-b-c's.  All  have  their 
place,  and  the  children  will  grow  away  from  the 
blocks  when  they  have  learned  their  lessons,  just  as 
you  have  grown.  And  the  proof  that  you  have  out- 


240  Appendix 

grown  earthly  organizations  will  be  the  love  and  toler- 
ance with  which  you  treat  all  your  brothers  and  sis- 
ters who  still  feel  the  need  of  such  methods.  To  rail 
at  organizations,  especially  one  which  has  helped  you 
to  reach  your  present  state,  and  those  who  work  in 
them,  is  proof  that  you  still  need  their  discipline. 
Every  uplifting  movement  or  teaching  has  its  place 
and  has  for  followers  those  who  need  its  lessons. 

AIMS    OF    THIS    MOVEMENT. 

One  of  the  chief  objects  of  this  Movement  is  to 
correlate  advanced  philosophical  teachings  with  the 
orthodox  Christian  teachings;  to  form  a  neutral 
ground  where  both  can  meet  and  recognize  Truth, 
and  to  reach  the  great  mass  of  people  who  will  not 
join  organizations  or  occult  societies  of  any  kind.  On 
this  account  we  may  disappoint  many  intellectual  stu- 
dents, for  our  language  will  purposely  be  made  sim- 
ple, and  the  great  truths  which  we  set  forth  will  be  so 
stated  as  to  appeal  to  minds  schooled  in  Western 
religious  thought.  Our  great  object  is  to  enable  all 
sections  of  spiritual  seekers — New  Thought,  Spirit- 
ualism, Theosophy,  Christianity,  in  fact  all  lovers  of 
Truth — to  draw  together  at  the  heart  center.  This 
is  a  necessary  preparation  for  the  near  advent  of  the 
great  Spiritual  Teacher  for  the  W es tern  world  who  is 
soon  to  appear,  the  Avatar.  The  good  news  of  His 
quick  coming  must  be  given  "unto  all  people,"  not 
merely  to  a  few  intellectual  thinkers.  All  schools  of 
spiritual  thought  need  this  preparation. 

The  great  psychic  awakening  now  sweeping  over 
the  land  has  brought  many  students  to  the  point  where 
their  inner  faculties  are  unfolding.  This  is  a  point  of 
great  danger,  for  here  the  two  paths — the  Right 
Hand  and  the  Left  Hand— diverge.  This  Order  may 


Appendix  241 

he  called  a  wayside  House  of  Rest,  placed  at  the 
point  of  divergence  of  the  paths,  at  whose  door  every 
pilgrim  who  knocks  finds  welcome,  and  within  rest, 
sympathy,  understanding  and  encouragement,  also  a 
guide  to  lead  him  safely  past  the  many  dangers  and 
pitfalls  that  surround  the  entrance  to  the  Right  Hand 
Path.  This  is  a  personal  work  which  could  not  be 
accomplished  by  any  organization  limited  by  set  rules. 

While  the  teachings  of  this  Order  are  those  of  the 
Wisdom  Religion,  they  are  not  theosophic  in  the  sense 
of  being  put  forth  by  any  of  the  numerous  societies 
promulgating  such  teachings,  for  they  deal  with  the 
Christian  Bible  quite  as  much  as  with  Eastern 
teachings. 

One  object  of  these  teachings  is  to  bring  to  the  at- 
tention of  the  world,  as  simply  as  possible,  the  Pearls 
of  Wisdom  in  the  teachings  of  the  Master  Jesus — 
pearls  that  have  been  overlaid  with  wordy  misconcep- 
tions so  long  as  to  be  almost  unrecognisable. 

As  all  religions,  sects  and  creeds  contain  at  least  a 
germ  of  Truth,  our  aim  is  to  help  each  one  to  find 
that  germ  in  his  own  teachings,  and  to  purify  and 
develop  it  into  the  Tree  of  Life  in  his  own  garden. 
We  thus  help  them  to  purify  their  conception  of  Truth 
as  expressed  in  their  own  religion. 

There  is  a  real  necessity  for  the  various  presenta- 
tions of  Truth  as  given  to  the  world;  for  just  as  the 
climate,  flora  and  fauna  of  a  country,  and  the  lan- 
guage and  customs  of  its  people  vary  in  different 
parts  of  the  world,  so  must  Truth  garb  itself  in  habili- 
ments suited  to  the  modes  of  thought  of  the  people 
to  whom  it  is  given.  There  is  a  deep,  occult  reason 
underlying  this  law,  and  St.  Paul  recognized  it  when 
he  said,  "Be  ye  all  things  unto  all  men."  There  comes 
a  time,  however,  in  all  organized  bodies  giving  out 


242  Appendix 

spiritual  teachings  when  some  student  will  advance  as 
far  or  farther  than  the  leaders  of  the  organization. 
And  since  it  is  only  natural  for  such  leaders  to  assume 
that  they  are  more  advanced  than  any  of  their  stu- 
dents, inharmony  and  dissatisfaction  or  even  seces- 
sion result. 

In  the  development  of  all  students  a  point  is  reached 
where  they  need  the  advanced,  personal  instruction, 
not  of  any  leaders — who  are  themselves  but  students — 
but  of  One  who  has  at  His  command  all  knowl- 
edge and  all  wisdom,  t.  e.,  a  Master  of  Wisdom.1 
It  is  in  answer  to  this  personal  need  that  The  Lodge 
of  Masters  has  put  forth  The  Order  of  the  15  at  this 
time.  It  comes  as  a  direct  response  to  the  prayers  of 
many,  many  hearts  for  more  light,  love,  sympathy 
and  personal  guidance  in  the  problems  of  their  spir- 
itual life. 

As  this  continent  is  to  be  the  home  of  a  new  Race 
which  will  ultimately  perfect  itself  by  the  survival  and 
interblending  of  the  fittest  of  all  the  races  now  exist- 
ing, so  must  its  religious  thought  be  blended  and  puri- 
fied that  it  may  emerge  as  a  pure  ray  which  has 
gathered  into  itself  the  force  from  all  its  sub-rays. 

The  Order  of  the  75  is  put  forth  in  an  effort  to 
awaken  The  Christ-love  in  the  hearts  of  men,  rather 
than  to  cater  to  the  intellect  or  the  desire  for  psychic 
powers ;  for  only  those  who  can  correlate  with  The 
Christ-power  can  be  gathered  together  to  form  a  nu- 
cleus in  which  this  Power  can  be  individualized  on 
earth.  The  aim  of  this  Movement  is  especially  to  help 
all  Christian  people  to  find  the  deep,  underlying,  vital 
truths  common  to  all  religions  in  their  own,  and  thus 
truly,  and  in  the  only  way  possible,  prepare  for  an 

1  It  is  understood,  of  course,  that  the  Secretary  does  not  answer 
the  letters  or  compose  the  teachings.  He  is  merely  the  Secretary  in  th« 
•rdinary  sense  of  the  word. 


Appendix  243 

Universal  Brotherhood  on  earth  in  which  each  Soul 
shall  find  the  same  vital  truths  spoken  in  his  own 
language,  i.  e.,  couched  and  taught  in  terms  of  the 
religion  in  which  he  was  born.1 

FINANCIAL    OBLIGATIONS. 

In  this  present  age  the  Masters  must  work  through 
human  agencies  and  the  moment  you  determine  to 
give  of  yourself  and  your  worldly  substance  to  this 
work  you  become  Their  recognized  agent.  But  if 
you  desire  to  help  humanity  through  this  avenue  and 
to  receive  the  personal  training  necessary  to  do 
efficient  work,  and  have  no  worldly  substance  to  give, 
do  not  hesitate  on  that  account,  for  you  can  only  give 
of  that  which  you  have  to  give. 

In  such  an  Order  dues,  as  such,  would  be  impos- 
sible, for  there  can  be  no  price  placed  upon  spiritual 
truth.  But  as  the  workers  at  the  headquarters  give 
their  time  and  talents  without  salary,  and  as  the  ex- 
penses incident  to  a  world-wide  Movement  must  be 
provided  for,  it  is  expected  that  all  who  desire  to 
help  will  voluntarily  aid  the  work  by  contributions 
in  accordance  with  their  ability  and  the  Law  of  exact 
Justice.  It  is  a  primal  law  of  occultism  that,  no  mat- 
ter how  much  is  set  before  you,  you  are  able  to  assim- 
ilate only  in  exact  ratio  with  the  spirit  of  helping 
others  which  you  display.  If  the  teachings  help  you 
it  will  be  evidence  that  they  can  help  others,  hence 
that  you  can  best  serve  humanity  by  making  it  pos- 
sible to  spread  these  teachings  abroad. 

Of  course  this  Movement  cannot  be  carried  on 
without  financial  support  and  it  greatly  needs  such 
support — for  the  Law  of  Justice  permits  humanity  to 
be  helped  only  to  the  extent  that,  through  its  own 

1  See  Acts  II,  6. 


244  Appendix 

efforts,  it  makes  it  possible  for  the  help  to  reach  it. 
If  you  feel  an  inner  urge  to  study  with  us,  and  if  you 
find  that  the  lessons  help  you,  you  will  naturally  desire 
to  make  it  possible  for  other  Souls  to  receive  the  same. 
Therefore,  out  of  pure  love  and  a  desire  to  help 
others  you  will  give  as  much  as  you  can  afford.  Let 
all  give  according  to  their  ability. 

HOW  TO  JOIN. 

A  simple  announcement  of  your  desire  to  study 
with  us  and  a  realisation  of  your  obligation  to  help  us 
in  return  is  all  that  is  necessary.  The  help  we  ask  is 
just  what  your  conscience  tells  you  is  the  right  and 
proper  thing  to  do  in  accordance  with  your  worldly 
means.  Many  will  be  unable  to  give  financial  aid  and 
from  those  we  ask  love  and  helpful  thoughts.  If  we 
demanded  financial  aid  we  would  at  once  put  ourselves 
outside  the  radius  of  the  Spiritual  Force,  therefore 
we  simply  trust  and  believe  that  the  desire  to  help 
carry  on  the  work  will  be  implanted  in  each  heart  to 
whom  this  circular  appeals,  and  that  the  response  will 
be  such  as  to  enable  this  Movement  to  become  the 
great  power  for  good  that  it  is  intended  to  be.  To 
do  this,  however,  all  interested  must  make  it  their 
work  and  give  it  such  financial  aid  as  they  can,  as 
well  as  the  devotion  and  love  of  their  hearts.  In 
short,  it  must  be  looked  upon  as  a  privilege  to  co- 
operate in  this  great  work. 

All  contributions,  both  large  and  small,  will  be 
gratefully  received  and  promptly  acknowledged.  No 
matter  what  amount  is  given,  the  real  offering  is  the 
loving  desire  to  help.  "Let  every  man  do  according 
as  he  is  disposed  in  his  heart,  not  grudgingly,  or  of 
necessity,  for  God  loveth  a  cheerful  giver." 


Appendix  245 

To  all  who  desire  to  study  with  us  we  will  send  a 
printed  lesson  each  month.  In  addition  to  this, 
whenever  a  pupil  is  facing  a  vital  problem  of  life,  or 
when  confronted  with  a  question  whose  solution  is  of 
importance  to  his  spiritual  growth,  he  has  the  privi- 
lege of  writing  to  the  Teacher  of  the  Order  and  briefly 
stating  his  need.  The  reply  will  contain  the  love, 
sympathy  and  guidance  needed  by  him  for  his  spir- 
itual welfare.  All  such  letters  should  be  addressed 
to  the  Secretary,  who  will  refer  them  to  the  Teacher 
and  transmit  the  reply  in  the  strictest  confidence. 

Pupils  are  furnished  with  lessons  for  six  months  on 
trial.  At  the  end  of  that  time  if  they  have  in  no  way 
expressed  their  appreciation  of  the  teachings,  the 
lessons  are  discontinued,  for  the  income  from  con- 
tributions does  not  keep  pace  with  the  expenses,  and 
with  our  limited  funds  we  cannot  afford  to  send  les- 
sons to  those  not  vitally  interested  in  the  particular 
work  of  this  Order.  Those  who  do  not  find  the 
lessons  helpful  are  requested  to  notify  us  to  discon- 
tinue them. 

You  will  greatly  facilitate  our  work  if  before  ask- 
ing questions  in  regard  to  it  you  will  carefully  study 
this  Appendix  to  see  if  the  information  you  desire  is 
not  contained  therein. 

Address  F.  Homer  Curtiss,  M.  D.,  Secretary 

International  Headquarters 
1723  McCadden  Place,  Los  Angeles,  Cal.,  U.  S.  A. 

Our  correspondence  is  so  large  that  we  cannot 
answer  letters  immediately,  but  will  always  endeavor 
to  do  so  within  one  week  after  their  receipt. 


Index 


247 


INDEX 


Affirmations,   when  they   fail,   48. 

Agents,  how  to  become  an,  39;  limita- 
tions of,  123;  need  protection,  122; 
personality  of  unimportant,  89;  re- 
quirements of,  70;  specially  trained, 
123. 

Alphabet,  of  Nature,   146. 

Anesthetics,  danger  of,  173;  effect  on 
animals,  220. 

Angels,  (see  Shining  Ones)  build  spir- 
itual body,  67;  the  Third,  71;  the 
Sixth,  221. 

Animals,  anesthetized,  220;  have  no 
Soul,  222-3;  immortality  of,  225; 
lessons  from,  225-6;  why  antagonis- 
tic, 225. 

Apes,    origin   of  the,    76-7. 

Astral,  description  of  the,  113-4;  di- 
visions of  the,  117;  Hall  of.  Learn- 
ing, 115;  learning  on  the,  137;  pro- 
tection on  the,  132. 

Atlantean,    reincarnation    of    an,    125. 

Atoms,  gathered  by  Ego,  223;  must  be 
redeemed,  27,  44,  76,  209. 

Aura,  becomes  sensitive,  166;  nothing 
can  enter  your,  129. 

Avatar,  An  Avesha,  187;  birth  of  an, 
187;  disciples  of  the,  197;  Jesus  an, 
79;  never  failed  to  come,  79;  teach- 
ings of  the  coming,  82;  to  each  sub- 
race,  82. 

B 

Bab,  missions  of  the,  80-1. 

Beast,  of  Revelation,  71;"  on  the  astral, 

133-4;    serving   the,   71. 
Bible,  an  allegory,  72,   199. 
Blood,    symbology    of,    187. 
Blue,   color  of  mental,    144. 
Body,  must  be  redeemed,  209;   physical 

but   a  garment,    127-35;   the  Nirmana- 

kaya,    68;    treatment    of    the,     161-2; 

weakness    of    the,    165. 
Bread,    loaves    and    fishes,    48;    symbol 

of,    199. 


Caesar,    render   unto,    197. 
Camel,   through    needle's    eye,    201. 
Celibacy,    179;    results    of,    198. 
Centers,    concentration   on   avoided,    18; 

vapor    from,     129. 
Challenge,    how   to   entities,    129. 
Children,     few     in     wealthy      families, 

183-4;    must   become   as,   201. 
Christ-powers,   how  attained,   161. 
Christian    Science,    168-71-2. 


Circle,     all     manifestation     in     a,     37-8; 

107-8. 

Color,    knowing,    144-5-6. 
Communication,      constructive    and     de- 

structve    methods    of,    54-5-6;    118-19; 

how    to    test,    121. 
Conventionality,        truths        underlying, 

198. 
I     Corinthians,     II,      quoted,      13;      on 

spiritual  discernment,  212. 
Crucifixion,   The,   truth   of,    72;    of   The 

•Christ-force,    28. 
Cure   vs.    readjustment,    172. 


Darkness,    necessary,    25,    31. 

Dead,    consolation    for    the,    127. 

Death,  learning  after,  137;  states  after, 
117,  128. 

Degree,   why   in   the  4th,  27. 

Denial,    does    not    adjust    causes,    170. 

Devils,  personal,  135;  secret,  how  to 
utilize,  130-1. 

Discouragement,    reply    to,    165. 

Disease,  created  by,  182;  psychic 
treatment  of,  174-5;  use  of  drugs  in, 
174;  use  of  prayer  in,  175. 

Divorce,    195;    Jesus    on,    200. 

Doctrine,  The  Secret,  quoted  on 
prayer,  101. 

Dreams,  Part  VII,  p.  151,  control  of 
sex,  205;  full-moon,  three  sunrises, 
154;  judged  by  Jesus,  154;  Joseph 
and  Pharaoh,  149;  of  ice-bound 
country,  153;  reason  for  symbolic, 
152;  sunflowers,  violets,  155. 

Duties,  Masters  never  interfere  with, 
78. 

Dweller  on  the  Threshold,  134-5,  and 
reincarnation,  216. 


E 

Eat,    how    to,    162. 

Eating,    do    not    concentrate    on,    163. 
Education,    reason   for   lack   of,   22. 
Ego,    the,    28,    58;    builds    its    vehicle, 

224. 

Elementals,    air,    144,    pranks    of,    141. 
Entities,    astral    are    not    spiritual,     55, 

120;  how  to  challenge,  129-30. 
Environment,     Soul     chooses     its,     118, 

184,    221. 

Ether,    luminous,    142. 
Eunuchs,  201. 

Evidence,    none    conclusive,    57.  -:• 

Evil,    result   of,    224. 
Evolution,   of  man,  209;  :law  of,  223. 


248 


Index — Cont'd 


Exaltation,    periods    of,    16. 
Exercises,    occult,    how    given,    77-8. 
Eye,    opening    the    Third,    15. 


Fancy,    213. 

Fasting,   when    unwise,    161. 

Fatigue,    preventing    study,    33-4. 

Faults,    how    to   correct,    203. 

Freedom,   91. 

Free-will,    35-6;    75-6. 


Genesis,  quoted  on  dreams,    149. 
Geometry,   of  nature,   214;   of  sex,   185. 
Guardian    of   the   Threshold,    136. 

H 

Healing,  Part  VI II,  p.  159,  by  magne- 
tism, 169;  Divine  only  real,  172-5; 
mental,  170;  surgery  and  drugs  in, 
173-4. 

Hell,  thinks  himself  in,  19;  releasing 
entities  from  126. 

Help,  always  ready,  85 ;  how  the  Mas- 
ters, 64;  how  to  receive  and  give, 
30. 

Humanity,  how  to  help,  39;  increas- 
ing love  for,  46. 

Hypnosis,   humanity   not    under,    75-6. 


I,   the  True   Self,   27. 

Imagination,   use   of,    213. 

Impurity,  never  causes  spiritual 
growth,  190. 

Incarnation,  Soul  chooses  because,  184, 
221. 

Inharmony,    how   to   treat,   47. 

Initiation,  experiences  of,  45;  require- 
ments for,  70;  star  of,  29. 

Instinct,   50;    animals   from,   224. 

Intellect,   training   of  needed,   21,   49. 

Intuition,    50;    every    Soul   has,    94. 


Jesus,  an  Avatar,  79;  consorted  with 
sinners,  199;  healing  by,  164;  life 
symbolical,  72-3;  on  sex,  200;  wa* 
he  married,  196. 

Jew,    The    Wandering,    Sue's,    217. 

Josephus,   quoted  on   phenomena,    139. 


Karma,  and  vivisection,  219;  not  pun- 
ishment, 106;  some  held  back,  125; 
the  Law  as,  193. 


Law,    the    seven-fold,    193. 

Light  on  the  Path,  quoted  on  The 
Guardian,  136. 

Lodge,  The  Great  White,  63;  7th  de- 
gree of,  76. 

Loyalty,    227. 

Lytton,  Bulwer,  quoted,  on  helping  hu- 
manity, 87;  on  mind,  50;  on  prayer, 
101;  on  the  "Dweller",  135. 

M 

Magnetism,  use  of  personal,   169. 

Man,  and  wife,  one,  186;  descent  of, 
209;  Races  of,  220-1. 

Marriage,  barriers  preventing,  189; 
legal  necessary,  188;  no  in  heaven, 
202;  of  the  Soul,  186;  Vow,  three 
parties  to  the,  195;  unhappy,  194. 

Masters,  definition  of  the,  63;  do  They 
marry,  196;  how  to  contact  the, 
83-4;  key-note  of  the,  119;  must  be 
invited,  143;  meaning  of  term,  78-9; 
never  advertise,  69;  on  psychic  plane, 
128;  proof  of,  66;  use  every  avenue, 
67;  tests  for  those  claiming  to  be, 
70. 

Mediumship,  avoid,  124;  effect  of,  71; 
not  desirable,  54;  we  give  no  tests 
of,  73. 

Mind,  place  of,  49;  real  is,  59;  renew- 
ing the,  211;  the  divine,  22;  when  it 
wearies,  48;  work  of  the,  21. 

Money,   need   of,   97,   99. 

Movements,    upheavals    in,    65-6. 

N 

Nature,    living    close    to,    25-6. 
Night-period    of    Soul,    16,    23. 


Opposites,   Pairs   of,    16. 

Orange,    146. 

Orders  of  the  15,  Part  III,  p.  89,  aura 
of  the,  123;  concerning,  why  started, 
92;  deals  with  sex,  183,  188-90;  how 
carried  on,  100;  proofs  of  this,  94, 
97-8;  put  forward  for,  73-4,  82. 


Paracelsus,  quoted,  on  astral  influences, 
111;  on  diseases,  157;  on  spiritual 
perception,  13. 

Personalities,    judging,    211. 

Phenomena,   Part   VI,   p.    141. 

Plan,  the  Grand,  man's  place  in  the, 
185. 

Poise,  41-2. 

Powers,   to   develop,    16. 


Index — Cont'd 


249 


Prayer,  Part  IV,  p.  103,  definition  of, 
103-5;  effect  of  The  Healing,  159-64; 
effect  of  The  Morning,  96,  231;  not 
only  thing  necessary,  166;  of  Devo- 
tion, 231;  the  Healing,  232;  use  of, 
175. 

Priestess,    protection    necessary,    122. 

Procreation,    202. 

Purple,     147. 

R 

Races,    Aryan,    Atlantean,   221. 
Reality,    what   is,    114,    116. 
Redemption,   necessity   for,   43-76;   work 

of,     184-5,    209. 
Reincarnation,   logical,   210;   of  animals, 

226;      requirements      for     immediate. 

215,    216-21. 
Ring-pass-not,    143. 
Rose,    wild   and   American    Beauty,   225. 


Sacrifice,   self-,   40. 

St.   Matthew,  quoted  on   sex,    177. 

Salvation,    personal,    44. 

Saturn-force,    116. 

Sense,    no    sixth,     144. 

Sensitiveness,    control    of,    42. 

Serpent,   Brazen,    172;  of  sex,    180-1. 

Sex,  Part  IX,  p.  179,  control  of,  203; 
dreams,  control  of,  205 ;  -force  al- 
ways creates,  181-2;  -force  is  sacred, 
180-1;  geometry  of,  185;  man's 
crowning  glory,  202;  normal  use  of, 
198;  not  impure,  192;  problem  not 
for  discussion,  188;  procreation  not 
only  use,  202;  separation  of,  185;  use 
of,  182,  188-9-10,  204. 

Shining   Ones,   the,   67-8,    109. 

Sick,  old  and  poor,  93. 

Sickness,    created   by,    182. 

Silence,   how  to   enter  the,   52. 

Simile  of,  a  sodden  leaf,  23;  butterfly 
and  chrysalis,  51;  compass  needle, 
42;  concentric  circles,  163;  condi- 
tions on  mountain  top,  180;  Jacob's 
ladder,  104;  man  looking  at  moun- 
tain top,  18,  180;  Rose,  wild  and, 
225;  Prodigal  Son,  64;  running 
away  to  fish,  195;  Samaritan,  61; 
see-saw,  41;  sensations  of  new-born 


Simile  of — Cont'd 

babe,  145;  sheep  and  goats,  75-6; 
shipwreck  on  island,  43;  splinter  in 
finger,  106;  violet  and  oak,  91;  wal- 
nut shell  and  kernel,  212. 

Sleep,   how  to  prepare   for,   52-3. 

Sorrows  of  world,    167. 

Soul,  the,  28,  58;  animals  have  no, 
222;  each  can  find  special  help,  99; 
steps  in  growth,  64. 

Spark,  animals  have  no  Divine,  222-3; 
exception,  227. 

Spirit,   quenching  of   the,   45;    the,    58. 

Storms,    depression    during,    144. 

Suffering,  not  a  punishment,  24,  108, 
167. 

Surgery,    when    required,    173. 

Sword,   the   Flaming,    181. 

Swords,    bridge   of,    45. 


Teacher,  reason  for  writing  to  the,  20; 

why  not  named,  89. 
Teachings,    varied    necessary,    28-9. 
Temper,   how   to   transmute,    131. 
Tertullian,  quoted   on   madness,    111. 
Thought-forms,     draw     life     from,     204; 

fashion   objects,   214. 
Tomb,   three  days  in,   31-2. 
Training,     personal,     how     given,     83-4; 

object  of,   95. 


Vibration,    all    is,    115;    slow    down    to 

physical,     164. 
Violet,    146-7. 
Violets,   91-155. 

Vivisection,   218;   and  Karma,   219. 
Voice     of     the     Silence,      quoted      on 

thought-forms,    204. 
Vows,    must    be    fulfilled,    195. 

w 

Will,   how   to  strengthen,    59. 
Works,    force   wasted   in,    19-20. 
Worker,   how  to  become  a,   61,   67. 


Yellow,   146. 


THE  VOICE  OF  ISIS 

Transcribed  by 
HARRIETTE  AUGUSTA  CURT1SS,  F.  O.  15 

and 

F.  HOMER  CURTISS.  B.  S..  M.  D..  F.  O.  15 
Secretary  of  the  Order. 


A   TEXT-BOOK   OF 


Christian  Mysticism,  Esoteric  Symbology  and 
Occult  Philosophy 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


CHAPT. 

I.  Life's    Duties. 
II.  The   Cycle  of   Ful- 
fillment. 

III.   Degrees     and     Or- 
ders. 

IV.  The     Wisdom     Re- 
ligion. 
V.  The     Doctrine     of 

Hell    Fire. 
VI.  The    E  1  e  v  e  n  t  h 

Commandment. 
VII.  Narcotics,     Alcohol 

and    Psychism. 
VIII.  A    Study    of    Kar 

ma. 

IX.  The.  Self. 
X.  The     Doctrine     of 

Avatara. 

XI.  A    Study   of    Rein- 
carnation. 


CHAPT. 

CHAPT. 

XII.  Power. 

XXIV. 

The   Light. 

XIII.  A    Brief    Outline 

XXV. 

The  Two  Tables 

of   Evolution. 

of    Stone. 

XIV.  The  Law. 

XXVI. 

Healing  Prayer. 

XV.  World  Chains. 

XXVII. 

The   Silence. 

XVI.   Purity. 

XXVIII. 

Nature's    M  y  s- 

XVII.  The     Origin     o  f 

tic   Alphabet. 

Man. 

XXIX. 

The  Word. 

XVIII.  The      Symbol     of 

XXX. 

Illumination. 

the   Serpent. 

XXXI. 

The   Symbol    of 

XIX.  Purification      v  s 

The    Salt. 

Deification. 

XXXII. 

Thou  Shalt  Not 

XX.  The    Memory    of 

Kill. 

Past    Lives. 

XXXIII. 

Prayer   ot    Con- 

XXI. The     Cycle     of 

secration.   Con- 

Necessity. 

centration 

XXIL  The  Path. 

Hours. 

XXIII.  Earth's  Finer 

XXXIV. 

T  h  e      Meaning 

Forces. 

of  the  Symbol. 

Special  edition  uniform  with  Letters  from  the  Teacher. 

450  pages.    Elaborate  Index.     Special  price  $1.00  postpaid. 


THE  CURTISS  BOOK  Co. 

1723  McCadden  Place  Los  Angeles,  Cal 


"A  really  wonderful  new  volume  by  Harriette  Augusta 
and  Dr.  F.  Homer  Curtiss,  of  the  Order  of  The  15."— fF.  /. 
Colville. 

"There  is  so  very  much  solid  information  in  this  erudite 
book  displaying  wide  research  and  bright  illumination  that  it 
is  certain  to  make  a  strong  and  convincing  appeal  to  many  who 
are  earnestly  seeking  reliable  assistance  along  the  road  of  ini- 
tiation into  the  actually  open  secrets  of  the  higher  life  or  estate 
of  regeneration." — The  American  Spiritualist. 

"Practical  instruction  accompanies  well  reasoned  theory  at 
every  turn,  and  for  this  reason  the  book  cannot  fairly  be  styled 
entirely  idealistic  or  transcendental,  though  the  level  of  its 
teachings  is  far  removed  from  the  ordinary." — Occult  Review, 
London.  

"A  gold  mine  of  occult  wisdom  and  spiritual  help." 

Mrs.  E.  S. 

"Of  all  the  occult  books  I  ever  read  this  is  the  Prince." 

. J.  H.  Anderson. 

"What  pleases  us  in  this  volume  is  the  common  sense  atti- 
tude taken  on  the  various  topics." — Library  Critic. 

"The  greatest  occult  book  since  The  Secret  Doctrine." 

J.  B. 

"I  am  glad  to  read  a  book  of  this  kind  without  being 
mystified."  Mrs.  G.  D.  R. 

"It  is  free  from  bias.  It  does  not  assume  to  speak  the  last 
word  for  anyone." — New  Thought  News. 

"A  veritable  storehouse  of  light  and  truth."     T.  D.  W. 

"An  especially  good  book  for  our  Theosophical,  Astro- 
logical and  Occult  friends,  who  also  incline  towards  New 
Thought.  High  ideals  are  given  upon  sex  and  generation,  and 
the  book  is  permeated  with  a  large  tolerance  and  loving  ser- 
vice towards  advancing  humanity.  The  diction  is  especially 
fine — the  smooth,  clear  writing  of  culture."— The  Master  Mind 
Magazine. 


The  Soundless  Sound 

BY 

The  Teacher  of  ®ty  ©rtor  of  tip  15 

A  dainty  book  of  devotion  and  meditation 


EXTRACT  FROM  THE  FOREWORD 

This  little  book  comes  to  you,  dear  reader,  as  a  messenger  winged  with  the 
love  of  the  Master,  Who  would  gather  His  children  from  the  four  winds. 

"To  all  who  are  yearning  for  love  and  understanding,  who  are  weary  of 
waiting  for  the  eventide  when  the  Master  shall  walk  in  His  garden  in  the  cool 
of  the  day  to  meet  His  disciples,  this  little  booklet  is  sent." 


APPRECIATIONS 

"This  is  one  of  those  truly  delightful  works  which  appeal  forcibly  to  all  who 
are  seeking  to  penetrate  below  the  surface  of  existence  and  discover  something 
of  the  deep  life  which  throbs  and  pulsates  through  the  unseen  universe.  The 
transcribers.  Dr.  F.  Homer  and  Harriette  Augusta  Curtiss,  are  clearly  in  touch 
with  some  fertile  source  of  spiritual  enlightenment  whence  they  derive  such  instruc- 
tion as  enables  them  to  be  largely  helpful  to  seekers  along  the  road  to  spiritual 
realization.  As  a  dainty  gift  book,  it  is  a  gem,  beautifully  bound  in  green  silk 
cloth,  stamped  in  gold." — VV.  J.  Colville,  Editor  Mystic  Light  Library  Bulletin, 
June,  1912. 

"Its  message  is  of  the  Inner  Voice  that  all  must  hear,  and  its  words  are  full 
of  Spirit  and  Life,  bearing  all  the  marks  of  inspired  utterance.  It  is  a  book  to 
take  with  you  into  the  silences  of  Nature,  these  fair  days,  to  ponder  until  an 
answering  thrill  tells  you  its  work  is  done,  for  the  same  Voice  that  voiced  those 
words,  now  speaks  in  your  own  heart." — Annie  Rix  Militz,  Editor  Master  Mind 
Magazine,  August,  1912. 


Bound  in  green  silk  cloth,   stamped  in   gold.      A  dainty  Christmas  gift. 
Order  now  as  the  edition  is  limited.    Price  75  cents,  postpaid 

THE  CURTISS  BOOK  Co. 

1723  McCaddcn  Place.  LOS  ANGELES,  CAL. 


The  Curtiss  Book  Co. 

PUBLISHERS  OF 
Religious,  Mystical  and  Occult  Literature. 

The  Curtiss  Book  Company  is  the  book  and  publishing 
department  of  The  Order  of  the  15,  and  the  profits  from  its 
business  go  to  further  the  work  of  the  Order  throughout  the 
world. 

The  Curtiss  Book  Company  will  have  any  occult,  mystical 
or  New  Thought  book  or  magazine  you  may  order  mailed 
direct  to  you  from  the  publisher  at  the  regular  prices. 

Let  us  have  your  order  for  Christmas  and  gift  books. 
Order  early  and  avoid  delays. 


THE  CURTISS  BOOK  COMPANY, 

1723  MCCADDEN  PLACE, 

Los  ANGELES,  CAL. 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


DEC  0  8 


DD20  15M  4-02  _ 

21-100m-8,'34 


3(9? 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


/ 


258635^ 


